2k16 cs6 gmc savana 23149316a.ai 1 7/27/2015 2:40:20 pm

C

M

Y

CM

MY

CY

CMY

K

2k16_CS6_GMC_savana_23149316A.ai 1 7/27/2015 2:40:20 PM2k16_CS6_GMC_savana_23149316A.ai 1 7/27/2015 2:40:20 PM

GMC Savana Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S./Canada-9159232) -2016 - crc - 6/17/15

Contents Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Keys, Doors, and Windows . . . . . 23

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Instruments and Controls . . . . . . . 85

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 130

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . . 163

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Service and Maintenance . . . . . 294

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

Customer Information . . . . . . . . . 310

Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . 320

OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334


2 Introduction

Introduction

The names, logos, emblems,slogans, vehicle model names, andvehicle body designs appearing inthis manual including, but not limitedto, GM, the GM logo, GMC, theGMC Truck Emblem, and SAVANAare trademarks and/or servicemarks of General Motors LLC, itssubsidiaries, affiliates, or licensors.

For vehicles first sold in Canada,substitute the name “GeneralMotors of Canada Limited” for GMCwherever it appears in this manual.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on the vehiclebecause of optional equipment thatwas not purchased on the vehicle,model variants, country

specifications, features/applicationsthat may not be available in yourregion, or changes subsequent tothe printing of this owner manual.

If the vehicle has the Duramax®

Diesel engine, see the Duramaxdiesel supplement for additional andspecific information on this engine.

If the vehicle has the CNG engine,see the Express/Savana CNGCompressed Natural Gassupplement for additional andspecific information on this engine.

Refer to the purchasedocumentation relating to yourspecific vehicle to confirm thefeatures.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Canadian Vehicle Owners

Propriétaires Canadiens

A French language manual can beobtained from your dealer, atwww.helminc.com, or from:

On peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès duconcessionnaire ou à l'adressesavant:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Using this ManualTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle, use the Index in theback of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page number whereit can be found.

Danger, Warning, andCautionWarning messages found on vehiclelabels and in this manual describehazards and what to do to avoid orreduce them.

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 23149316 A First Printing ©2015 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.


Introduction 3

{ Danger

Danger indicates a hazard with ahigh level of risk which will resultin serious injury or death.

{ Warning

Warning indicates a hazard thatcould result in injury or death.

Caution

Caution indicates a hazard thatcould result in property or vehicledamage.

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “DoNot,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not letthis happen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gauge, or indicator.

M : Shown when the ownermanual has additional instructionsor information.

* : Shown when the servicemanual has additional instructionsor information.

0 : Shown when there is moreinformation on another page —“see page.”

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. For moreinformation on the symbol, refer tothe Index.

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

# : Air Conditioning

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

% : Audio Steering Wheel Controlsor OnStar® (if equipped)

J : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

` : Do Not Puncture

^ : Do Not Service

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

_ : Flame/Fire Prohibited

. : Fuel Gauge

+ : Fuses

3 : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

i : Top Tether Anchors for ChildRestraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

} : Power


4 Introduction

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

_ : Tow/Haul Mode

d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak®

a : Under Pressure

M : Windshield Washer Fluid


In Brief 5

In Brief

Instrument PanelInstrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Initial Drive InformationInitial Drive Information . . . . . . . . . . 8Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 8Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Airbag On-Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . 11Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . . 12Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . . 14Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Vehicle FeaturesInfotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . 17Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . . . 19Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . 19Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 20

Parking Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Performance and MaintenanceTraction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . . . 21Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . 22E85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22


6 In Brief

Instrument Panel


In Brief 7

1. Air Vents 0 162.

2. Driver Information Center (DIC)Buttons (Out of View). SeeDriver Information Center (DIC)0 105.

3. Turn Signal Lever. See Turnand Lane-Change Signals0 126.

Windshield Wiper/Washer 0 87.

4. Horn 0 87.

5. Hazard Warning Flashers0 126.

6. Instrument Cluster 0 93.

7. Shift Lever. See AutomaticTransmission 0 182.

Manual Mode 0 185 (IfEquipped).

8. Climate Control Systems0 157.

9. Infotainment 0 130.

10. Power Outlets 0 91.

11. USB Port (If Equipped). SeeAuxiliary Devices 0 144.

12. Power Outlet 110 VoltAlternating Current. See PowerOutlets 0 91.

13. Rear Heating System 0 159 (IfEquipped).

14. Passenger Airbag On-OffSwitch (If Equipped). SeeAirbag On-Off Switch 0 60.

15. Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control 0 188 (IfEquipped).

16. Tow/Haul Mode Button (IfEquipped). See Tow/HaulMode 0 186.

17. Steering Wheel Controls 0 86(If Equipped).

18. Steering Wheel Adjustment0 86 (Out of View), (IfEquipped).

19. Hood Release. See Hood0 214.

20. Cruise Control 0 190 (IfEquipped).

Fast Idle System 0 177 (IfEquipped).

21. Parking Brake 0 187.

22. Data Link Connector (DLC)(Out of View). See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp (Check EngineLight) 0 100.

23. Instrument Panel IlluminationControl 0 127.

Dome Lamp Override. SeeDome Lamps 0 127.

24. Exterior Lamp Controls 0 123.


8 In Brief

Initial DriveInformationThis section provides a briefoverview about some of theimportant features that may or maynot be on your specific vehicle.

For more detailed information, referto each of the features which can befound later in this owner manual.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemIf equipped, the RKE transmitter isused to remotely lock and unlockthe doors from up to 60 m (197 ft)away from the vehicle.

RKE Transmitter with RemoteStart Shown

Q : Press to lock all doors.

Lock and unlock feedback can bepersonalized. See VehiclePersonalization 0 117.

K : Press to unlock the driver door.Press K again within five secondsto unlock all remaining doors.

j : Press to unlock only the cargodoors.

L : Press and release to locatethe vehicle. PressL and hold formore than two seconds to sound the

panic alarm. PressL again tocancel the panic alarm or move theignition to ON/RUN.

See Keys 0 23 or Keys 0 23 andRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation 0 25.

Remote Vehicle StartIf equipped, the engine can bestarted from outside of the vehicle.

Starting the Vehicle

1. Press and release Q on theRKE transmitter.

2. Immediately press and hold /for at least four seconds or untilthe turn signal lamps flash.

3. Start the vehicle normally afterentering.

When the vehicle starts, the parkinglamps will turn on.

Remote start can be extended.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start, do one ofthe following:


In Brief 9

. Press and hold/ until theparking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the vehicle on and then off.

See Remote Vehicle Start 0 27.

Door Locks

Manual Door Locks

Lock and unlock the door from theoutside using the key or the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter,

if equipped. From the inside, slidethe manual lever on the door upor down.

See Door Locks 0 28.

Power Door Locks

If equipped, press T to lock orunlock the doors.

See Power Door Locks 0 29.

Windows

Manual Windows

Turn the hand crank on each doorto raise or lower the side doorwindows.

See Manual Windows 0 36.

Power Windows

If equipped with power windows,press or pull up on the switch tolower or raise the window. Thedriver door also has a control tooperate the front passenger window.

Express-Down

The driver window switch also hasan express-down feature that allowsthe window to be lowered withoutholding the switch. Press fully andrelease the window switch markedAUTO to activate the express-downmode. This mode can be canceled


10 In Brief

at any time by pulling up on theswitch. To open the window partway, lightly tap the switch until thewindow is at the desired position.

See Power Windows 0 36.

Seat Adjustment

Manual Seats

To adjust the manual seat:

1. Lift the bar under the frontedge of the seat cushion tounlock the seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the bar.

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure the seat islocked in place.

See Seat Adjustment 0 40.

Power Seats

To adjust a power seat, if available,use the controls on the front ofthe seat:

. Adjust the seat by moving thecenter knob up, down, right,or left.

. Raise and lower the front or rearof the seat cushion by movingthe right or left lever up or down.

See Power Seat Adjustment 0 40.

Reclining Seatbacks

To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the lever on the inboardside of the seat.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, and thenrelease the lever to lock theseatback in place.

3. Push and pull on the seatbackto make sure it is locked.

To return the seatback to the uprightposition:


In Brief 11

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatback willreturn to the upright position.


See Reclining Seatbacks 0 40.

Safety Belts

Refer to the following sections forimportant information on how to usesafety belts properly.

. Safety Belts 0 45.

. How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly 0 46.

. Lap-Shoulder Belt 0 47.

. Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) 0 71.

Airbag On-Off SwitchIf the instrument panel has one ofthe switches pictured in thefollowing illustrations, the vehiclehas an airbag on-off switch that youcan use to manually turn on or offthe front outboard passenger airbag.

United States

Canada

To operate the airbag on-off switch,use the vehicle key.

See Airbag On-Off Switch 0 60 forimportant information.

Mirror Adjustment

Exterior Mirrors

Vehicles with manual outsidemirrors can be adjusted by movingthe mirror up and down or left andright so you can see a little of theside of the vehicle, and a clear viewof objects behind you.


12 In Brief

If equipped with power mirrors,select each mirror by turning theknob clockwise for the passengerside mirror or counterclockwise forthe driver side mirror. Adjust themirror angle by moving the knob inthe desired direction.

Keep the selector switch in thecenter position when not adjustingeither outside mirror.

If equipped, towing mirrors can beadjusted manually for a clear viewof the objects behind you.

Manually fold the mirrors inward toprevent damage when goingthrough an automatic car wash. Tofold, pull the mirror toward thevehicle. Push the mirror outward toreturn it to the original position.

Interior Mirror

Adjust the rearview mirror for a clearview of the area behind yourvehicle.

Push the tab forward for daytimeuse and pull it rearward fornighttime use to avoid glare of theheadlamps from behind.

See Manual Rearview Mirror 0 36.

Steering WheelAdjustment

If equipped with a tilt steering wheel,the lever is on the left side of thesteering column.

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever to move thesteering wheel up or down intoa comfortable position.


In Brief 13

2. Release the lever to lock thesteering wheel in place.

See Steering Wheel Adjustment0 86.

Interior LightingDome Lamps

The dome lamps come on when anydoor is opened. They turn off afterall the doors are closed.

The instrument panel brightnessknob extends whenD is pressed.To manually turn on the domelamps, pressD then turn the knobclockwise to the farthest position. In

this position, the dome lampsremain on whether a door is openedor closed.

E DOME OFF : This button islocated above the instrument panelbrightness knob.

Press the button in and the domelamps remain off when a door isopened. Press the button again sothat the dome lamps come on whena door is opened.

Reading Lamps

If equipped with reading lamps,press the button located next toeach lamp to turn it on or off.

The vehicle may also have readinglamps in other locations. The lampscannot be adjusted.

For more information on interiorlighting, see:

. Instrument Panel IlluminationControl 0 127.

. Entry/Exit Lighting 0 128.

Exterior Lighting

The exterior lamp control is on theinstrument panel to the left of thesteering wheel.

O : Briefly turn the control to thisposition to turn the automaticheadlamps and Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) off or back on.

For vehicles first sold in Canada,the off position only works forvehicles that are shifted into theP (Park) position.

AUTO : Automatically turns theexterior lamps on and off,depending on outside lighting.

; : Turns on the parking lampsincluding all lamps, except theheadlamps.


14 In Brief

2 : Turns on the headlampstogether with the parking lamps andinstrument panel lights.

See:

. Exterior Lamp Controls 0 123

. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)0 124

. Automatic Headlamp System0 125

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The lever is on the left side of thesteering column.

8 : Use for a single wiping cycle.

6 : Use to adjust the delay timebetween wipes. Turn the band up ordown for more frequent wipes orless frequent wipes.

d : Slow wipes.

a : Fast wipes.

9 : Use to turn the wipers off.

L : Push the paddle on top of theturn signal lever to spray washerfluid on the windshield.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer 0 87.


In Brief 15

Climate ControlsThe vehicle's heating, cooling, and ventilation can be controlled with thesesystems.

Vehicles without Air Conditioning

1. Fan Control

2. Temperature Control

3. Air Delivery Mode Control


16 In Brief

Vehicles with Air Conditioning

1. Fan Control



4. Rear Window Defogger

See Climate Control Systems 0 157.See Rear Heating System 0 159,if equipped or Rear Climate ControlSystem 0 159, if equipped.

Transmission

Range Selection Mode

If equipped, Range Selection Modehelps control the vehicle'stransmission and vehicle speedwhile driving downhill or towing atrailer by letting you select a desiredrange of gears.

To use this feature:

1. Move the shift lever toM (Manual Mode).

2. Press the +/− buttons on theshift lever, to select the desiredrange of gears for currentdriving conditions.

When M (Manual Mode) is selected,a number displays in the DIC next tothe M indicating the current gear.


In Brief 17

Grade Braking is not available whenRange Selection Mode is active.See Tow/Haul Mode 0 186.

While using Range Selection Mode,Cruise Control and the Tow/HaulMode can be used. See ManualMode 0 185.

Vehicle Features

Infotainment SystemIf the vehicle has a base radio it isincluded in this manual. See theseparate infotainment manual forinformation on the connected radios,audio players, phone, navigationsystem, and voice or speechrecognition. There is alsoinformation on settings anddownloadable applications (ifequipped).


18 In Brief

Radio(s)

Radio with CD/MP3 Shown, Others Similar

O : Press to turn the system on andoff. Turn to increase or decrease thevolume.

BAND : Press to choose betweenFM1, FM2, and AM.

f : Turn to select radio stations.

© SEEK or ¨ SEEK : Seek or scanstations.

4 : Press to switch the displaybetween the radio station frequencyand the time. While the ignition isoff, press this button to display thetime. Press to display additional textinformation related to the currentFM-RDS station or MP3 song.A choice of additional informationsuch as Channel, Song, Artist, and

CAT (category) can display.Continue pressing to highlight thedesired tab, or press the softkeylocated under any one of the tabsand the information about that tabdisplays.

For more information about theseand other radio features, seeInfotainment 0 130.

Storing a Favorite Station

Depending on which radio thevehicle has, radio stations arestored as either favorites or presets.

For vehicles with a FAV button, amaximum of 36 stations can bestored as favorites using the sixsoftkeys below the radio stationfrequency tabs and by using theradio FAV button. Press FAV to gothrough up to six pages of favorites,each having six favorite stationsavailable per page. Each page offavorites can contain anycombination of AM and FM stations.

For more information on storing afavorite station, see Operation0 134.


In Brief 19

Setting the Clock

To set the time and date for theRadio with CD/MP3:

1. Press H and the HR, MIN, MM,DD, and YYYY (hour, minute,month, day, and year) display.

2. Press the softkey under anyone of the tabs to be changed.

3. Press the © SEEK or ¨ SEEKbuttons,s REV or\ FWD

buttons, or by turning fclockwise or counterclockwiseto increase or decrease thetime or date.

For detailed instructions on settingthe clock for your specific audiosystem, see Clock 0 90.

Portable Audio DevicesThis vehicle may have an auxiliaryinput on the radio faceplate and aUSB port on the instrument panel.External devices such as an iPod®,laptop computer, MP3 player,or USB storage device can beconnected to the auxiliary port using

a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) input cable or theUSB port depending on the audiosystem.

See "Using the Auxiliary Input Jack"and "Using the USB Port" inAuxiliary Devices 0 144.

Steering Wheel Controls

If equipped with audio steeringwheel controls, some audio controlscan be adjusted at the steeringwheel.

w : Press to go to the next favoriteradio station, track on a CD,or folder on an iPod® or USBdevice.

c /x : Press to go to theprevious favorite radio station, trackon a CD, or folder on an iPod® orUSB device. Also press to reject anincoming call, or end a current call.

b / g : Press to silence the vehiclespeakers only. Press again to turnthe sound on. Press and hold longerthan two seconds to interact withOnStar® or Bluetooth systems,if equipped.

+ e : Press to increase volume.

− e : Press to decrease volume.

SRCE : Press to switch betweenthe radio and CD, and for equippedvehicles, the front auxiliary.

¨ : Press to seek the next radiostation, the next track while sourcedto the CD, or to select tracks andfolders on an iPod® or USB device.

See Steering Wheel Controls 0 86.


20 In Brief

Cruise Control

If equipped with cruise control, usethe following buttons:

I : Press to turn cruise control onor off. The white indicator comes onin the instrument cluster whencruise control is turned on.

+RES : If there is a set speed inmemory, press briefly to resume to apreviously set speed, or press andhold to accelerate. If cruise controlis already active, use to increasevehicle speed.

SET− : Press briefly to set thespeed and activate cruise control,or press and hold to decelerate.If cruise control is already active,use to decrease vehicle speed.

[ : Press to disengage cruisecontrol without erasing the setspeed from memory.

See Cruise Control 0 190.

Rear VisionCamera (RVC)If equipped, the RVC displays aview of the area behind the vehiclewhen the vehicle is shifted intoR (Reverse). The display will appearon either the inside rearview mirroror navigation screen, if equipped.

To clean the camera lens, locatedabove the license plate, rinse it withwater and wipe it with a soft cloth.

See Rear Vision Camera (RVC)0 193.

Parking AssistIf equipped, Rear Parking Assist(RPA) uses sensors on the rearbumper to assist with parking andavoiding objects while inR (Reverse). It operates at speedsless than 8 km/h (5 mph) and usesaudible beeps to provide distanceand system information.

Keep the sensors on the vehicle'srear bumper clean to ensure properoperation.

See Parking Assist 0 195.

Power OutletsThe accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or an MP3player.

The vehicle may have twoaccessory power outlets on theinstrument panel.

Remove the cover to access andreplace when not in use.

See Power Outlets 0 91.


In Brief 21

Performance andMaintenance

Traction Control/Electronic StabilityControlThe vehicle may have a tractioncontrol system that limits wheel spinand the StabiliTrak system thatassists with directional control of thevehicle in difficult driving conditions.Both systems turn on automaticallyevery time the vehicle is started.

. To turn off traction control, pressand release the StabiliTrakbutton g. The appropriate DICmessage will display. See RideControl System Messages0 114.

. To turn off both traction controland StabiliTrak, press and holdthe StabiliTrak button g until the

StabiliTrak OFF lightYilluminates and the appropriateDIC messages display. See RideControl System Messages0 114.

. Press and release theStabiliTrak button again to turnon both systems.

See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control 0 188.

Tire Pressure MonitorThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).

The low tire pressure warning lightalerts to a significant loss inpressure of one of the vehicle'stires. If the warning light comes on,stop as soon as possible and inflatethe tires to the recommendedpressure shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 170. Thewarning light will remain on until thetire pressure is corrected.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thismay be an early indicator that thetire pressures are getting low andthe tires need to be inflated to theproper pressure.

The TPMS does not replace normalmonthly tire maintenance. Maintainthe correct tire pressures.


22 In Brief

See Tire Pressure Monitor System0 259.

Engine Oil Life SystemThe engine oil life system calculatesengine oil life based on vehicle useand displays a DIC message whenit is necessary to change the engineoil and filter. The oil life systemshould be reset to 100% onlyfollowing an oil change.

Resetting the Oil Life System

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN,with the engine off.

2. Fully press and release theaccelerator pedal slowly threetimes within five seconds.

3. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.

See Engine Oil Life System 0 219.

E85 or FlexFuelVehicles with a yellow fuel cap canuse either unleaded gasoline orethanol fuel containing up to 85%ethanol (E85). See E85 or FlexFuel

0 198. For all other vehicles, useonly the unleaded gasolinedescribed under Fuel 0 197.

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some driving tipsto get the best fuel economypossible.

. Avoid fast starts and acceleratesmoothly.

. Brake gradually and avoidabrupt stops.

. Avoid idling the engine for longperiods of time.

. When road and weatherconditions are appropriate, usecruise control.

. Always follow posted speedlimits or drive more slowly whenconditions require.

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.

. Replace the vehicle's tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire's sidewallnear the size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.

Roadside AssistanceProgramU.S.: 1-888-881-3302

TTY Users (U.S. Only):1-888-889-2438

Canada: 1-800-268-6800

As the owner of a new GMC, youare automatically enrolled in theRoadside Assistance program.

See Roadside Assistance Program0 314.


Keys, Doors, and Windows 23

Keys, Doors, andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . 27Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29Cargo Door Relocking . . . . . . . . . 29Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 29Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

DoorsSide Door (60/40Swing-Out) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Sliding Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . . . 33

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Trailer-Tow Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Interior MirrorsInterior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . 36Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . 36

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Swing-Out Windows . . . . . . . . . . . 37Enhanced Technology Glass . . . 37Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ Warning

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe ignition key is dangerous andchildren or others could beseriously injured or killed. Theycould operate the power windowsor other controls or make thevehicle move. The windows willfunction with the keys in theignition, and children or otherscould be caught in the path of aclosing window. Do not leavechildren in a vehicle with theignition key.


24 Keys, Doors, and Windows

{ Warning

If the key is unintentionallyrotated while the vehicle isrunning, the ignition could bemoved out of the RUN position.This could be caused by heavyitems hanging from the key ring,or by large or long items attachedto the key ring that could becontacted by the driver orsteering wheel. If the ignitionmoves out of the RUN position,the engine will shut off, brakingand steering power assist may be

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

impacted, and airbags may notdeploy. To reduce the risk ofunintentional rotation of theignition key, do not change theway the ignition key and RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter,if equipped, are connected to theprovided key rings.

The ignition key and key rings, andRKE transmitter, if equipped, aredesigned to work together as asystem to reduce the risk ofunintentionally moving the key outof the RUN position. The ignitionkey has a small hole to allowattachment of the provided key ring.It is important that any replacementignition keys have a small hole. Seeyour dealer if a replacement key isrequired.

The combination and size of therings that came with your keys werespecifically selected for yourvehicle. The rings are connected tothe key like two links of a chain toreduce the risk of unintentionally

moving the key out of the RUNposition. Do not add any additionalitems to the ring attached to theignition key. Attach additional itemsonly to the second ring, and limitadded items to a few essential keysor small, light items no larger thanan RKE transmitter.

The key is used for the ignition andall door locks.

The key has a bar-coded key tagthat the dealer or qualified locksmithcan use to make new keys. Storethis information in a safe place, notin the vehicle.



See your dealer if a replacementkey or additional key is needed.

If it becomes difficult to turn a key,inspect the key blade for debris.Periodically clean with a brushor pick.

With an active OnStar subscription,an OnStar Advisor may remotelyunlock the vehicle. See OnStarOverview 0 324.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement0 320.

If there is a decrease in the RKEoperating range:

. Check the distance. Thetransmitter may be too far fromthe vehicle.

. Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal.

. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section.

. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer or a qualified technicianfor service.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationIf equipped, the RKE transmitterfunctions work up to 60 m (197 ft)away from the vehicle.

Other conditions can affect theperformance of the transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System 0 25.

RKE Transmitter with RemoteStart Shown

Q (Lock) : Press once to lock alldoors. If enabled through the DriverInformation Center (DIC), theparking lamps flash once to indicatelocking has occurred.

The horn may chirp when Q ispressed again within five seconds.See Vehicle Personalization 0 117.

K (Unlock) : Press to unlock thedriver door. If K is pressed againwithin five seconds, all remainingdoors unlock.



The interior lamps come on andstay on for 20 seconds or until theignition is turned on. If enabledthrough the DIC, the parking lampsflash twice to indicate unlocking hasoccurred. See VehiclePersonalization 0 117.

j (Cargo Door) : Press to unlockonly the cargo doors.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start) : Forvehicles with this feature, press Qand then press and hold/ for atleast four seconds or until the turnsignal lamps flash to start theengine from outside the vehicleusing the RKE transmitter. SeeRemote Vehicle Start 0 27.

L (Vehicle Locator/PanicAlarm) : Press and release tolocate the vehicle. The turn signallamps flash and the horn soundsthree times.

Press and holdL for more thantwo seconds to sound the panicalarm. The turn signal lamps flashand the horn sounds repeatedly for30 seconds. The alarm turns offwhen the ignition is moved to ON/

RUN orL is pressed again. Theignition must be in LOCK/OFF forthe panic alarm to work.

Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmitters programmedto the vehicle will work. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased andprogrammed through your dealer.When the replacement transmitter isprogrammed to the vehicle, allremaining transmitters must also beprogrammed. Any lost or stolentransmitters no longer work once thenew transmitter is programmed.Each vehicle can have up tofour transmitters programmed to it.

Battery Replacement

Replace the battery if the REPLACEBATTERY IN REMOTE KEYmessage displays in the DIC. SeeKey and Lock Messages 0 113.

Caution

When replacing the battery, donot touch any of the circuitry onthe transmitter. Static from yourbody could damage thetransmitter.

To replace the battery:

1. Separate the transmitter with aflat, thin object, such as a flathead screwdriver.

. Carefully insert the tool intothe notch located along theparting line of the



transmitter. Do not insertthe tool too far. Stop assoon as resistance is felt.

. Twist the tool until thetransmitter is separated.

2. Remove the old battery. Do notuse a metal object.

3. Insert the new battery, positiveside facing down. Replace witha CR2032 or equivalentbattery.

4. Snap the transmitter backtogether.

Remote Vehicle StartThis vehicle may have a remotestart feature. This feature allows youto start the engine from outside thevehicle. It may also start thevehicle's heating or air conditioningsystems. See Climate ControlSystems 0 157.

Laws in some local communitiesmay restrict the use of remotestarters. For example, some lawsmay require a person using remotestart to have the vehicle in view

when doing so. Check localregulations for any requirements onremote starting of vehicles.

Do not use the remote start featureif the vehicle is low on fuel. Thevehicle may run out of fuel.

The RKE transmitter range may beless while the vehicle is running.

There are other conditions whichcan affect the performance of thetransmitter, see Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System 0 25.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start) : Thisbutton will be on the RKEtransmitter if you have remote start.

To start the engine using the remotestart feature:

1. Press and release Q on thetransmitter.

2. Immediately press and hold /until the turn signal lampsflash. If you cannot see thevehicle's lamps, press and holdfor at least four seconds.

When the engine starts, theparking lamps will turn on andremain on while the engine is

running. The doors will belocked. The airbag readinesslight will be on during a remotestart. It should turn off whenthe ignition is turned to ON/RUN. See Airbag ReadinessLight 0 97.

The engine will continue to runfor 10 minutes. After30 seconds, repeat the steps ifa 10-minute extension isdesired. Remote start can beextended only once.

After entering the vehicle during aremote start, insert and turn the keyto ON/RUN to drive the vehicle.

The maximum number of remotestarts between ignition cycles withthe key is two.

If the remote start procedure is usedagain before the first 10 minute timeframe has ended, the first10 minutes will immediately expireand the second 10 minute timeframe will start.

After the engine has been remotestarted two times, the ignition switchmust be turned to ON/RUN and then



back to LOCK/OFF using the keybefore the remote start procedurecan be used again.

To cancel a remote start do any ofthe following:

. Press and hold/ until theparking lamps turn off.


. Turn the ignition on and thenback off.

The remote vehicle start feature willnot operate if:

. The key is in the ignition.

. The hood is open.

. The hazard warning flashersare on.

. There is an emission controlsystem malfunction. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp(Check Engine Light) 0 100.

. The engine coolant temperatureis too high.

. The oil pressure is low.

. Two remote vehicle starts havealready been provided.

Door Locks

{ Warning

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily openthe doors and fall out of amoving vehicle. When adoor is locked, the handlewill not open it. The chanceof being thrown out of thevehicle in a crash isincreased if the doors arenot locked. So, allpassengers should wearsafety belts properly and thedoors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A childcan be overcome by

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

extreme heat and can sufferpermanent injuries or evendeath from heat stroke.Always lock the vehiclewhenever leaving it.

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopthe vehicle. Locking thedoors can help prevent thisfrom happening.



To lock the door from the inside,slide the manual lever on the doordown. To unlock the door, slide themanual lever up.

From the outside, use the key.

If the vehicle is equipped withKeyless Entry, see Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation 0 25.

Power Door Locks

If equipped, press T to lock orunlock the doors.

When a door is locked, the insidedoor handle will not work.

Cargo Door RelockingIf the cargo door is open when thelock button is pressed on the dooror the RKE transmitter, all doors willlock except the cargo door. Thecargo door will lock immediatelywhen it is closed or when thedelayed locking feature functions.

Delayed LockingWhen locking the doors with thepower lock switch and a door open,the doors will lock five seconds afterthe last door is closed. The hornchirps to signal that the delayedlocking feature is in use.

Pressinge or Q on the RKEtransmitter will override the delayedlocking feature and immediately lockall the doors.

This feature will not operate if thekey is in the ignition.

This feature can be programmedusing the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See “DELAY DOORLOCK” in Vehicle Personalization0 117.

Automatic Door LocksThe vehicle may have an automaticlock/unlock feature. This feature canbe programmed using the DriverInformation Center (DIC). SeeVehicle Personalization 0 117.

Lockout ProtectionThis feature protects you fromlocking the key in the vehicle whenthe key is in the ignition and a dooris open.

If the power lock switch is pressedwhen either the driver, passenger,or rear door is open, all the doorswill lock and then the driver door willunlock. This feature does notinclude the side cargo door.

If the vehicle has an ambulancepackage, this feature is disabled.

Safety LocksSecurity locks are located on thefront portion of the 60/40 sideswing-out door or the sidesliding door.



60/40 Swing-Out SideDoor—Driver Side Shown,Passenger Side Similar

For the 60/40 side swing-out door,move the button to the right for thedriver side door or to the left for thepassenger side door to engage thesecurity feature.

Move the button to the left for thedriver side door or to the right forthe passenger side door to returnthe door locks to normal operation.

Side Sliding Door

For the side sliding door, move thebutton up to engage the securityfeature. Move the button down toreturn the door locks to normaloperation.

Doors

Side Door (60/40Swing-Out)

To open the front portion of a 60/40 door from the outside, pull out onthe handle and open the door.



To open the front portion of a 60/40 door from the inside, pull thehandle toward you and push thedoor open.

To open the rear portion of a 60/40 door from the outside, pull thehandle on the side of the rear doorand pull the door toward you.

To close the 60/40 side doors, closethe rear door first. Then close thefront door. Check to make sure thatboth doors are completely closed.

The swing-out doors have a checkstrap assembly in the door frame tokeep the door from opening beyond90 degrees.

To open the door beyond90 degrees, close the door partially,pull the check strap toward you andthen open the door. When the dooris closed, the check strap willautomatically re-engage.

Sliding Door

To open the sliding side door fromthe outside, pull the handle towardthe rear of the vehicle and slide thedoor open.

To close the sliding side door fromthe outside, use the handle to slidethe door toward the front of thevehicle.

When the door is closed, it will beflush with the side of the body.



To open the sliding side door fromthe inside, pull the handle towardthe rear of the vehicle. Then, slidethe door toward the rear of thevehicle.

To close the sliding side door fromthe inside, grasp the handle andslide the door toward the front of thevehicle.

Make sure the door is completelyclosed before driving away.

Rear Doors

{ Warning

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily openthe doors and fall out of amoving vehicle. When adoor is locked, the handlewill not open it. The chanceof being thrown out of thevehicle in a crash isincreased if the doors arenot locked. So, allpassengers should wearsafety belts properly and thedoors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A childcan be overcome byextreme heat and can sufferpermanent injuries or even

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

death from heat stroke.Always lock the vehiclewhenever leaving it.

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopthe vehicle. Locking thedoors can help prevent thisfrom happening.

To open the rear doors from theoutside, pull the handle toward youto open the passenger side reardoor first.



To open the driver side rear door,pull the latch release at the insideedge of the door.

To close the rear doors, close thedriver side rear door first. Thenclose the passenger side rear door.Check to make sure both doors arecompletely closed.

Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures; however, they do not makethe vehicle impossible to steal.

ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement0 320.

Immobilizer OperationThis vehicle is equipped with thePASS-Key® III+ (PersonalizedAutomotive Security System)theft-deterrent system. PASS-Key III+ is a passive theft deterrentsystem.

The system is automatically armedwhen the key is removed from theignition.

You do not have to manually arm ordisarm the system.

The security light will come on ifthere is a problem with arming ordisarming the theft-deterrentsystem.

When the PASS-Key III+ systemsenses that someone is using thewrong key, it shuts down thevehicle's starter and fuel systems.The starter will not work and fuel willstop being delivered to the engine.Anyone using a trial-and-errormethod to start the vehicle will bediscouraged because of the highnumber of electrical key codes.

If the engine does not start and thesecurity message comes on, thekey may have a damagedtransponder. Turn the ignition offand try again.

If the engine still does not start, andthe key appears to be undamaged,try another ignition key. If the enginestill does not start with the other key,the vehicle needs service. If thevehicle does start, the first key maybe faulty. See your dealer or alocksmith who can service thePASS-Key III+ to have a newkey made.

It is possible for the PASS-Key III+decoder to learn the transpondervalue of a new or replacement key.Up to eight keys may be



programmed for the vehicle. Thisprocedure is for learning additionalkeys only. If all the currentlyprogrammed keys are lost or do notoperate, you must see your dealeror a locksmith who can servicePASS-Key III+ to have keys madeand programmed to the system.

See your dealer or a locksmith whocan service PASS-Key III+ to get anew key blank that is cut exactly asthe ignition key that operates thesystem.

To program the new key:

1. Verify the new key has 1stamped on it.

2. Insert the original, alreadyprogrammed key into theignition lock cylinder and startthe engine. If the engine willnot start, see your dealer forservice.

3. After the engine has started,turn the key to LOCK/OFF andremove the key.

4. Insert the key to beprogrammed and turn it to ON/RUN within 10 seconds ofremoving the previous key.

The security message will turnoff once the key has beenprogrammed. It may not beapparent that the securitymessage went on due to howquickly the key is programmed.

5. Repeat Steps 1–4 if additionalkeys are to be programmed.

If you lose or damage aPASS-Key III+ key, see your dealeror a locksmith who can servicePASS-Key III+ to have a newkey made.

Do not leave the key or device thatdisarms or deactivates thetheft-deterrent system in the vehicle.

Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ Warning

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.

Manual MirrorsAdjust the mirrors by pressing themirror up and down and left andright.

The mirrors can be manually foldedin or out.



On the lower portion of each mirroris an auxiliary convex mirror.A convex mirror's surface is curvedso you can see more from the driverseat. The auxiliary convex mirrorscan be adjusted manually bypressing the mirror.

Trailer-Tow Mirrors

Vehicles with towing mirrors can beadjusted manually for a clear viewof the objects behind you.

On the lower portion of each mirrorthere is an auxiliary convex mirrorthat can be adjusted manually toprovide an extended field of view.

The mirrors can be manually foldedin or out.

Power Mirrors

Select each mirror by turning theknob clockwise for the passengerside mirror or counterclockwise forthe driver side mirror. The centerposition is neutral.

Adjust the mirror angle by movingthe knob in the desired direction.The auxiliary convex mirrors canonly be adjusted manually.

Heated MirrorsFor vehicles with heated mirrors:

1 (Rear Defogger) : Press toheat the mirrors.

An indicator light in the button lightswhen the outside heated mirrors areactivated.

See “Rear Window Defogger” underClimate Control Systems 0 157 formore information.



Interior Mirrors

Interior Rearview MirrorsAdjust the rearview mirror for a clearview of the area behind the vehicle.

Do not spray glass cleaner directlyon the mirror. Use a soft toweldampened with water.

Manual Rearview MirrorPush the tab forward for daytimeuse and pull it rearward fornighttime use to avoid glare of theheadlamps from behind.

Cargo vans without rear door glassmay not have an inside rearviewmirror.

Windows

{ Warning

Never leave a child, a helplessadult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,especially with the windowsclosed in warm or hot weather.They can be overcome by theextreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke.

Manual WindowsOperate the manual windows byturning the hand crank on each doorto raise or lower the side doorwindows.

Power Windows

{ Warning

Children could be seriouslyinjured or killed if caught in thepath of a closing window. Neverleave keys in a vehicle withchildren. See Keys 0 23.



If equipped with power windows,press the switch to lower thewindow and pull the switch up toraise it.

The driver door also has a control tooperate the front passenger window.The power windows will work whenthe ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or when RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) is active.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) 0 179.

Express-Down

The driver window switch has anexpress-down feature that allowsthe window to be lowered without

holding the switch. Press fully andrelease the switch marked AUTO toactivate the express-down mode.This mode can be canceled at anytime by pulling up on the switch. Toopen the window part way, lightlytap the switch until the window is atthe desired position.

Swing-Out Windows

Side Swing-Out Window

To open the side door swing-outwindow, pull up on the latch at theedge of the window. Swing thewindow out and push down on thelatch to lock the window into place.

To close the window, pull the latchtoward you and push down on thelatch to lock it.

Rear Swing‐Out Windows

The vehicle also has rear swing‐outwindows. The rear swing-outwindows work the same way as theside swing‐out window, but the latchis located at the bottom edge of thewindow.

Enhanced TechnologyGlassThe vehicle may be equipped withEnhanced Technology Glass (ETG).ETG is part of the overall occupant



protection system on passenger andcrew vans. ETG may help keeppassengers sitting next to thesefixed windows from being ejectedthrough the glass in some, but notall crashes. Even with this glass,safety belts must still be worn at alltimes. For passenger and crewvans, use only ETG glass approvedfor the vehicle for replacement whendamaged.

The following table shows laminatedglass location, based on vehiclemodel and options.

Vehicle Configuration ETG Locations

Passenger Vans with five or moreseating positions

Sliding door forward window(if equipped) and rear-most sidewindows

Long Wheelbase Cargo Vans Rear-most side windows

Crew VansSliding door forward window(if equipped) and rear-most sidewindows.

Sun VisorsTo block out glare, swing down thesun visors. You can also swing themto the side.

Visor Vanity Mirror

The vehicle may have visor vanitymirrors, with or without lamps. Liftthe mirror cover to turn the lampson, if equipped.


Seats and Restraints 39

Seats andRestraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Front SeatsSeat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . 40Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Rear SeatsRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Safety BeltsSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . 52Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 52Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . 55

When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Airbag On-Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . 60Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 63

Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . . . 63Replacing Airbag System Partsafter a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64Infants and Young Children . . . . 66Child Restraint Systems . . . . . . . 68Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . 70Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) . . . . 71

Replacing LATCH System PartsAfter a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Securing Child Restraints (FrontPassenger Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Head RestraintsOn vehicles with factory installedseats, the front seats have built-inhead restraints that are notadjustable in the outboard seatingpositions.


40 Seats and Restraints

Front Seats

Seat Adjustment

{ Warning

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust a driverseat while the vehicle is moving.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

To adjust the seat:

1. Lift the bar under the frontedge of the seat cushion tounlock the seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the bar.

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure the seat islocked in place.

Power Seat Adjustment

To adjust a power seat, if available,use the controls on the front ofthe seat:

. Move the center knob to theright or left to move the seatforward or rearward.

. Move the center knob up ordown to raise or lower the seat.

. Move the right or left lever up ordown to raise or lower the frontor rear of the seat cushion.

Reclining Seatbacks

{ Warning

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.



To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the lever on the inboardside of the seat.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, and thenrelease the lever to lock theseatback in place.


To return the seatback to the uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatback willreturn to the upright position.


{ Warning

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the safety belts cannot dotheir job.

The shoulder belt will not beagainst your body. Instead, it willbe in front of you. In a crash, youcould go into it, receiving neck orother injuries.

The lap belt could go up overyour abdomen. The belt forceswould be there, not at your pelvicbones. This could cause seriousinternal injuries.

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear thesafety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined ifthe vehicle is moving.



Rear SeatsRemoving the Rear Seat

Disconnect the mini-latch plates forthe lap-shoulder belts on the benchseat to be removed.

1. To do this, press the tip of akey into the release hole of thesafety belt buckle while pullingup on the safety belt.

2. Locate the pins.

On a three-passenger seatthere are two pins on theinboard sides of the rear seats.

Three-Passenger Seat

The left side pin has a gray capwith a black “L” marked on it.


The right side pin has ablack cap with a white “R”marked on it.

On a four-passenger seat,each half of the seat has a setof pins. The left side has a setmarked “L”, and the right sidehas a set marked “R”.

If the vehicle has floor mats,the pins are under a flap thathas been cut into the mat.

3. Pull the pin handle up todisengage the pin from theretaining clip, and then pull thepin out.



4. Repeat this procedure for theother pins.

5. Pull the seat rearward about5 cm (2 in), and then lift theseat from the floor rails.

6. Remove the seat from thevehicle.

7. For the second and third rowseats, stow the safety belt latchby attaching the clip on thesafety belt latch to the trim justinside the side door.

For the last row of seats, stowthe safety belt latch plate onthe clip at the window trim. Rollthe mini-latch into the safetybelt webbing and then hook thesafety belt latch plate onthe clip.

Reinstalling the Rear Seats

{ Warning

A seat that is not locked intoplace properly can move aroundin a collision or sudden stop.People in the vehicle could be

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

injured. Be sure to lock the seatinto place properly wheninstalling it.

{ Warning

A safety belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising therear seatback, always check to besure that the safety belts areproperly routed and attached, andare not twisted.

1. Position the seat into the openslots in both rails. Push theseat forward in the rail, hookingboth seat bases onto the pinsinside of the rails.

2. Locate the hole in the rail toinstall the locking pins at therear of the seat base. If the



vehicle has floor mats, pull theflap that has been cut intothe mat.

3. Insert the locking pins into theseat base and push the seat toline up the pins with the base.

On a three-passenger seat, thepin with the black capmarked “R” must be installedon the right side and the pinwith the gray cap marked “L”must be installed on theleft side.

On a four-passenger seat, thepins marked “R” must beinstalled on the half of the seaton the right side. The pinsmarked “L” must be installed onthe half of the seat on theleft side.


4. Push the pin(s) marked “R”down until they are in theretaining clip.


5. Push the pin(s) marked “L”down until they are in theretaining clip.

6. If the vehicle has a floor mat,put the flap back to its originalposition.

7. Repeat this procedure for theother seat base.



8. Connect the mini-latch platesfor the lap-shoulder belts byinserting the latch plates intothe mini-buckles attached atthe outboard positions of thebench seat. Do not twist thebelts.

9. Check that all locking pins arelocked into place beforeoperating the vehicle.

Safety BeltsThis section of the manualdescribes how to use safety beltsproperly. It also describes somethings not to do with safety belts.

{ Warning

Do not let anyone ride where asafety belt cannot be wornproperly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingsafety belts, injuries can be muchworse than if you are wearingsafety belts. You can be seriouslyinjured or killed by hitting thingsinside the vehicle harder or bybeing ejected from the vehicle. Inaddition, anyone who is notbuckled up can strike otherpassengers in the vehicle.

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision,passengers riding in these areasare more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed. Do not allow

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

passengers to ride in any area ofthe vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts.

Always wear a safety belt, andcheck that all passenger(s) arerestrained properly too.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders 0 97.

Why Safety Belts Work



When riding in a vehicle, you travelas fast as the vehicle does. If thevehicle stops suddenly, you keepgoing until something stops you.It could be the windshield, theinstrument panel, or the safety belts!

When you wear a safety belt, youand the vehicle slow down together.There is more time to stop becauseyou stop over a longer distance and,when worn properly, your strongestbones take the forces from thesafety belts. That is why wearingsafety belts makes such goodsense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?

A: You could be— whether you arewearing a safety belt or not.Your chance of being consciousduring and after a crash, so youcan unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear safetybelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only; so they work withsafety belts— not instead ofthem. Whether or not an airbagis provided, all occupants stillhave to buckle up to get themost protection.

Also, in nearly all states and inall Canadian provinces, the lawrequires wearing safety belts.

How to Wear Safety BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

There are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. Andthere are different rules for smallerchildren and infants. If a child will beriding in the vehicle, see OlderChildren 0 64 or Infants and YoungChildren 0 66. Follow those rules foreveryone's protection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.

There are important things to knowabout wearing a safety belt properly.

. Sit up straight and always keepyour feet on the floor in frontof you.

. Always use the correct bucklefor your seating position.

. Wear the lap part of the belt lowand snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs. In a crash,this applies force to the strong



pelvic bones and you would beless likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the beltwould apply force on yourabdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries.

. Wear the shoulder belt over theshoulder and across the chest.These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restrainingforces. The shoulder belt locks ifthere is a sudden stop or crash.

{ Warning

You can be seriously injured,or even killed, by not wearingyour safety belt properly.

. Never allow the lap orshoulder belt to becomeloose or twisted.

. Never wear the shoulderbelt under both arms orbehind your back.

. Never route the lap orshoulder belt over anarmrest.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt. If you areusing a rear seating position with adetachable safety belt and thesafety belt is not attached, see“Reinstalling the Rear Seats” underRear Seats 0 42 for instructions onreconnecting the safety belt to themini-buckle.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see“Seats” in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not let itget twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lockif you pull the belt across youvery quickly. If this happens, letthe belt go back slightly tounlock it. Then pull the beltacross you more slowly.

If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled out allthe way, the child restraintlocking feature may beengaged. If this happens, letthe belt go back all the wayand start again.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If thebelt is not long enough, seeSafety Belt Extender 0 52.



Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safetybelt could be quickly unbuckledif necessary.

4. If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you.See “Safety Belt HeightAdjuster” later in this sectionfor instructions on use andimportant safety information.

5. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.

It may be necessary to pullstitching on the safety beltthrough the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smalleroccupants.

To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt shouldreturn to its stowed position. Slidethe latch plate up the safety beltwebbing when the safety belt is notin use. The latch plate should reston the stitching on the safety belt,near the guide loop on the side wall.

Always stow the safety belt slowly.If the safety belt webbing returnsquickly to the stowed position, theretractor may lock and cannot be

pulled out. If this happens, pull thesafety belt straight out firmly tounlock the webbing, and thenrelease it. If the webbing is stilllocked in the retractor, see yourdealer.

Before a door is closed, be sure thesafety belt is out of the way. If adoor is slammed against a safetybelt, damage can occur to both thesafety belt and the vehicle.

Safety Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has a safety belt heightadjuster for the driver and frontoutboard passenger positions.

Adjust the height so the shoulderportion of the belt is on the shoulderand not falling off of it. The beltshould be close to, but notcontacting, the neck. Impropershoulder belt height adjustmentcould reduce the effectiveness ofthe safety belt in a crash. See Howto Wear Safety Belts Properly 0 46.



Squeeze both sides of the releasebutton and pull outward. Then movethe height adjuster up or down tothe desired position and release thebutton.

After the adjuster is set to thedesired position, try to move it up ordown without squeezing the releasebutton to make sure it has lockedinto position.

Safety Belt Pretensioners

If the vehicle has seat-mounted sideimpact airbags and roof-rail airbags,it also has safety belt pretensionersfor the front outboard occupants.

Although the safety beltpretensioners cannot be seen, theyare part of the safety belt assembly.They can help tighten the safetybelts during the early stages of amoderate to severe frontal, nearfrontal, or rear crash if the thresholdconditions for pretensioneractivation are met. And, if thevehicle has roof-rail airbags, safetybelt pretensioners can help tightenthe safety belts in a side crash or arollover event.

Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners are activated in acrash, the pretensioners andpossibly other parts of the safetybelt system will need to be replaced.See Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash 0 53.

Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides

This vehicle may have rear safetybelt comfort guides. The guides mayprovide added safety belt comfortfor older children who haveoutgrown booster seats and forsome adults. When installed and

properly adjusted, the comfort guidepositions the shoulder belt awayfrom the neck and head.

The comfort guides for the right rearoutboard seating positions ofthree-passenger bench seats arestored in a pocket on the side of theseatback.



Adjustable comfort guides areavailable through your dealer for theleft rear outboard seating positionsof the three-passenger bench seatsand for the outboard seatingpositions of the four-passengerbench seats. For these seatingpositions, the adjustable comfortguide attaches to a loop on theoutboard side of the seatback.

Comfort Guide Installation andRemoval (Pocket Style)

To install:

1. Locate the guide in a pocket onthe side of the seatback.

2. Place the guide over the belt,and insert the two edges of thebelt into the slots of the guide.

3. Be sure that the belt is nottwisted and it lies flat. Theelastic cord must be behind thebelt with the plastic guide onthe front.

{ Warning

A safety belt that is not properlyworn may not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could be

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

seriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulderand across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.

4. Buckle, position, and releasethe safety belt as describedpreviously in this section. Makesure the shoulder portion of thebelt is on the shoulder and notfalling off of it. The belt shouldbe close to, but not contacting,the neck.

To remove and store the comfortguide, squeeze the belt edgestogether so that the safety belt canbe removed from the guide. Slidethe guide into its storage pocket onthe side of the seatback.

Comfort Guide Installation andRemoval (Adjustable Style)

{ Warning

A safety belt that is not properlyworn may not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulderand across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.

Adjustable comfort guides areavailable through your dealer for theleft rear outboard seating positionsof the three-passenger bench seatsand for the outboard seatingpositions of the four-passengerbench seats. Instructions areincluded with the guides.

Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do notwear safety belts.



A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lapportion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding,throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a safetybelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making safetybelts effective is wearing themproperly.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's safety belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not longenough, your dealer will order youan extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat youwill wear, so the extender will belong enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someoneelse use it, and use it only for theseat it is made to fit. The extenderhas been designed for adults. Neveruse it for securing child seats. Towear it, attach it to the regular safetybelt. For more information, see theinstruction sheet that comes withthe extender.

Safety System CheckNow and then, check that the safetybelt reminder light, safety belts,buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are all working properly.Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system partsthat might keep a safety belt systemfrom doing its job. See your dealerto have it repaired. Torn or frayedsafety belts may not protect you in acrash. They can rip apart underimpact forces. If a belt is torn orfrayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders 0 97.

Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Safety Belt Care 0 52.

Safety Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

{ Warning

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.



Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after aCrash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the safetybelt system in the vehicle.A damaged safety belt systemmay not properly protect theperson using it, resulting inserious injury or even death in acrash. To help make sure thesafety belt systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofsafety belts may not be necessary.But the safety belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.See your dealer to have the safetybelt assemblies inspected orreplaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety beltsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicleor while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light 0 97.

Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the followingairbag:

. A frontal airbag for the driver.

The vehicle may have the followingairbags:

. A frontal airbag for the frontoutboard passenger.

. A seat-mounted side impactairbag for the driver.

. A seat-mounted side impactairbag for the front outboardpassenger.

Seat-mounted side impactairbags are only available onvehicles equipped with roof-railairbags.

. A roof-rail airbag for the driveron vans with single row seating.

. A roof-rail airbag for the frontoutboard passenger on vanswith single row seating.

. A roof-rail airbag for the driverand the passenger seateddirectly behind the driver onvans with two row seating.



. A roof-rail airbag for the frontoutboard passenger and thepassenger seated directlybehind the front outboardpassenger on vans with two rowseating.

If the van is equipped with asliding door, the roof-rail airbagfor the front outboard passengeris separate from the roof-railairbag for the passenger seateddirectly behind the front outboardpassenger. If the van isequipped with a 60/40 swing-outdoor, a single roof-rail airbagcovers both seating positions.

. A roof-rail airbag for the driverand the second and third rowpassengers seated directlybehind the driver on vans withthree or more seating rows.

. A roof-rail airbag for the frontoutboard passenger and thesecond and third rowpassengers seated directlybehind the front outboardpassenger on vans with three ormore seating rows.

If the van is equipped with asliding door, the roof-rail airbagfor the front outboard passengeris separate from the roof-railairbag for the second and thirdrow passengers seated directlybehind the front outboardpassenger. If the van isequipped with a 60/40 swing-outdoor, a single roof-rail airbagcovers all three seatingpositions.

All vehicle airbags have the wordAIRBAG on the trim or on anattached label near the deploymentopening.

For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the center of thesteering wheel for the driver and onthe instrument panel for the frontoutboard passenger.

For seat-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG is on theside of the seatback closest tothe door.

For roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today’s airbagsare also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force of aninflating airbag, all airbags mustinflate very quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ Warning

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your safety belt, evenwith airbags. Airbags aredesigned to work with safetybelts, not replace them. Also,airbags are not designed to inflatein every crash. In some crashessafety belts are the only restraint.See When Should an AirbagInflate? 0 57.

Wearing your safety belt during acrash helps reduce the chance ofhitting things inside the vehicle orbeing ejected from it. Airbags are

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

“supplemental restraints” to thesafety belts. Everyone in thevehicle should wear a safety beltproperly, whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ Warning

Because airbags inflate with greatforce and faster than the blink ofan eye, anyone who is upagainst, or very close to anyairbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Do notsit unnecessarily close to anyairbag, as you would be if sittingon the edge of the seat or leaningforward. Safety belts help keepyou in position before and duringa crash. Always wear a safetybelt, even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle. The safety belts and

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

the front outboard passengerairbags are most effective whenyou are sitting well back andupright in the seat with both feeton the floor.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.

{ Warning

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Always secure childrenproperly in the vehicle. To readhow, see Older Children 0 64 orInfants and Young Children 0 66.

There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument panel, whichshows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbagelectrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See AirbagReadiness Light 0 97.

Where Are the Airbags?



The driver frontal airbag is in thecenter of the steering wheel.

If the vehicle has a front outboardpassenger frontal airbag, it is in thepassenger side instrument panel.

Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

If the vehicle has seat-mounted sideimpact airbags for the driver andfront outboard passenger, they arein the sides of the seatbacks closestto the door.


If the vehicle has a single seatingrow and it has roof-rail airbags forthe driver and front outboardpassenger, the roof-rail airbags arein the ceiling above the sidewindows.




If the vehicle has two seating rows,roof-rail airbags for the driver, frontoutboard passenger, and secondrow outboard passengers are in theceiling above the side windows.If the vehicle has three or moreseating rows, roof-rail airbags forthe driver, front outboard passenger,and second and third row outboardpassengers are in the ceiling abovethe side windows.

{ Warning

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object intothat person causing severe injuryor even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

Do not use seat accessories thatblock the inflation path of aseat-mounted side impact airbag.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie‐downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the path of aninflating roof-rail airbag will beblocked.

When Should an AirbagInflate?This vehicle is equipped with one ormore airbags. See Airbag System0 53. Airbags are designed to inflateif the impact exceeds the specificairbag system's deploymentthreshold. Deployment thresholdsare used to predict how severe acrash is likely to be in time for theairbags to inflate and help restrainthe occupants. The vehicle haselectronic sensors which help theairbag system determine theseverity of the impact. Deploymentthresholds can vary with specificvehicle design.

Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near-frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries mainly to the driver or frontoutboard passenger head andchest.

Whether the frontal airbags will orshould deploy is not based primarilyon how fast the vehicle is traveling.



It depends largely on what you hit,the direction of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds depending onwhether the vehicle hits an objectstraight on or at an angle, andwhether the object is fixed ormoving, rigid or deformable, narrowor wide.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, rearimpacts, or in many side impacts.

Seat-mounted side impact airbags,if equipped, are designed to inflatein moderate to severe side crashesdepending on the location of theimpact. Seat-mounted side impactairbags are not designed to inflate infrontal impacts, near-frontal impacts,rollovers, or rear impacts.A seat-mounted side impact airbagis intended to inflate on the side ofthe vehicle that is struck.

The vehicle may or may not beequipped with roof-rail airbags.Roof-rail airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes depending on the location

of the impact. In addition, theseroof-rail airbags are designed toinflate during a rollover. Roof-railairbags are not designed to inflate infrontal, near-frontal, or rear impacts.All roof-rail airbags will inflate wheneither side of the vehicle is struck orif the sensing system predicts thatthe vehicle is about to roll over onits side.

In any particular crash, no one cansay whether an airbag should haveinflated simply because of thevehicle damage or repair costs.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover. The inflator, the airbag,and related hardware are all part ofthe airbag module.

For airbag locations, see Where Arethe Airbags? 0 55.

How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contactthe inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts bydistributing the force of the impactmore evenly over theoccupant's body.

Rollover capable roof-rail airbagsare designed to help contain thehead and chest of occupants in theoutboard seating positions in thefirst, second, and third rows,if equipped. The rollover capableroof-rail airbags are designed tohelp reduce the risk of full or partialejection in rollover events, althoughno system can prevent all suchejections.

But airbags would not help in manytypes of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant's motion is



not toward those airbags. SeeWhen Should an Airbag Inflate?0 57 for more information.

Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto safety belts.

What Will You See afteran Airbag Inflates?After the frontal airbags andseat-mounted side impact airbags (ifequipped) inflate, they quicklydeflate, so quickly that some peoplemay not even realize an airbaginflated. Roof-rail airbags (ifequipped) may still be at leastpartially inflated for some time afterthey deploy. Some components ofthe airbag module may be hot forseveral minutes. For location of theairbag modules, see What Makesan Airbag Inflate? 0 58.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing out of

the windshield or being able to steerthe vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.

{ Warning

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon asit is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannotget out of the vehicle after anairbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door.If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors(if equipped with power door locks),turn on the interior lamps andhazard warning flashers, and shutoff the fuel system after the airbags

inflate. The feature may alsoactivate, without airbag inflation,after an event that exceeds apredetermined threshold. You canlock the doors, and turn off theinterior lamps and the hazardwarning flashers by using thecontrols for those features.

{ Warning

A crash severe enough to inflatethe airbags may have alsodamaged important functions inthe vehicle, such as the fuelsystem, brake and steeringsystems, etc. Even if the vehicleappears to be drivable after amoderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that couldmake it difficult to safely operatethe vehicle.

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.

In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.



Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the front outboardpassenger airbag.

. Airbags are designed to inflateonly once. After an airbaginflates, you will need some newparts for the airbag system.If you do not get them, the airbagsystem will not be there to helpprotect you in another crash.A new system will include airbagmodules and possibly otherparts. The service manual forthe vehicle covers the need toreplace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after acrash. See Vehicle DataRecording and Privacy 0 321and Event Data Recorders0 322.

. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag systems.Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer forservice.

Airbag On-Off SwitchIf the instrument panel has one ofthe switches pictured in thefollowing illustrations, the vehiclehas an airbag on-off switch that youcan use to manually turn on or offthe front outboard passenger airbag.No other airbag is affected by theairbag on-off switch.

United States

Canada

This switch should only be turned tothe off position if the person in thefront outboard passenger position isa member of a passenger risk groupidentified by the nationalgovernment as follows:

Infant. An infant (less than1 year old) must ride in the frontseat because:

. My vehicle has no rear seat;

. My vehicle has a rear seat toosmall to accommodate arear-facing infant seat; or



. The infant has a medicalcondition which, according to theinfant's physician, makes itnecessary for the infant to ride inthe front seat so that the drivercan constantly monitor thechild's condition.

Child age 1 to 12. A childage 1 to 12 must ride in the frontseat because:

. My vehicle has no rear seat;

. Although children ages 1 to 12ride in the rear seat(s) wheneverpossible, children ages 1 to 12sometimes must ride in the frontbecause no space is available inthe rear seat(s) of my vehicle; or

. The child has a medicalcondition which, according to thechild's physician, makes itnecessary for the child to ride inthe front seat so that the drivercan constantly monitor thechild's condition.

Medical Condition. A passengerhas a medical condition which,according to his or her physician:

. Causes the passenger airbag topose a special risk for thepassenger; and

. Makes the potential harm fromthe passenger airbag in a crashgreater than the potential harmfrom turning off the airbag andallowing the passenger, even ifbelted, to hit the instrumentpanel or windshield in a crash.

{ Warning

If the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag is turned off for aperson who is not in a risk groupidentified by the nationalgovernment, that person will nothave the extra protection of anairbag. In a crash, the airbag willnot be able to inflate and helpprotect the person sitting there.Do not turn off the front outboard

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

passenger frontal airbag unlessthe person sitting there is in a riskgroup.

United States



Canada

To turn off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag, insert theignition key into the switch, push in,and move the switch to the offposition.

The airbag off light will come on andstay on to let you know the frontoutboard passenger airbag is off.See Airbag On-Off Light 0 98. Thefront outboard passenger airbag willremain off until you turn it back onagain.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. Forexample, the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag couldinflate even though the airbagon-off switch is turned off.

To help avoid injury to yourself orothers, have the vehicle servicedright away. See Airbag ReadinessLight 0 97 for more information,including important safetyinformation.

United States

Canada



To turn the front outboard passengerairbag on again, insert the ignitionkey into the switch, push in, andmove the switch to the on position.

The front outboard passengerfrontal airbag is now enabled, andmay inflate. See Airbag On-Off Light0 98.

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There are partsof the airbag system in severalplaces around the vehicle. Yourdealer and the service manual haveinformation about servicing thevehicle and the airbag system. Topurchase a service manual, seeService Publications OrderingInformation 0 319.

{ Warning

For up to 10 seconds after thevehicle is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbag

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

can still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if youare close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAdding accessories that change thevehicle's frame, bumper system,height, front end, or side sheetmetal, may keep the airbag systemfrom working properly. Theoperation of the airbag system canalso be affected by changing anyparts of the front seats, safety belts,the airbag sensing and diagnosticmodule, steering wheel, instrumentpanel, any of the airbag modules,ceiling or pillar garnish trim, frontsensors, or airbag wiring.

Your dealer and the service manualhave information about the locationof the airbag sensors, sensing anddiagnostic module, and airbagwiring.

If the vehicle has rollover roof-railairbags, see Different Size Tiresand Wheels 0 267 for additionalimportant information.

If you have to modify your vehiclebecause you have a disability andyou have questions about whetherthe modifications will affect thevehicle's airbag system, or if youhave questions about whether theairbag system will be affected if thevehicle is modified for any otherreason, call Customer Assistance.See Customer Assistance Offices0 312.

Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenance orreplacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. SeeAirbag Readiness Light 0 97.



Caution

If an airbag covering is damaged,opened, or broken, the airbagmay not work properly. Do notopen or break the airbagcoverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbagcoverings, have the airbagcovering and/or airbag modulereplaced. For the location of theairbags, see Where Are theAirbags? 0 55. See your dealerfor service.

Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the airbagsystems in the vehicle.A damaged airbag system maynot work properly and may notprotect you and yourpassenger(s) in a crash, resulting

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

in serious injury or even death. Tohelp make sure the airbagsystems are working properlyafter a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

If an airbag inflates, you will need toreplace airbag system parts. Seeyour dealer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly. Havethe vehicle serviced right away. SeeAirbag Readiness Light 0 97.

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle safety belts.



The manufacturer instructions thatcome with the booster seat state theweight and height limitations for thatbooster. Use a booster seat with alap-shoulder belt until the childpasses the fit test below:

. Sit all the way back on the seat.Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest onthe shoulder? If yes, continue.If no, try using the rear safetybelt comfort guide, if available.See “Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt0 47. If a comfort guide is notavailable, or if the shoulder beltstill does not rest on theshoulder, then return to thebooster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low andsnug on the hips, touching thethighs? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way towear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the face orneck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force to thechild's pelvic bones in a crash.It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

Also see “Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt0 47.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlyrestrained in a rear seating position.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use safety beltsproperly.

{ Warning

Never allow more than one childto wear the same safety belt. Thesafety belt cannot properly spreadthe impact forces. In a crash, theycan be crushed together andseriously injured. A safety beltmust be used by only one personat a time.



{ Warning

Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly. In acrash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The childmight also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.

Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infants andall other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safety

restraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and inevery Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{ Warning

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck. Theshoulder belt can tighten butcannot be loosened if it is locked.The shoulder belt locks when it ispulled all the way out of theretractor. It unlocks when theshoulder belt is allowed to go allthe way back into the retractor,but it cannot do this if it iswrapped around a child’s neck.If the shoulder belt is locked andtightened around a child’s neck,the only way to loosen the belt isto cut it.

Never leave children unattendedin a vehicle and never allowchildren to play with the safetybelts.



Every time infants and youngchildren ride in vehicles, they shouldhave the protection provided byappropriate child restraints. Neitherthe vehicle's safety belt system norits airbag system is designedfor them.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ Warning

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)infant will suddenly become a110 kg (240 lb) force on a person'sarms. An infant should besecured in an appropriaterestraint.

{ Warning

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the frontoutboard seat. Secure arear-facing child restraint in a rearseat. It is also better to secure aforward-facing child restraint in arear seat. If you must secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front outboard seat, alwaysmove the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go.

Q: What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, whichare purchased by the vehicleowner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particularrestraint should take intoconsideration not only the child'sweight, height, and age but alsowhether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of childrestraints, there are manydifferent models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, besure it is designed to be used ina motor vehicle. If it is, the



restraint will have a label sayingthat it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturerinstructions that come with therestraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particularchild restraint. In addition, thereare many kinds of restraintsavailable for children withspecial needs.

{ Warning

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury in a crash, infants andtoddlers should be secured in arear-facing child restraint until agetwo, or until they reach themaximum height and weight limitsof their child restraint.

{ Warning

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularsafety belt may not remain low onthe hip bones, as it should.Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child's abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected byany bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

Rear-Facing Infant Seat

A rear-facing infant seat providesrestraint with the seating surfaceagainst the back of the infant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned in therestraint.



Forward-Facing Child Seat

A forward-facing child seat providesrestraint for the child's body with theharness.

Booster Seats

A booster seat is a child restraintdesigned to improve the fit of thevehicle's safety belt system.A booster seat can also help a childto see out the window.

Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ Warning

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle. Secure the child

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

restraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle safety belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. Child restraintsystems must be secured in vehicleseats by lap belts or the lap beltportion of a lap-shoulder belt, or bythe LATCH system. See LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) 0 71. Children canbe endangered in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructionsthat come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructions are



important, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle— even when no child isin it.

In some areas of the United Statesand Canada, Certified ChildPassenger Safety Technicians(CPSTs) are available to inspectand demonstrate how to correctlyuse and install child restraints. Inthe U.S., refer to the NationalHighway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) website tolocate the nearest child safety seatinspection station. For CPSTavailability in Canada, check withTransport Canada or the ProvincialMinistry of Transportation office.

Securing the Child Within theChild Restraint

{ Warning

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the child is notproperly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the childproperly following the instructionsthat came with that child restraint.

Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

Whenever possible, children age12 and under should be secured ina rear seating position.

If a child restraint is secured in thefront outboard passenger seat, andthe vehicle has a switch on theinstrument panel to manually turn offthe front outboard passenger airbag,

see Airbag On-Off Switch 0 60 andSecuring Child Restraints (RearSeat) 0 78 or Securing ChildRestraints (Front Passenger Seat)0 80 for more information, includingimportant safety information.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the front outboardpassenger airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the frontoutboard passenger airbaginflates and the passenger seat isin a forward position.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

Even if the airbag switch (ifequipped) has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontalairbag, no system is fail-safe. Noone can guarantee that an airbagwill not deploy under someunusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front outboard seat, alwaysmove the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with yourchild restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

Child restraints and booster seatsvary considerably in size, and somemay fit in certain seating positionsbetter than others.

Depending on where you place thechild restraint and the size of thechild restraint, you may not be ableto access adjacent safety beltassemblies or LATCH anchors foradditional passengers or childrestraints. Adjacent seatingpositions should not be used if thechild restraint prevents access to orinterferes with the routing of thesafety belt.

If the vehicle does not have a rearseat that will accommodate arear-facing child restraint, arear-facing child restraint should notbe installed in the vehicle, even ifthe airbag is off.

Wherever a child restraint isinstalled, be sure to secure the childrestraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure to

properly secure any child restraint inyour vehicle— even when no childis in it.

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)The LATCH system secures a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.LATCH attachments on the childrestraint are used to attach the childrestraint to the anchors in thevehicle. The LATCH system isdesigned to make installation of achild restraint easier.

In order to use the LATCH system inyour vehicle, you need a childrestraint that has LATCHattachments. LATCH-compatiblerear-facing and forward-facing childseats can be properly installedusing either the LATCH anchors orthe vehicle’s safety belts. Do notuse both the safety belts and theLATCH anchorage system to securea rear-facing or forward-facingchild seat.



Booster seats use the vehicle’ssafety belts to secure the child inthe booster seat. If the manufacturerrecommends that the booster seatbe secured with the LATCH system,this can be done as long as thebooster seat can be positionedproperly and there is no interferencewith the proper positioning of thelap-shoulder belt on the child.

Make sure to follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint,and also the instructions in thismanual.

When installing a child restraint witha top tether, you must also useeither the lower anchors or thesafety belts to properly secure thechild restraint. A child restraint mustnever be attached using only the toptether.

The LATCH anchorage system canbe used until the combined weightof the child plus the child restraint is29.5 kg (65 lbs). Use the safety beltalone instead of the LATCHanchorage system once thecombined weight is more than29.5 kg (65 lbs).

The following explains how to attacha child restraint with theseattachments in the vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions orchild restraints have lower anchorsand attachments or top tetheranchors and attachments. In thiscase, the safety belt must be used(with top tether where available) tosecure the child restraint. SeeSecuring Child Restraints (RearSeat) 0 78 or Securing ChildRestraints (Front Passenger Seat)0 80.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (1) are metal barsbuilt into the vehicle. There are twolower anchors for each LATCHseating position that willaccommodate a child restraint withlower attachments (2).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (3, 4) anchors the top ofthe child restraint to the vehicle.A top tether anchor is built into thevehicle. The top tetherattachment (2) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchor inthe vehicle in order to reduce the



forward movement and rotation ofthe child restraint during driving or ina crash.

The child restraint may have asingle tether (3) or a dual tether (4).Either will have a singleattachment (2) to secure the toptether to the anchor.

Some child restraints that have atop tether are designed for use withor without the top tether beingattached. Others require the toptether always to be attached.In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for your childrestraint.

Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

Second, Third, and Fourth Rowwith Three-Passenger Seat

i (Top Tether Anchor) : Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor) : Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.

See the information following forinstalling a child restraint with a toptether in the second, third, andfourth row center positions.

Never install two top tethers usingthe same top tether anchor.

Front Passenger Position

i (Top Tether Anchor) : Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

The second, third, and fourth rowwith three-passenger seats haveexposed metal lower anchors in thecrease between the seatback andthe seat cushion.



Second, Third, and Fourth Rowwith Three-PassengerSeat—Passenger Van

There are two top tether anchors inthe second, third, and fourth rowthree-passenger seats. To install achild restraint in the rear driver-sideseating positions, use anchorpoint (1). To install a child restraintin the rear passenger-side seatingpositions, use anchor point (2).To install a child restraint in the rearcenter seating positions, use anchorpoint (2). Never install two toptethers using the same top tetheranchor.

If the vehicle is equipped with a fourpassenger fourth or fifth row seat, itdoes not have upper or loweranchors. If a child restraint is placedin the four- passenger fourth or fifthrow seat, it must be secured usingthe vehicle safety belts. SeeSecuring Child Restraints (RearSeat) 0 78 or Securing ChildRestraints (Front Passenger Seat)0 80.

Front Passenger Position

There is a top tether anchor for thefront passenger position with a frontpassenger seat. The anchor is atthe rear of the seat cushion on theright front passenger seat.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be attached, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be attached.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition. See Where to Put theRestraint 0 70 for additionalinformation.

Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCHSystem

{ Warning

If a LATCH-type child restraint isnot attached to anchors or withthe safety belt, the child restraintwill not be able to protect the childcorrectly. In a crash, the childcould be seriously injured or

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

killed. Install a LATCH-type childrestraint properly using theanchors, or use the vehicle safetybelts to secure the restraint,following the instructions thatcame with the child restraint andthe instructions in this manual.

{ Warning

To reduce the risk of serious orfatal injuries during a crash, donot attach more than one childrestraint to a single anchor.Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachmentto come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or otherscould be injured.

{ Warning

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck. Theshoulder belt can tighten butcannot be loosened if it is locked.The shoulder belt locks when it ispulled all the way out of theretractor. It unlocks when theshoulder belt is allowed to go allthe way back into the retractor,but it cannot do this if it iswrapped around a child’s neck.If the shoulder belt is locked andtightened around a child’s neck,the only way to loosen the belt isto cut it.

Buckle any unused safety beltsbehind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way outof the retractor to set the lock,and tighten the belt behind thechild restraint after the childrestraint has been installed.

Caution

Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s safety belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled safety belts toavoid rubbing the LATCHattachments.

Do not fold the empty rear seatwith a safety belt buckled. Thiscould damage the safety belt orthe seat. Unbuckle and return thesafety belt to its stowed position,before folding the seat.

If you need to secure more than onechild restraint in the rear seat, seeWhere to Put the Restraint 0 70.

This system is designed to makethe installation of child restraintseasier. When using lower anchors,do not use the vehicle's safety belts.Instead, use the vehicle's anchorsand child restraint attachments tosecure the restraints. Somerestraints also use another vehicleanchor to secure a top tether.



1. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the loweranchors. If the child restraintdoes not have lowerattachments or the desiredseating position does not havelower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the top tether andthe safety belts. Refer to yourchild restraint manufacturerinstructions and theinstructions in this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors forthe desired seatingposition.

1.2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

1.3. Attach and tighten thelower attachments on thechild restraint to the loweranchors.

2. If the child restraintmanufacturer recommends thatthe top tether be attached,attach and tighten the toptether to the top tether anchor,if equipped. Refer to the childrestraint instructions and thefollowing steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.

2.2. For the second, third, andfourth row withthree-passenger seatsonly, in the rear driver-sideseating positions, useanchor point (1). For therear passenger-sideseating positions, useanchor point (2). For thecenter seating positions,use anchor point (2).Never install two toptethers using the same toptether anchor.

2.3. Route and tighten the toptether according to yourchild restraint instructionsand the followinginstructions:

If the position you areusing does not have aheadrest or head restraintand you are using a singletether, route the tetherover the seatback.

If the position you areusing does not have aheadrest or head restraintand you are using a dualtether, route the tetherover the seatback.



If the position you areusing has an integratedheadrest or head restraintand you are using a dualtether, route the tetheraround the headrest orhead restraint.

If the position you areusing has an integratedheadrest or head restraintand you are using a singletether, route the tetherover the headrest or headrestraint.

3. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. Tocheck, grasp the child restraintat the LATCH path and attemptto move it side to side andback and forth. There shouldbe no more than 2.5 cm (1 in)of movement for properinstallation.

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the LATCHsystem in the vehicle. A damagedLATCH system may not properlysecure the child restraint,resulting in serious injury or evendeath in a crash. To help makesure the LATCH system isworking properly after a crash,see your dealer to have thesystem inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during acrash, new LATCH system partsmay be needed.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.



Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat)When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) 0 71 for how and where toinstall the child restraint usingLATCH. If a child restraint is securedin the vehicle using a safety beltand it uses a top tether, see LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) 0 71 for top tetheranchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

If the child restraint or vehicle seatposition does not have the LATCHsystem, you will be using the safetybelt to secure the child restraint inthis position. Be sure to follow theinstructions that came with the childrestraint. Secure the child in thechild restraint when and as theinstructions say.

If more than one child restraintneeds to be installed in the rearseat, be sure to read Where to Putthe Restraint 0 70.

1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portionsof the vehicle safety beltthrough or around the restraint.The child restraint instructionswill show you how.





4. Pull the shoulder belt all theway out of the retractor to setthe lock. When the retractorlock is set, the belt can betightened but not pulled out ofthe retractor.

5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of thebelt, and feed the shoulder beltback into the retractor. Wheninstalling a forward-facing childrestraint, it may be helpful touse your knee to push down onthe child restraint as youtighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 4 and 5.

6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) 0 71 for moreinformation.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. Tocheck, grasp the child restraintat the safety belt path andattempt to move it side to sideand back and forth. When thechild restraint is properlyinstalled, there should be nomore than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it.



Securing Child Restraints(Front Passenger Seat)This vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint 0 70.

There may be an airbag on-offswitch on the instrument panel thatyou can use to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag.See Airbag On-Off Switch 0 60 formore information, includingimportant safety information.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the front outboardpassenger airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflating

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

airbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the frontoutboard passenger airbaginflates and the passenger seat isin a forward position.

Even if the airbag switch (ifequipped) has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontalairbag, no system is fail-safe. Noone can guarantee that an airbagwill not deploy under someunusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front outboard seat, alwaysmove the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. Forexample, the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag couldinflate even though the airbagon-off switch is turned off.


If the vehicle does not have a rearseat that will accommodate arear-facing child restraint, arear-facing child restraint should notbe installed in the vehicle, even ifthe airbag is off.

If the child restraint uses a toptether, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) 0 71 for top tether anchorlocations.



Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

When using the lap-shoulder belt tosecure the child restraint in thisposition, follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint and thefollowing instructions:

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.

When the airbag off switch hasturned off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag, theoff indicator in the airbag offlight should light and stay litwhen the vehicle is started.See Airbag On-Off Light 0 98.

2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portionsof the vehicle safety beltthrough or around the restraint.The child restraint instructionswill show you how.



5. Pull the shoulder belt all theway out of the retractor to setthe lock. When the retractorlock is set, the belt can betightened but not pulled out ofthe retractor.



6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of thebelt, and feed the shoulder beltback into the retractor. Wheninstalling a forward-facing childrestraint, it may be helpful touse your knee to push down onthe child restraint as youtighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 5 and 6.

7. If the vehicle does not have arear seat and the child restraintmanufacturer recommendsusing a top tether anchor,attach the top tether to the toptether anchor. Refer to theinstructions that came with thechild restraint and to LowerAnchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) 0 71.

8. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. Tocheck, grasp the child restraintat the safety belt path andattempt to move it side to sideand back and forth. When thechild restraint is properlyinstalled, there should be nomore than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it.

If you turned the airbag off with theswitch, turn on the front outboardpassenger airbag when you remove

the child restraint from the vehicleunless the person who will be sittingthere is a member of a passengerairbag risk group. See AirbagOn-Off Switch 0 60 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.


Storage 83

Storage

Storage CompartmentsStorage Compartments . . . . . . . . 83Front Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Additional Storage FeaturesCargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

StorageCompartments

{ Warning

Do not store heavy or sharpobjects in storage compartments.In a crash, these objects maycause the cover to open andcould result in injury.

Front StorageThis vehicle may have a frontstorage compartment. It is located atthe center of the instrument panelextension, by the floor. To open thecompartment, pull up on the latch.The compartment will openautomatically.

Storage compartments may also beincluded on the inside of eachfront door.

Additional StorageFeatures

Cargo Tie-Downs

If equipped, there are six cargotie-downs in the cargo area that canbe used to secure cargo.

Do not apply a total load of morethan 5 000 N (1,124 lbs of force) toa single cargo tie-down whensecuring cargo.

See Vehicle Load Limits 0 170.


84 Storage

{ Warning

The child restraint top tether strapmay be damaged by contact withitems in the cargo area. Your childcould be seriously injured or killedin a collision if the top tether strapis damaged. Properly secure allcargo.

{ Warning

Properly secure all cargo withropes or straps to help prevent itfrom sliding or shifting. Do notplace cargo higher than theseatbacks. In a sudden stop orcollision, unsecured cargo couldcause personal injury. Usesuitable ropes or straps to securecargo.

{ Warning

Never allow anyone to ride in thecargo area. It is extremelydangerous to ride in the cargoarea of a vehicle. In a collision,people riding in these areas aremore likely to be seriously injuredor killed.

Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of the vehicle that is notequipped with seats and safetybelts. Be sure everyone in thevehicle is in a seat and using asafety belt properly.


Instruments and Controls 85

Instruments andControls

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . . 86Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . 86Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . . 87Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Engine Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . 95Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . 97Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . . . 97

Airbag On-Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . 99Malfunction Indicator Lamp(Check Engine Light) . . . . . . . . 100

Brake System WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . 102StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . . . 103Traction Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . 103Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 104Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 104Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . 105Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . . 105

Information DisplaysDriver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Brake System Messages . . . . . 110Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . . 111Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . 111

Engine Cooling SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . 112Engine Power Messages . . . . . 112Fuel System Messages . . . . . . . 113Key and Lock Messages . . . . . . 113Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113Object Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Ride Control SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Airbag System Messages . . . . . 115Security Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 115Service Vehicle Messages . . . . 115Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Transmission Messages . . . . . . 116Vehicle ReminderMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Vehicle PersonalizationVehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 117


86 Instruments and Controls

Controls

Steering WheelAdjustment

For vehicles with a tilt steeringwheel, the lever is located on theleft side of the steering column.

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever to move thesteering wheel up or down intoa comfortable position.

2. Release the lever to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

Steering Wheel Controls

If equipped, some audio controlscan be adjusted at the steeringwheel.

w (Next) : Press to go to the nextfavorite radio station, track on a CD,or folder on an iPod® or USBdevice.

c /x (Previous/End) : Press togo to the previous favorite radiostation, track on a CD, or folder on

an iPod® or USB device. Also pressto reject an incoming call, or end acurrent call.

Radio

To select preset or favorite radiostations:

Press and releasew orc /x togo to the next or previous radiostation stored as a preset orfavorite.

CD

To select tracks on a CD:

Press and releasew orc /x togo to the next or previous track.

Selecting Tracks on an iPod orUSB Device

1. Press and holdw orc /xwhile listening to a song untilthe contents of the currentfolder display on the radiodisplay.



2. Press and releasew orc /x to scroll up or down the list,then press and holdw ,

or press ¨ to play thehighlighted track.

Navigating Folders on an iPod orUSB Device

1. Press and holdw orc /xwhile listening to a song untilthe contents of the currentfolder display on the radiodisplay.

2. Press and holdc /x to goback to the previous folder list.

3. Press and releasew orc /x to scroll up or down the list.

. To select a folder, pressand holdw , or press ¨when the folder ishighlighted.

. To go back further in thefolder list, press and holdc /x.

b / g (Push to Talk) : Press tosilence the vehicle speakers only.Press again to turn the sound on.

For vehicles with Bluetooth orOnStar® systems, press and holdfor longer than two seconds tointeract with those systems. SeeBluetooth 0 149 and OnStar,if equipped.

SRCE (Source/VoiceRecognition) : Press to switchbetween the radio and CD, and forequipped vehicles, the frontauxiliary.

¨ (Seek) : Press to go to the nextradio station while in AM, FM,or SiriusXM®.

For vehicles with a CD Player orUSB port:

Press ¨ to go to the next track orchapter while sourced to the CD.

Press ¨ to select a track or a folderwhen navigating folders on an iPodor USB device.

While listening to a CD, press andhold ¨ to quickly move forwardthrough the tracks. Release to stopon the desired track.

+ e : Press to increase volume.

− e : Press to decrease volume.

HornPress the horn symbol in the middleof the steering wheel to soundthe horn.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The lever is on the left side of thesteering column.

Turn the band withN on it to selectthe wiper speed.



8 (Mist) : Use for a single wipe.Hold the band onz , then release.For several wipes, hold the band onz longer.

6 (Adjustable Interval Wipes) : Useto adjust the delay time betweenwipes. Turn the band up for morefrequent wipes or down for lessfrequent wipes.

d (Low Speed) : Slow wipes.

a (High Speed) : Fast wipes.

9 (Off) : Use to turn the wipers off.

When driving during the day and thewipers are activated, the headlamps automatically turn on aftercompleting eight wipe cycles.

Clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them. If frozento the windshield, carefully loosen orthaw them. Damaged blades shouldbe replaced.

Windshield Washer

The windshield wiper paddle is ontop of the turn signal lever.

L (Washer Fluid) : Push thepaddle to spray washer fluid on thewindshield. The wipers will clear thewindow and then either stop orreturn to the preset speed.

{ Warning

In freezing weather, do not usethe washer until the windshield iswarmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

CompassThis vehicle may have a compass inthe Driver Information Center (DIC).

Compass Zone

Your dealer will set the correct zonefor your location.

Under certain circumstances, suchas during a long distancecross-country trip or moving to anew state or province, it will benecessary to compensate for

compass variance by resetting thezone through the DIC if the zone isnot set correctly.

Compass variance is the differencebetween the earth's magnetic northand true geographic north. If thecompass is not set to the zonewhere you live, the compass maygive false readings. The compassmust be set to the variance zone inwhich the vehicle is traveling.

To adjust for compass variance, usethe following procedure:

Compass Variance (Zone)Procedure

1. Do not set the compass zonewhen the vehicle is moving.Only set it when the vehicle isin P (Park).

PressT until PRESS V TOCHANGE COMPASS ZONEdisplays.



2. Find the vehicle's currentlocation and variance zonenumber on the map.

Zones 1 through 15 areavailable.

3. Press V to scroll through andselect the appropriatevariance zone.

4. Press3 until the vehicleheading, for example, N forNorth, is displayed in the DIC.

5. If calibration is necessary,calibrate the compass. See“Compass CalibrationProcedure” following.

Compass Calibration

The compass can be manuallycalibrated. Only calibrate thecompass in a magnetically cleanand safe location, such as an openparking lot, where driving thevehicle in circles is not a danger.It is suggested to calibrate awayfrom tall buildings, utility wires,manhole covers, or other industrialstructures, if possible.

If CAL should ever appear in theDIC display, the compass should becalibrated.

If the DIC display does not show aheading, for example, N for North,or the heading does not changeafter making turns, there may be astrong magnetic field interfering withthe compass. Such interferencemay be caused by a magnetic CB orcell phone antenna mount, amagnetic emergency light, magneticnote pad holder, or any othermagnetic item. Turn off the vehicle,move the magnetic item, then turnon the vehicle and calibrate thecompass.

To calibrate the compass, use thefollowing procedure:

Compass Calibration Procedure

1. Before calibrating the compass,make sure the compass zoneis set to the variance zone inwhich the vehicle is located.See “Compass Variance (Zone)Procedure” earlier in thissection.

Do not operate any switchessuch as window, climatecontrols, seats, etc. during thecalibration procedure.

2. PressT until PRESS V TOCALIBRATE COMPASSdisplays.

3. Press V to start the compasscalibration.

4. The DIC will displayCALIBRATING: DRIVE INCIRCLES. Drive the vehicle intight circles at less than 8 km/h(5 mph) to complete thecalibration. The DIC will displayCALIBRATION COMPLETE fora few seconds when the



calibration is complete. TheDIC display will then return toPRESS V TO CALIBRATECOMPASS.

ClockThe clock can be set with either theradio turned on or off.

AM-FM Radio

To set the time:

1. Press H until the hour beginsflashing on the display. Pressthis button a second time andthe minutes begin flashing ondisplay.

Press H a third time and the12HR or 24HR time formatbegins flashing.

2. While either the hour or theminutes are flashing, turn the fknob, on the upper right side ofthe radio, clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the time. While the12HR or 24HR time format isflashing, turn the f knob

clockwise or counterclockwiseto select the default timesettings.

3. Press H again until the clockdisplay stops flashing to set thecurrently displayed time;otherwise, the flashing stopsafter five seconds and thecurrent time displayed isautomatically set.

Radio with CD/MP3

To set the time and date:

1. Press H and the HR, MIN, MM,DD, and YYYY (hour, minute,month, day, and year) display.

2. Press the softkey under anyone of the tabs to be changed.Every time the softkey ispressed again, the time or thedate if selected, increasesby one.

Another way to increase thetime or date is to press ¨SEEK or\ FWD (forward).

3. To decrease, press © SEEK ors REV. Turn the f knob, onthe upper right side of theradio, to adjust the selectedsetting.

Changing the Time and DateDefault Settings

To change the time or date defaultsettings:

1. Press H and then the softkeyunder the forward arrow that iscurrently displayed on the radioscreen until the time 12H(hour) and 24H (hour), and thedate MM/DD (month and day)and DD/MM (day and month)are displayed.

2. Press the softkey under thedesired option.

3. Press H again to apply theselected default, or let thescreen time out.



Power OutletsPower Outlets 12 Volt DirectCurrent

The accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or an MP3player.

The vehicle may have twoaccessory power outlets on theinstrument panel.

Remove the cover to access andreplace when not in use.

Certain power accessory plugs maynot be compatible to the accessorypower outlet and could overloadvehicle or adapter fuses. If aproblem is experienced, see yourdealer.

{ Warning

Power is always supplied to theoutlets. Do not leave electricalequipment plugged in when thevehicle is not in use because thevehicle could catch fire and causeinjury or death.

Caution

Leaving electrical equipmentplugged in for an extended periodof time while the vehicle is off willdrain the battery. Always unplugelectrical equipment when not inuse and do not plug in equipmentthat exceeds the maximum20 amp rating.

When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the properinstallation instructions included withthe equipment. See Add-OnElectrical Equipment 0 211.

Caution

Hanging heavy equipment fromthe power outlet can causedamage not covered by thevehicle warranty. The poweroutlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only, suchas cell phone charge cords.

Power Outlet 110/120 VoltAlternating Current

This power outlet can be used toplug in electrical equipment thatuses a maximum limit of 150 watts.

The 110/120 volt power outlet is onthe instrument panel.

An indicator light on the outlet turnson to show it is in use. The lightcomes on when the ignition is inON/RUN, equipment requiring lessthan 150 watts is plugged into theoutlet, and no system fault isdetected.

The indicator light does not come onwhen the ignition is in LOCK/OFF orif the equipment is not fully seatedinto the outlet.

If equipment is connected usingmore than 150 watts or a systemfault is detected, a protection circuitshuts off the power supply and theindicator light turns off. To reset thecircuit, unplug the item and plug itback in or turn the RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) off andthen back on. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) 0 179.



The power outlet is not designed forthe following, and may not workproperly if they are plugged in:

. Equipment with high initial peakwattage, such ascompressor-driven refrigeratorsand electric power tools.

. Other equipment requiring anextremely stable power supply,such asmicrocomputer-controlledelectric blankets and touchsensor lamps.

. Medical equipment.

Cigarette LighterIf equipped with a cigarette lighter,to heat push it in all the way and letgo. When it is ready for use, it willpop back out by itself.

Do not use the lighter to plug inaccessory devices. Use the poweroutlets provided.

Caution

Holding a cigarette lighter in whileit is heating does not let thelighter back away from theheating element when it is hot.Damage from overheating canoccur to the lighter or heatingelement, or a fuse could beblown. Do not hold a cigarettelighter in while it is heating.

AshtraysIf equipped with a removableashtray, it can be placed into thefront floor console cupholder. Openthe cover to use.

Caution

If papers, pins, or otherflammable items are put in theashtray, hot cigarettes or othersmoking materials could ignitethem and possibly damage thevehicle. Never put flammableitems in the ashtray.

Warning Lights,Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gauges cansignal that something is wrongbefore it becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to thewarning lights and gauges couldprevent injury.

Some warning lights come on brieflywhen the engine is started toindicate they are working. Whenone of the warning lights comes onand stays on while driving, or whenone of the gauges shows there maybe a problem, check the section thatexplains what to do. Waiting to dorepairs can be costly and evendangerous.



Instrument Cluster

English Shown, Metric Similar



If the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax diesel supplementfor more information.

SpeedometerThe speedometer shows the vehiclespeed in kilometers per hour (km/h)and miles per hour (mph).

OdometerThe odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eitherkilometers or miles.

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer shows how farthe vehicle has been driven sincethe trip odometer was last reset.

The trip odometer is accessed andreset through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See DriverInformation Center (DIC) 0 105.

Fuel Gauge

Metric

English

The fuel gauge, when the ignition ison, indicates how much fuel is left inthe vehicle fuel tank.

An arrow on the fuel gaugeindicates the side of the vehicle thefuel door is on.

The gauge first indicates emptybefore the vehicle is out of fuel, andthe fuel tank should berefueled soon.

Listed are four situations customersmight experience with the fuelgauge. None of these indicate aproblem with the fuel gauge:



. At the gas station, the fuel pumpshuts off before the gaugereads full.

. It takes a little more or less fuelto fill up than the fuel gaugeindicated. For example, thegauge may have indicated thetank was half full, but it actuallytook a little more or less thanhalf the tank's capacity to fillthe tank.

. The gauge moves a little whileturning a corner or speeding up.

. The gauge does not go back toempty when the ignition isturned off.

If the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax dieselsupplement.

Engine Oil PressureGauge

Metric

English

The oil pressure gauge shows theengine oil pressure in psi (poundsper square inch) or kPa (kilopascals)when the engine is running.

Oil pressure may vary with enginespeed, outside temperature and oilviscosity, but readings above thelow pressure zone indicate thenormal operating range.

A reading in the low pressure zonemay be caused by a dangerouslylow oil level or other problemcausing low oil pressure.



Caution

Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. Driving with the engine oillow can also damage the engine.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Checkthe oil level as soon as possible.Add oil if required, but if the oillevel is within the operating rangeand the oil pressure is still low,have the vehicle serviced. Alwaysfollow the maintenance schedulefor changing engine oil.

Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge

Metric

English

This gauge shows the enginecoolant temperature.

It also provides an indicator of howhard the vehicle is working. During amajority of the operation, the gaugewill read 100 °C (210 °F) or less.If the vehicle is pulling a load orgoing up hills, it is normal for thetemperature to fluctuate andapproach the 122 °C (250 °F) mark.If the gauge reaches the 125 °C(260 °F) mark, it indicates that thecooling system is working beyondits capacity.

See Engine Overheating 0 228.



Voltmeter Gauge

When the engine is not running, butthe ignition is on, this gauge showsthe battery's state of charge inDC volts.

When the engine is running, thegauge shows the condition of thecharging system. Readings betweenthe low and high warning zonesindicate the normal operating range.

Readings in the low warning zonemay occur when a large number ofelectrical accessories are operatingin the vehicle and the engine is leftat an idle for an extended period.This condition is normal since the

charging system is not able toprovide full power at engine idle. Asengine speeds are increased, thiscondition should correct itself ashigher engine speeds allow thecharging system to create maximumpower.

The vehicle can be only driven for ashort time with the reading in eitherwarning zone. If it must be driven,turn off all unnecessaryaccessories.

Readings in either warning zoneindicate a possible problem in theelectrical system. Have the vehicleserviced as soon as possible.

Safety Belt Reminders

Safety Belt Reminder Light

There is a safety belt reminder lighton the instrument cluster.

When the vehicle is started, thislight flashes and a chime may comeon to remind the driver to fastentheir safety belt. Then the light stayson solid until the belt is buckled.This cycle may continue severaltimes if the driver remains orbecomes unbuckled while thevehicle is moving.

If the driver safety belt is buckled,neither the light nor the chimecomes on.

Airbag Readiness LightThis light shows if there is anelectrical problem with the airbagsystem. The system check includesthe airbag sensor(s), passengersensing system (if equipped), thepretensioners (if equipped), theairbag modules, the wiring, and thecrash sensing and diagnosticmodule. For more information on theairbag system, see Airbag System0 53.



The airbag readiness light comes onfor several seconds when thevehicle is started. If the light doesnot come on then, have it fixedimmediately.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.

If there is a problem with the airbagsystem, a Driver Information Center(DIC) message may also come on.See Airbag System Messages0 115.

Airbag On-Off LightWhen the front outboard passengerairbag is manually turned off usingthe airbag on-off switch on theinstrument panel, if equipped, theindicator light OFF or the off symbolwill come on and stay on as areminder that the airbag has beenturned off. This light will go off whenthe airbag has been turned on. SeeAirbag On-Off Switch 0 60 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

United States

Canada



{ Warning

If the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag is turned off for aperson who is not in a risk groupidentified by the nationalgovernment, that person will nothave the extra protection of anairbag. In a crash, the airbag willnot be able to inflate and helpprotect the person sitting there.Do not turn off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag unlessthe person sitting there is in a riskgroup identified by the nationalgovernment. See Airbag On-OffSwitch 0 60 for more information,including important safetyinformation.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. For

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

example, the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag couldinflate even though the airbagon-off switch is turned off.


If the word ON or the on symbol islit, it means that the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag is enabled,and may inflate. See Airbag On-OffSwitch 0 60 for more information,including important safetyinformation.

Charging System Light

This light comes on briefly when theignition key is turned to START, butthe engine is not running, as acheck to show it is working.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer.

The light should go out once theengine starts. If it stays on,or comes on while driving, therecould be a problem with thecharging system. A charging systemmessage in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) can also appear. SeeBattery Voltage and ChargingMessages 0 110 for moreinformation. This light could indicatethat there are problems with agenerator drive belt, or that there isan electrical problem. Have itchecked right away. If the vehiclemust be driven a short distance with



the light on, turn off accessories,such as the radio and airconditioner.

Malfunction IndicatorLamp (Check EngineLight)This light is part of the vehicle’semission control on-boarddiagnostic system. If this light is onwhile the engine is running, amalfunction has been detected andthe vehicle may require service. Thelight should come on to show that itis working when the ignition is inON/RUN and the engine is notrunning. See Ignition Positions0 174.

Malfunctions are often indicated bythe system before any problem isnoticeable. Being aware of the lightand seeking service promptly whenit comes on may prevent damage.

Caution

If the vehicle is driven continuallywith this light on, the emissioncontrol system may not work aswell, the fuel economy may belower, and the vehicle may notrun smoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Caution

Modifications to the engine,transmission, exhaust, intake,or fuel system, or the use ofreplacement tires that do notmeet the original tirespecifications, can cause this lightto come on. This could lead to

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

costly repairs not covered by thevehicle warranty. This could alsoaffect the vehicle’s ability to passan Emissions Inspection/Maintenance test. SeeAccessories and Modifications0 213.

If the light is flashing : Amalfunction has been detected thatcould damage the emission controlsystem and increase vehicleemissions. Diagnosis and servicemay be required.

To help prevent damage, reducevehicle speed and avoid hardaccelerations and uphill grades.If towing a trailer, reduce theamount of cargo being hauled assoon as possible.

If the light continues to flash, find asafe place to park. Turn the vehicleoff and wait at least 10 secondsbefore restarting the engine. If thelight is still flashing, follow the



previous guidelines and see yourdealer for service as soon aspossible.

If the light is on steady : Amalfunction has been detected.Diagnosis and service may berequired.

Check the following:

. A loose or missing fuel cap maycause the light to come on. SeeFilling the Tank 0 199. A fewdriving trips with the capproperly installed may turn thelight off.

. Poor fuel quality can causeinefficient engine operation andpoor driveability, which may goaway once the engine is warmedup. If this occurs, change thefuel brand. It may require atleast one full tank of the properfuel to turn the light off. See Fuel0 197.

If the light remains on, see yourdealer.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

If the vehicle requires an EmissionsInspection/Maintenance test, thetest equipment will likely connect tothe vehicle's Data LinkConnector (DLC).

The DLC is under the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringwheel. Connecting devices that arenot used to perform an EmissionsInspection/Maintenance test or toservice the vehicle may affectvehicle operation See Add-OnElectrical Equipment 0 211. Seeyour dealer if assistance is needed.

The vehicle may not passinspection if:

. The light is on when the engineis running.

. The light does not come onwhen the ignition is in ON/RUNwhile the engine is off.

. Critical emission control systemshave not been completelydiagnosed. If this happens, thevehicle would not be ready forinspection and might requireseveral days of routine drivingbefore the system is ready forinspection. This can happen ifthe 12-volt battery has recentlybeen replaced or run down, or ifthe vehicle has been recentlyserviced.

See your dealer if the vehicle willnot pass or cannot be made readyfor the test.

Brake System WarningLightThe vehicle brake system consistsof two hydraulic circuits. If onecircuit is not working, the remainingcircuit can still work to stop thevehicle. For normal brakingperformance, both circuits need tobe working.



If the warning light comes on, therecould be a brake problem. Have thebrake system inspected right away.

Metric English

This light should come on brieflywhen ignition key is turned to ON/RUN. If it does not come on, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn ifthere is a problem.

When the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light also comes onwhen the parking brake is set. SeeParking Brake 0 187 for moreinformation. The light stays on if theparking brake does not fully release.If it stays on after the parking brakeis fully released, it means thevehicle has a brake problem.

If the light comes on while driving,pull off the road and stop carefully.The pedal might be harder to push,or the pedal might go closer to thefloor. It could take longer to stop.

If the light is still on, have thevehicle towed for service. SeeTowing the Vehicle 0 283.

{ Warning

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on afterthe vehicle has been pulled offthe road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed forservice.

Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

For vehicles with the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), this light comes onbriefly when the engine is started.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally theindicator light then goes off.

If the ABS light stays on, turn theignition off. If the light comes onwhile driving, stop as soon as it issafely possible and turn the ignitionoff. Then start the engine again toreset the system. If the ABS lightstays on, or comes on again whiledriving, the vehicle needs service.If the regular brake system warninglight is not on, the vehicle still hasbrakes, but not antilock brakes.If the regular brake system warninglight is also on, the vehicle does nothave antilock brakes and there is aproblem with the regular brakes.See Brake System Warning Light0 101.

Tow/Haul Mode Light



For vehicles with the Tow/HaulMode feature, this light comes onwhen the Tow/Haul Mode has beenactivated.

See Tow/Haul Mode 0 186.

StabiliTrak® OFF Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer.

This light comes on when theStabiliTrak system is turned off.If StabiliTrak is off, the TractionControl System (TCS) is also off.

If the StabiliTrak and TCS are off,the system does not assist incontrolling the vehicle. Turn on theTCS and the StabiliTrak systemsand the warning light turns off.


Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light

This light comes on briefly when theengine is started.

If the light does not come on, havethe vehicle serviced by your dealer.If the system is working normally,the indicator light turns off.

If the light is on and not flashing, theTCS and potentially the StabiliTraksystem have been disabled. A DICmessage may display. Check theDIC messages to determine whichfeature(s) is no longer functioningand whether the vehicle requiresservice.

If the light is on and flashing, theTCS and/or the StabiliTrak systemis actively working.


Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), this lightcomes on briefly when the engine isstarted. It provides informationabout tire pressures and the TPMS.

When the Light Is On Steady

This indicates that one or more ofthe tires are significantlyunderinflated.

A Driver Information Center (DIC)tire pressure message may alsodisplay. See Tire Messages 0 116.Stop as soon as possible, andinflate the tires to the pressure value



shown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Tire Pressure0 258.

When the Light Flashes First andThen Is On Steady

If the light flashes for about a minuteand then stays on, there may be aproblem with the TPMS. If theproblem is not corrected, the lightwill come on at every ignition cycle.See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation 0 260.

Engine Oil Pressure Light

Caution

Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. Driving with the engine oillow can also damage the engine.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Checkthe oil level as soon as possible.Add oil if required, but if the oillevel is within the operating rangeand the oil pressure is still low,

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

have the vehicle serviced. Alwaysfollow the maintenance schedulefor changing engine oil.

This light should come on briefly asthe engine is started. If it does notcome on, have the vehicle servicedby your dealer.

If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehiclecould be low on oil and might havesome other system problem. Seeyour dealer.

Low Fuel Warning Light

English Shown, Metric Similar

This light comes on for a fewseconds when the ignition is turnedon as a check to indicate it isworking. If it does not come on,have it fixed.

The low fuel warning light comes onand a chime sounds when thevehicle is low on fuel. The light turnsoff when fuel is added to thefuel tank.

See Driver Information Center (DIC)0 105.



Security Light

The security light should come onbriefly as the engine is started. If itdoes not come on, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally, theindicator light turns off.

If the light stays on and the enginedoes not start, there could be aproblem with the theft-deterrentsystem. See Immobilizer Operation0 33.

High-Beam On Light

This light comes on when thehigh-beam headlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger 0 124.

Cruise Control Light

This light comes on when the cruisecontrol is set.

This light goes out when the cruisecontrol is canceled. See CruiseControl 0 190.

Information Displays

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)This vehicle has a DIC.

All messages will appear in the DICdisplay at the bottom of theinstrument cluster.

The DIC comes on when the ignitionis on. After a short delay, the DICwill display the information that waslast displayed before the enginewas turned off.

The DIC displays trip, fuel, andvehicle system information, andwarning messages if a systemproblem is detected.

If the vehicle has these features, theDIC also displays the compassdirection and the outside airtemperature when viewing the tripand fuel information. The compassdirection appears on the top rightcorner of the DIC display. Theoutside air temperatureautomatically appears in the bottomright corner of the DIC display.



If there is a problem with the systemthat controls the temperaturedisplay, the numbers will bereplaced with dashes. If this occurs,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer.


DIC Operation and Displays

The DIC has different displayswhich can be accessed by pressingthe DIC buttons on the instrumentpanel, next to the instrument cluster.

DIC Buttons

The buttons are the trip/fuel, vehicleinformation, customization, and set/reset buttons. The button functionsare detailed in the following pages.

3 (Trip/Fuel) : Press this buttonto display the odometer, tripodometers, fuel range, averageeconomy, fuel used, timer, averagespeed, and digital tachometer.

T (Vehicle Information) : Pressthis button to display the oil life, rearpark assist, units, tire pressurereadings for vehicles with the TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS),engine hours, Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) programming forvehicles with the TPMS and withouta Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter, and compass zone andcompass calibration on vehicleswith this feature.

U (Customization) : Press thisbutton to customize the featuresettings on the vehicle. See VehiclePersonalization 0 117 for moreinformation.

V (Set/Reset) : Press this button toset or reset certain functions and toturn off or acknowledge messageson the DIC.

Trip/Fuel Menu Items

3 (Trip/Fuel) : Press this buttonto scroll through the following menuitems:

Odometer

Press3 until XX km (mi)displays. This display shows thedistance the vehicle has beendriven in either kilometers (km) ormiles (mi).

Trip Odometers

Press3 until A or B displays.This display shows the currentdistance traveled in eitherkilometers (km) or miles (mi) sincethe last reset for each trip odometer.Both trip odometers can be used atthe same time.

Each trip odometer can be reset tozero separately by pressing V whilethe desired trip odometer isdisplayed.



The trip odometer has a featurecalled the retro-active reset. Thiscan be used to set the trip odometerto the number of kilometers (miles)driven since the ignition was lastturned on. This can be used if thetrip odometer is not reset at thebeginning of the trip.

To use the retro-active reset feature,press and hold V for at leastfour seconds. The trip odometer willdisplay the number ofkilometers (km) or miles (mi) drivensince the ignition was last turned onand the vehicle was moving. Oncethe vehicle begins moving, the tripodometer will accumulate mileage.For example, if the vehicle wasdriven 8 km (5 miles) before it isstarted again, and then theretro-active reset feature isactivated, the display will show 8 km(5 miles). As the vehicle beginsmoving, the display will thenincrease to 8.1 km (5.1 miles),8.2 km (5.2 miles), etc.

If the retro-active reset feature isactivated after the vehicle is started,but before it begins moving, the

display will show the number ofkilometers (km) or miles (mi) thatwere driven during the last ignitioncycle.

Fuel Range

Press3 until FUEL RANGEdisplays. This display shows theapproximate number of remainingkilometers (km) or miles (mi) thevehicle can be driven withoutrefueling. The display will showLOW if the fuel level is low.

The fuel range estimate is based onan average of the fuel economyover recent driving history and theamount of fuel remaining in the fueltank. This estimate will change ifdriving conditions change. Forexample, if driving in traffic andmaking frequent stops, this displaymay read one number, but if thevehicle is driven on a freeway, thenumber may change even thoughthe same amount of fuel is in thefuel tank. This is because differentdriving conditions produce differentfuel economies. Generally, freewaydriving produces better fueleconomy than city driving.

If the vehicle is low on fuel, theFUEL LEVEL LOW message will bedisplayed. See Fuel SystemMessages 0 113.

Average Economy

Press3 until AVG ECONOMYdisplays. This display shows theapproximate average liters per100 kilometers (L/100 km) or milesper gallon (mpg). This number iscalculated based on the number ofL/100 km (mpg) recorded since thelast time this menu item was reset.To reset AVG ECONOMY, press andhold V. The display will returnto zero.

Fuel Used

Press3 until FUEL USEDdisplays. This display shows thenumber of liters (L) or gallons (gal)of fuel used since the last reset ofthis menu item. To reset the fuelused information, press and hold Vwhile FUEL USED is displayed.



Timer

Press3 until TIMER displays.This display can be used as a timer.

To start the timer, press V whileTIMER is displayed. The display willshow the amount of time that haspassed since the timer was lastreset, not including time the ignitionis off. Time will continue to becounted as long as the ignition ison, even if another display is beingshown on the DIC. The timer willrecord up to 99 hours, 59 minutesand 59 seconds (99:59:59) afterwhich the display will return to zero.

To stop the timer, press V brieflywhile TIMER is displayed.

To reset the timer to zero, press andhold V while TIMER is displayed.

Average Speed

Press3 until AVERAGE SPEEDdisplays. This display shows theaverage speed of the vehicle inkilometers per hour (km/h) or milesper hour (mph). This average iscalculated based on the various

vehicle speeds recorded since thelast reset of this value. To reset thevalue, press and hold V. Thedisplay will return to zero.

Digital Tachometer

Press3 untilTachometer ##00 RPM displays.This display shows the enginespeed in revolutions perminute (RPM).

Blank Display

This display shows no information.

Vehicle Information MenuItems

T (Vehicle Information) : Pressthis button to scroll through thefollowing menu items:

Oil Life

PressT until OIL LIFEREMAINING displays. This displayshows an estimate of the oil'sremaining useful life. If you see99%OIL LIFE REMAINING on thedisplay, that means 99% of thecurrent oil life remains. The engineoil life system will alert you to

change the oil on a scheduleconsistent with your drivingconditions.

When the remaining oil life is low,the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will appear on the display.See Engine Oil Messages 0 112.You should change the oil as soonas possible. See Engine Oil 0 217.In addition to the engine oil lifesystem monitoring the oil life,additional maintenance isrecommended in the MaintenanceSchedule in this manual. SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 295.

Remember, you must reset the OILLIFE yourself after each oil change.It will not reset itself. Also, becareful not to reset the OIL LIFEaccidentally at any time other thanwhen the oil has just been changed.It cannot be reset accurately untilthe next oil change. To reset theengine oil life system, see EngineOil Life System 0 219.



Park Assist

If the vehicle has the Rear ParkingAssist (RPA) system, pressT untilPARK ASSIST displays. Thisdisplay allows the system to beturned on or off. Once in thisdisplay, press to select between ONor OFF. The RPA systemautomatically turns back on aftereach vehicle start. When the RPAsystem is turned off and the vehicleis shifted out of P (Park), the DICwill display the PARK ASSIST OFFmessage as a reminder that thesystem has been turned off. SeeObject Detection System Messages0 113 and Parking Assist 0 195.

Units

PressT until UNITS displays. Thisdisplay allows you to select betweenmetric or English units ofmeasurement. Once in this display,press V to select between METRICor ENGLISH units.

Tire Pressure

If the vehicle has the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thepressure for each tire can be viewedin the DIC. The tire pressure will beshown in either kilopascals (kPa) orpounds per square inch (psi).PressT until the DIC displaysFRONT TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ##RIGHT ##. PressT again until theDIC displays REAR TIRESPSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.

If a low tire pressure condition isdetected by the system whiledriving, a message advising you tocheck the pressure in a specific tirewill appear in the display. See TirePressure 0 258 and Tire Messages0 116.

If the tire pressure display showsdashes instead of a value, theremay be a problem with the vehicle.If this consistently occurs, see yourdealer for service.

Engine Hours

PressT until ENGINE HOURSdisplays. This display shows thetotal number of hours the enginehas run.

Relearn Tire Positions

The vehicle may have this display.To access this display, the vehiclemust be in P (Park). If the vehiclehas the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS), after rotating thetires or after replacing a tire orsensor, the system must re-learn thetire positions. To re-learn the tirepositions, see Tire Pressure MonitorSystem 0 259. See Tire Inspection0 263, Tire Rotation 0 263 and TireMessages 0 116.

Change Compass Zone

The vehicle may have this feature.To change the compass zonethrough the DIC, see Compass0 88.



Calibrate Compass

The vehicle may have this feature.The compass can be manuallycalibrated. To calibrate the compassthrough the DIC, see Compass0 88.

Blank Display

This display shows no information.

Vehicle MessagesMessages displayed on the DICindicate the status of the vehicle orsome action may be needed tocorrect a condition. Multiplemessages may appear one afteranother.

The messages that do not requireimmediate action can beacknowledged and cleared bypressing V (Set/Reset).

The messages that requireimmediate action cannot be cleareduntil that action is performed.

All messages should be takenseriously and clearing the messagedoes not correct the problem.

The following are the possiblemessages and some informationabout them.


Battery Voltage andCharging Messages

SERVICE BATTERYCHARGING SYSTEM

On some vehicles, this messagedisplays if there is a problem withthe battery charging system. Undercertain conditions, the chargingsystem light may also turn on in theinstrument cluster. See ChargingSystem Light 0 99. Driving with thisproblem could drain the battery.Turn off all unnecessaryaccessories. Have the electricalsystem checked as soon aspossible. See your dealer.

Brake System Messages

SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM

This message displays along withthe brake system warning light ifthere is a problem with the brakesystem. See Brake System WarningLight 0 101. If this messageappears, stop as soon as possibleand turn off the vehicle. Restart thevehicle and check for the message



on the DIC display. If the messageis still displayed or appears againwhen you begin driving, the brakesystem needs service as soon aspossible. See your dealer.

Compass Messages

CALIBRATING: DRIVE INCIRCLES

This message displays whencalibrating the compass. Drive thevehicle in circles at less than 8 km/h(5 mph) to complete the calibration.See Compass 0 88 for moreinformation.

CALIBRATION COMPLETE

This message displays when thecompass calibration is complete.See Compass 0 88 for moreinformation.

Door Ajar Messages

CARGO DOOR OPEN

This message displays and a chimesounds if the cargo door is openwhile the ignition is in ON/RUN.Turn off the vehicle and check the

cargo door. Restart the vehicle andcheck for the message on the DICdisplay.

DRIVER DOOR OPEN

This message displays and a chimesounds if the driver door is not fullyclosed and the vehicle is in a drivegear. Stop and turn off the vehicle,check the door for obstructions, andclose the door again. Check to seeif the message still appears onthe DIC.

LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN

On some vehicles, this messagedisplays and a chime sounds if thedriver side rear door is not fullyclosed and the vehicle is in a drivegear. Stop and turn off the vehicle,check the door for obstructions, andclose the door again. Check to seeif the message still appears onthe DIC.

PASSENGER DOOR OPEN

This message displays and a chimesounds if the passenger door is notfully closed and the vehicle is in adrive gear. Stop and turn off the

vehicle, check the door forobstructions, and close the dooragain. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC.

RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN

On some vehicles, this messagedisplays and a chime sounds if thepassenger side rear door is not fullyclosed and the vehicle is in a drivegear. Stop and turn off the vehicle,check the door for obstructions, andclose the door again. Check to seeif the message still appears onthe DIC.

Engine Cooling SystemMessages

ENGINE HOT A/C (AirConditioning) OFF

This message displays when theengine coolant becomes hotter thanthe normal operating temperature.See Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge 0 96. To avoid added strainon a hot engine, the air conditioningcompressor automatically turns off.When the coolant temperaturereturns to normal, the air



conditioning compressor turns backon. You can continue to drive thevehicle.

If this message continues to appear,have the system repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible to avoiddamage to the engine.

ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLEENGINE

This message displays when theengine coolant temperature is toohot. Stop and allow the vehicle toidle until it cools down. See EngineCoolant Temperature Gauge 0 96.

ENGINE OVERHEATED STOPENGINE

This message displays and a chimesounds if the engine cooling systemreaches unsafe temperatures foroperation. Stop and turn off thevehicle as soon as it is safe to do soto avoid severe damage. Thismessage clears when the enginehas cooled to a safe operatingtemperature.

Engine Oil Messages

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON

This message displays when theengine oil needs to be changed.When you change the engine oil, besure to reset the CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message. See EngineOil Life System 0 219 forinformation on how to reset themessage. See Engine Oil 0 217 andMaintenance Schedule 0 295.

ENGINE OIL LOW ADD OIL

If the vehicle has an oil level sensor,this message displays if the oil levelin the vehicle is low. Check the oillevel and correct it as necessary.You may need to let the vehicle coolor warm up and cycle the ignition tobe sure this message clears. SeeEngine Oil 0 217.

OIL PRESSURE LOW STOPENGINE

This message displays if low oilpressure levels occur. Stop thevehicle as soon as safely possibleand do not operate it until the causeof the low oil pressure has been

corrected. Check the oil as soon aspossible and have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. See EngineOil 0 217.

Engine Power Messages

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED

This message displays and a chimesounds when the cooling systemtemperature gets too hot and theengine further enters the enginecoolant protection mode. SeeEngine Overheating 0 228 forfurther information.

This message also displays whenthe engine power is reduced.Reduced engine power can affectthe vehicle's ability to accelerate.If this message is on, but there is noreduction in performance, proceedto your destination. Theperformance may be reduced thenext time the vehicle is driven. Thevehicle may be driven at a reducedspeed while this message is on, butacceleration and speed may bereduced. Anytime this message



stays on, the vehicle should betaken to your dealer for service assoon as possible.

Fuel System Messages

FUEL LEVEL LOW

This message displays and a chimesounds if the fuel level is low. Refuelas soon as possible. See FuelGauge 0 94 and Fuel 0 197 formore information.

TIGHTEN GAS CAP

This message may display alongwith the check engine light on theinstrument cluster if the fuel cap isnot tightened properly. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp (CheckEngine Light) 0 100. Reinstall thefuel cap fully. See Filling the Tank0 199. The diagnostic system candetermine if the fuel cap has beenleft off or improperly installed.A loose or missing fuel cap allowsfuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. A few driving trips withthe cap properly installed shouldturn this light and message off.

Key and Lock Messages

REPLACE BATTERY INREMOTE KEY

This message displays if a RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitterbattery is low. The battery needs tobe replaced in the transmitter. See“Battery Replacement” underRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation 0 25.

Lamp Messages

AUTOMATIC LIGHTCONTROL OFF

This message displays when theautomatic headlamps are turned off.See Exterior Lamp Controls 0 123.

AUTOMATIC LIGHTCONTROL ON

This message displays when theautomatic headlamps are turned on.See Exterior Lamp Controls 0 123.

TURN SIGNAL ON

This message displays and a chimesounds if a turn signal is left on for1.2 km (0.75 mi). Move the turnsignal lever to the off position.

Object Detection SystemMessages

PARK ASST BLOCKED SEEOWNERS MANUAL

This message displays if there issomething interfering with the RearParking Assist (RPA) system. SeeParking Assist 0 195.

PARK ASSIST OFF

After the vehicle has been started,this message displays to remind thedriver that the Rear Parking Assist(RPA) system has been turned off.Press the set/reset button or the tripodometer reset stem toacknowledge this message andclear it from the DIC display. To turnthe RPA system back on, seeParking Assist 0 195.



SERVICE PARK ASSIST

This message displays if there is aproblem with the Rear ParkingAssist (RPA) system. Do not usethis system to help you park. SeeParking Assist 0 195. See yourdealer for service.

Ride Control SystemMessages

SERVICE STABILITRAK

If the vehicle has StabiliTrak® andthis message displays, it meansthere may be a problem with theStabiliTrak system. If you see thismessage, try to reset the system.Stop; turn off the engine for at least15 seconds; then start the engineagain. If this message still comeson, it means there is a problem. Youshould see your dealer for service.The vehicle is safe to drive,however, you do not have thebenefit of StabiliTrak, so reduceyour speed and drive accordingly.

SERVICE TRACTIONCONTROL

If the vehicle has StabiliTrak, thismessage displays when there is aproblem with the Traction ControlSystem (TCS). When this messagedisplays, the system will not limitwheel spin. Adjust your drivingaccordingly. See your dealer forservice. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 188.

STABILITRAK INITIALIZING

If the vehicle has StabiliTrak, thismessage may display until firstdriving the vehicle and exceeding40 km/h (25 mph) for two minutes.The StabiliTrak system is notfunctional until this message hasturned off. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 188.

TRACTION XXSTABILITRAK XX

If the vehicle has StabiliTrak, thismessage displays when the tractioncontrol and/or StabiliTrak systemshave been turned on or off. Adjustyour driving accordingly. To limitwheel spin and realize the full

benefits of the stabilityenhancement system, you shouldnormally leave StabiliTrak on.However, you should turnStabiliTrak off if the vehicle getsstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snowand you want to rock the vehicle toattempt to free it, or if you aredriving in extreme off-roadconditions and require more wheelspin. See If the Vehicle Is Stuck0 169. To turn the StabiliTraksystem on or off, see TractionControl/Electronic Stability Control0 188.

STABILITRAK OFF may alsodisplay when the stability controlhas been automatically disabled.There are several conditions thatcan cause this message to appear.

. One condition is overheating,which could occur if StabiliTrakactivates continuously for anextended period of time.

. The message also displays if thebrake system warning light is on.See Brake System WarningLight 0 101.



. The message could display if thestability system takes longerthan usual to complete itsdiagnostic checks due to drivingconditions.

. The message displays if anengine or vehicle relatedproblem has been detected andthe vehicle needs service. Seeyour dealer.

The message turns off as soon asthe conditions that caused themessage to be displayed are nolonger present.

Airbag System Messages

SERVICE AIRBAG

This message displays if there is aproblem with the airbag system.Take the vehicle to your dealer forservice.

Security Messages

SERVICE THEFT DETERRENTSYSTEM

This message displays when thereis a problem with the theft-deterrentsystem. The vehicle may or may notrestart so you may want to take thevehicle to your dealer before turningoff the engine. See ImmobilizerOperation 0 33 for more information.

WAIT TO START

This message displays briefly whenthe theft-deterrent system hasinitially found incorrect conditionswithin the vehicle and is making adouble check. If your vehicle doesnot start soon after, try to start itagain. If it still does not start, haveyour vehicle serviced by yourdealer.

Service Vehicle Messages

SERVICE A/C SYSTEM

This message displays when theelectronic sensors that control theair conditioning and heatingsystems are no longer working.

Have the climate control systemserviced by your dealer if you noticea drop in heating and airconditioning efficiency.

SERVICE VEHICLE SOON

This message displays when anon-emissions related malfunctionoccurs. Have the vehicle servicedby your dealer as soon as possible.

STARTING DISABLEDSERVICE THROTTLE

This message displays if the startingof the engine is disabled due to theelectronic throttle control system.Have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer immediately.

This message only appears whilethe ignition is in ON/RUN, and willnot disappear until the problem isresolved.

This message cannot beacknowledged.



Tire Messages

CHECK TIRE PRESSURE orTIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE

If the vehicle has the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays when thepressure in one or more of the tiresis low. The low tire pressure warninglight will also come on. See TirePressure Light 0 103. This messagewill also indicate which tire needs tobe checked. You can receive morethan one tire pressure message at atime. To read the other messagesthat may have been sent at thesame time, press the set/resetbutton. If a tire pressure messageappears on the DIC, stop as soonas you can. Have the tire pressureschecked and set to those shown onthe Tire Loading Information label.See Tires 0 250, Vehicle LoadLimits 0 170, and Tire Pressure0 258. The DIC also shows the tirepressure values. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) 0 105.

SERVICE TIRE MONITORSYSTEM

If the vehicle has the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays if a part on thesystem is not working properly. Thetire pressure light also flashes andthen remains on during the sameignition cycle. See Tire PressureLight 0 103. Several conditions maycause this message to appear. SeeTire Pressure Monitor Operation0 260 for more information. If thewarning comes on and stays on,there may be a problem with theTPMS. See your dealer.

TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE

If the vehicle has the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays when the systemis re-learning the tire positions onthe vehicle. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) 0 105 for moreinformation. The tire positions mustbe re-learned after rotating the tiresor after replacing a tire or sensor.

See Tire Inspection 0 263, TireRotation 0 263, Tire PressureMonitor Operation 0 260, and TirePressure 0 258 for moreinformation.

Transmission Messages

GRADE BRAKING DISABLED

This message displays when thegrade braking has been disabledwith the Tow/Haul Mode button onthe end of the shift lever. See Tow/Haul Mode 0 186, AutomaticTransmission 0 182, and CruiseControl 0 190.

GRADE BRAKING ENABLED

This message displays when thegrade braking has been enabledwith the Tow/Haul Mode button onthe end of the shift lever. See Tow/Haul Mode 0 186, AutomaticTransmission 0 182, and CruiseControl 0 190.

GRADE BRAKING ON

This message displays when thegrade braking has been activatedwhile driving on downhill grades.



This message will only appear thefirst time the feature is activated inan ignition cycle. See Tow/HaulMode 0 186, AutomaticTransmission 0 182, and CruiseControl 0 190.

SERVICE TRANSMISSION

This message displays when thereis a problem with the transmission.See your dealer for service.

TRANSMISSION HOT IDLEENGINE

Caution

Do not drive the vehicle while thetransmission fluid is overheating,or the transmission can bedamaged. This could lead tocostly repairs that would not becovered by the warranty.

This message displays along with achime if the transmission fluid in thevehicle gets hot. Driving with thetransmission fluid temperature highcan cause damage to the vehicle.Stop the vehicle and let it idle to

allow the transmission to cool. Thismessage clears and the chimestops when the fluid temperaturereaches a safe level.

Vehicle ReminderMessages

ICE POSSIBLE DRIVEWITH CARE

This message displays when theoutside air temperature is coldenough to create icy roadconditions. Adjust your drivingaccordingly.

VehiclePersonalizationThis vehicle may havecustomization capabilities that allowyou to program certain features toone preferred setting. Customizationfeatures can only be programmed toone setting on the vehicle andcannot be programmed to apreferred setting for two differentdrivers.

All of the customization options maynot be available on your vehicle.Only the options available will bedisplayed on the DIC.

The default settings for thecustomization features were setwhen the vehicle left the factory, butmay have been changed from theirdefault state since then.

The customization preferences areautomatically recalled.

To change customizationpreferences, use the followingprocedure.



Entering the FeatureSettings Menu

1. Turn the ignition on and placethe vehicle in P (Park).

To avoid excessive drain onthe battery, it is recommendedthat the headlamps areturned off.

2. Press U to enter the featuresettings menu.

If the menu is not available,FEATURE SETTINGSAVAILABLE IN PARK willdisplay. Before entering themenu, make sure the vehicle isin P (Park).

Feature Settings Menu Items

The following are customizationfeatures that allow you to programsettings to the vehicle:

DISPLAY IN ENGLISH

This feature will only display if alanguage other than English hasbeen set. This feature allows you tochange the language in which theDIC messages appear to English.

Press U until the PRESS V TODISPLAY IN ENGLISH screenappears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to displayall DIC messages in English.

LANGUAGE

This feature allows you to select thelanguage in which the DICmessages will appear.

Press U until the LANGUAGEscreen appears on the DIC display.Press V once to access the settings

for this feature. Then press U toscroll through the following settings:

ENGLISH (default) : All messageswill appear in English.

FRANCAIS : All messages willappear in French.

ESPANOL : All messages willappear in Spanish.

ARABIC : All messages will appearin Arabic.

NO CHANGE : No change will bemade to this feature. The currentsetting will remain.

To select a setting, press V whilethe desired setting is displayed onthe DIC. A beep will sound once alanguage has been selected.

AUTO DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to selectwhen the doors willautomatically lock.

Press U until AUTO DOOR LOCKappears on the DIC display.Press V once to access the settings


SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default) :The doors will automatically lockwhen the vehicle is shifted out ofP (Park).

AT VEHICLE SPEED : The doorswill automatically lock when thevehicle speed is above 13 km/h(8 mph) for three seconds.




To select a setting, press V whilethe desired setting is displayed onthe DIC.

AUTO DOOR UNLOCK

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not to turn off theautomatic door unlocking feature.It also allows you to select whichdoors and when the doors willautomatically unlock.

Press U until AUTO DOORUNLOCK appears on the DICdisplay. Press V once to access thesettings for this feature. Thenpress U to scroll through thefollowing settings:

OFF : None of the doors willautomatically unlock.

DRIVER AT KEY OUT : Only thedriver door will unlock when the keyis taken out of the ignition.

DRIVER IN PARK : Only the driverdoor will unlock when the vehicle isshifted into P (Park).

ALL AT KEY OUT : All of the doorswill unlock when the key is takenout of the ignition.

ALL IN PARK (default) : All of thedoors will unlock when the vehicle isshifted into P (Park).



REMOTE DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to select thetype of feedback you will receivewhen locking the vehicle with theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. You will not receivefeedback when locking the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter if the doorsare open. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation 0 25.

Press U until REMOTE DOORLOCK appears on the DIC display.Press V once to access the settings


OFF : There will be no feedbackwhen you press Q on the RKEtransmitter.

LIGHTS ONLY : The exterior lampswill flash when you press Q on theRKE transmitter.

HORN ONLY : The horn will soundon the second press of Q on theRKE transmitter.

HORN & LIGHTS (default) : Theexterior lamps will flash when youpress Q on the RKE transmitter, and

the horn will sound when Q ispressed again within five seconds ofthe previous command.



REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK

This feature allows you to select thetype of feedback you will receivewhen unlocking the vehicle with theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)



transmitter. You will not receivefeedback when unlocking thevehicle with the RKE transmitter ifthe doors are open. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation 0 25.

Press U until REMOTE DOORUNLOCK appears on the DICdisplay. Press V once to access thesettings for this feature. Thenpress U to scroll through thefollowing settings:

LIGHTS OFF : The exterior lampswill not flash when you press K onthe RKE transmitter.

LIGHTS ON (default) : The exteriorlamps will flash when you press Kon the RKE transmitter.



DELAY DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not the locking of thedoors will be delayed. When lockingthe doors with the power door lockswitch and a door is open, thisfeature will delay locking the doorsuntil five seconds after the last dooris closed. You will hear three chimesto signal that the delayed lockingfeature is in use. The key must beout of the ignition for this feature towork. You can temporarily overridedelayed locking by pressing thepower door lock switch twice or Qon the RKE transmitter twice. SeeDelayed Locking 0 29.

Press U until DELAY DOOR LOCKappears on the DIC display.Press V once to access the settings


OFF : There will be no delayedlocking of the vehicle's doors.

ON (default) : The doors will notlock until five seconds after the lastdoor is closed.



EXIT LIGHTING

This feature allows you to select theamount of time you want theexterior lamps to remain on when itis dark enough outside. Thishappens after the key is turned fromON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.

Press U until EXIT LIGHTINGappears on the DIC display.Press V once to access the settings


OFF : The exterior lamps will notturn on.

10 SECONDS (default) : Theexterior lamps will stay on for10 seconds.

1MINUTE : The exterior lamps willstay on for one minute.



2MINUTES : The exterior lamps willstay on for twominutes.



APPROACH LIGHTING

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not to have the exteriorlamps turn on briefly during low lightperiods after unlocking the vehicleusing the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter.

Press U until APPROACHLIGHTING appears on the DICdisplay. Press V once to access thesettings for this feature. Thenpress U to scroll through thefollowing settings:

OFF : The exterior lamps will notturn on when you unlock the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter.

ON (default) : If it is dark enoughoutside, the exterior lamps will turnon briefly when you unlock thevehicle with the RKE transmitter.The lamps will remain on for20 seconds or until Q on the RKEtransmitter is pressed, or the vehicleis no longer off. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation 0 25.



CHIME VOLUME

This feature allows you to select thevolume level of the chime.

Press U until CHIME VOLUMEappears on the DIC display.Press V once to access the settings


NORMAL : The chime volume willbe set to a normal level.

LOUD : The chime volume will beset to a loud level.


There is no default for chimevolume. The volume will stay at thelast known setting.


FACTORY SETTINGS

This feature allows you to set all ofthe customization features back totheir factory default settings.

Press U until FACTORY SETTINGSappears on the DIC display.Press V once to access the settings


RESTORE ALL (default) : Thecustomization features will be set totheir factory default settings.

DO NOT RESTORE : Thecustomization features will not beset to their factory default settings.




EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS

This feature allows you to exit thefeature settings menu.

Press U until FEATURE SETTINGS

PRESS V TO EXIT appears in the

DIC display. Press V once to exitthe menu.

If you do not exit, pressing U willreturn you to the beginning of thefeature settings menu.

Exiting the FeatureSettings Menu

The feature settings menu will beexited when any of the followingoccurs:

. The vehicle is no longer inON/RUN.

. The3 orT DIC buttons arepressed.

. The end of the feature settingsmenu is reached and exited.

. A 40 second time period haselapsed with no selection made.


Lighting 123

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . 123Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 126Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Lighting FeaturesEntry/Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Battery Load Management . . . 128Battery Power Protection . . . . . 129

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The exterior lamp control is on theinstrument panel to the left of thesteering wheel.

There are four positions:

O (Off) : Briefly turn the control tothis position to turn the automaticheadlamps and Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) off or back on.

For vehicles first sold in Canada,the off position only works forvehicles that are shifted into theP (Park) position.

AUTO (Automatic) : Automaticallyturns the exterior lamps on and off,depending on outside lighting.

; (Parking Lamps) : Turns on theparking lamps including all lamps,except the headlamps.

2 (Headlamps) : Turns on theheadlamps together with the parkinglamps and instrument panel lights.

If the headlamps are turned onwhile the vehicle is on, theheadlamps turn off automatically10 minutes after the ignition isturned off. If the headlamps areturned on while the vehicle is off,the headlamps will continue to stayon. To prevent the battery frombeing drained, turn the control to theO position.

A warning chime sounds if the driverdoor is opened while the ignitionswitch is off and the headlampsare on.

To change the headlamps from lowbeam to high beam, pull the turnsignal lever all the way toward you.Then release it.


124 Lighting

Exterior Lamps OffReminderIf a door is open, a reminder chimesounds when the headlamps orparking lamps are manually turnedon and the key is out of the ignition.To turn off the chime, turn theheadlamp switch to O or AUTO andthen back on, or close and re‐openthe door. In the auto mode, theheadlamps turn off once the ignitionis in LOCK/OFF or may remain onuntil the headlamp delay ends,if enabled in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See “Exit Lighting”under Vehicle Personalization0 117.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer23 (Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger) : Pull the turn signal leverall the way toward you to changethe headlamps from low to highbeam. Then release it.

This instrument cluster light comeson when the high-beam headlampsare on.

Flash-to-PassThis feature is used to signal to thevehicle ahead that you wantto pass.

If the headlamps are off or in thelow‐beam position, pull the turnsignal lever toward you tomomentarily switch to high beams.

Release the lever to turn thehigh-beam headlamps off.

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)DRL can make it easier for others tosee the front of the vehicle duringthe day. Fully functional DRL arerequired on all vehicles first sold inCanada.

The DRL system comes on indaylight when the followingconditions are met:

. The ignition is on.

. The exterior lamp control is inthe AUTO position.

. The shift lever is not in P (Park).

. The light sensor determines it isdaytime.

When the DRL are on, the taillamps,sidemarker, instrument panel lights,and other lamps will not be on.

The automatic headlamp systemautomatically switches from DRL tothe headlamps depending on thedarkness of the surroundings.

To turn off the DRL, turn the exteriorlamp control to O and then releaseit. For vehicles first sold in Canada,the transmission must be in theP (Park) position, before the DRLcan be turned off.


Lighting 125

Automatic HeadlampSystemWhen it is dark enough outside andthe headlamp switch is in AUTO,the automatic headlamp systemturns on the headlamps, along withthe taillamps, sidemarker lamps,parking lamps, and the instrumentpanel lights. The radio lights willalso be dim.

To turn off the automatic headlampsystem, turn the exterior lampcontrol to the off position and thenrelease. For vehicles first sold inCanada, the transmission must bein the P (Park) position, before theautomatic headlamp system can beturned off.

The vehicle has a light sensor onthe top of the instrument panel. Donot cover the sensor; otherwise thesystem will come on whenever theignition is on.

The system may also turn on theheadlamps when driving through aparking garage or tunnel.

There is a delay in the transitionbetween the daytime and nighttimeoperation of the Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) and the automaticheadlamp system so that drivingunder bridges or bright overheadstreet lights does not affect thesystem. The DRL and automaticheadlamp system are only affectedwhen the light sensor sees achange in lighting lasting longerthan the delay.

If the vehicle is started in a darkgarage, the automatic headlampsystem comes on immediately.Once the vehicle leaves the garage,it takes approximately 30 secondsfor the automatic headlamp systemto change to DRL if it is lightoutside. During that delay, theinstrument cluster may not be as

bright as usual. Make sure theinstrument panel brightness controlis in the full bright position. SeeInstrument Panel IlluminationControl 0 127.

Lights On with Wipers

If the windshield wipers areactivated in daylight with the engineon, and the exterior lamp control isin AUTO, the headlamps, parkinglamps, and other exterior lampscome on. The transition time for thelamps coming on varies based onwiper speed. When the wipers arenot operating, these lamps turn off.Move the exterior lamp control toPor; to disable this feature.


126 Lighting

Hazard Warning Flashers

| (Hazard Warning Flashers) :Press this button to make the frontand rear turn signal lamps flash onand off. This warns others that youare having trouble. Press again toturn the flashers off.

When the hazard warning flashersare on, the vehicle's turn signals willnot work.

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

G (Turn Signals) : An arrow onthe instrument cluster flashes in thedirection of the turn or lane change.

To signal a turn, move the lever allthe way up or down.

To signal a lane change, raise orlower the lever until the arrow startsto flash. The turn signalautomatically flashes three timesand if the Tow/Haul Mode is active itflashes six times. Holding the turnsignal lever for more thanone second causes the turn signalsto flash continually until the lever isreleased.

The lever returns to its startingposition when released.

If after signaling a turn or lanechange the arrow flashes rapidly ordoes not come on, a signal bulbmay be burned out.

Have any burned out bulbsreplaced. If a bulb is not burned out,check the fuse. See Fuses andCircuit Breakers 0 244.

Turn Signal On Chime

If the turn signal is left on for morethan 1.2 km (0.75 mi), a chimesounds at each flash of the turnsignal and the message TURNSIGNAL ON also appears in theDriver Information Center (DIC). SeeLamp Messages 0 113. To turn offthe chime and message, move theturn signal lever to the off position.


Lighting 127

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination ControlThe knob for this feature is to theleft of the steering column.

D (Instrument Panel Lights) :Push the knob to extend and thenturn clockwise or counterclockwiseto brighten or dim the instrumentpanel lights and the radio display.This only works if the headlamps orparking lamps are on.

Dome LampsThe dome lamps come on when anydoor is opened. They turn off afterall the doors are closed.

The instrument panel brightnessknob extends whenD is pressed.To manually turn on the domelamps, pressD then turn the knobclockwise to the farthest position. Inthis position, the dome lampsremain on whether a door is openedor closed.

Dome Lamp Override

TheE DOME OFF button is abovethe instrument panelbrightness knob.

The dome lamp override sets thedome lamps to remain off or comeon automatically when a door isopened.

E DOME OFF : Press this buttonin and the dome lamps remain offwhen a door is opened. Press thebutton again to return it to theextended position so that the domelamps come on when a door isopened.


128 Lighting

Reading LampsIf equipped with reading lamps,press the button next to each lampto turn it on or off.

The vehicle may also have readinglamps in other locations. The lampscannot be adjusted.

Lighting Features

Entry/Exit LightingThe vehicle has an illuminatedentry/exit feature.

The dome lamps come on if theEDOME OFF button is in theextended position, when a door isopened, or the key is removed fromthe ignition.

Battery LoadManagementThe vehicle may have ElectricPower Management (EPM) thatestimates the battery's temperatureand state of charge. It then adjuststhe voltage for best performanceand extended life of the battery.

When the battery's state of chargeis low, the voltage is raised slightlyto quickly bring the charge back up.When the state of charge is high,the voltage is lowered slightly toprevent overcharging. If the vehiclehas a voltmeter gauge or a voltagedisplay on the Driver Information

Center (DIC), you may see thevoltage move up or down. This isnormal. If there is a problem, analert will be displayed.

The battery can be discharged atidle if the electrical loads are veryhigh. This is true for all vehicles.This is because the generator(alternator) may not be spinning fastenough at idle to produce all thepower that is needed for very highelectrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs whenseveral of the following are on, suchas: headlamps, high beams, foglamps, rear window defogger,climate control fan at high speed,heated seats, engine cooling fans,trailer loads, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessivedischarge of the battery. It does thisby balancing the generator's outputand the vehicle's electrical needs.It can increase engine idle speed togenerate more power, wheneverneeded. It can temporarily reducethe power demands of someaccessories.


Lighting 129

Normally, these actions occur insteps or levels, without beingnoticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action,this action may be noticeable to thedriver. If so, a Driver InformationCenter (DIC) message might bedisplayed, such as SERVICEBATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM.If this messages displays, it isrecommended that the driver reducethe electrical loads as much aspossible. See Battery Voltage andCharging Messages 0 110.

Battery Power ProtectionThis feature shuts off the domelamps if they are left on for morethan 10 minutes when the ignition isin LOCK/OFF. This helps to preventthe battery from running down.


130 Infotainment System

InfotainmentSystem

IntroductionInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . 131Overview (AM-FM Radio) . . . . . 131Overview (Radio withCD/MP3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

RadioAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 139

Audio PlayersCD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

OnStar SystemOnStar System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Introduction

InfotainmentBase radio information is included inthis manual. See the infotainmentmanual for information on otheravailable infotainment systems.

Read the following pages tobecome familiar with these features.

{ Warning

Taking your eyes off the road fortoo long or too often while usingany infotainment feature cancause a crash. You or otherscould be injured or killed. Do notgive extended attention toinfotainment tasks while driving.Limit your glances at the vehicledisplays and focus your attentionon driving. Use voice commandswhenever possible.

The infotainment system has built-infeatures intended to help avoiddistraction by disabling somefunctions when driving. These

functions may gray out when theyare unavailable. Many infotainmentfeatures are also available throughthe instrument cluster and steeringwheel controls.

Before driving:

. Become familiar with theoperation, faceplate buttons, andscreen buttons.

. Set up the audio by presettingfavorite stations, setting thetone, and adjusting thespeakers.

. Set up phone numbers inadvance so they can be calledeasily by pressing a singlebutton or by using a single voicecommand if equipped withBluetooth phone capability.

See Defensive Driving 0 164.

To play the infotainment system withthe ignition off, see RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) 0 179.


Infotainment System 131

Theft-Deterrent FeatureThe theft-deterrent feature works bylearning a portion of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) to theinfotainment system. Theinfotainment system does notoperate if it is stolen or moved to adifferent vehicle.

Overview (AM-FM Radio)

Overview (AM-FM Radio)

1. 4 (Information)

. Press to show informationon the current station ortrack.

2. FAV (Favorites Pages)

. Press to scroll through thefavorite pages.

3. MENU

. Press to set the number offavorite pages.

. Press to select the SpeedCompensation Volumesetting.

. Press to turn Auto PageText Information on or off.



4. Buttons 1 - 6

. Saves and selects favoritestations.

5. EQ (Equalizer)

. Press to adjust theequalizer.

6. f (Tone/Tune)

. Press to set the bass,midrange, treble, fade, andbalance.

. Turn to manually selectradio stations.

7. CAT (Category)

. Press to display a list of XMcategories.

8. Auxiliary Input Jack (IfEquipped)

. Use to connect externalaudio devices.

9. SRCE

. Press to scroll throughauxiliary devices, AM, FM,or SiriusXM, if equipped.

10. \ FWD (Forward)

. Press and hold to fastforward through a track.

11. s REV (Reverse)

. Press and hold to gobackward fast through atrack.

12. P (Power/Volume)

. Press to turn theinfotainment system onor off.

. Turn to adjust the volume.

13. ¨ SEEK

. Seeks the next station.

14. © SEEK

. Seeks the previous station.

15. H (Clock)

. Press to set the clockand date.



Overview (Radio with CD/MP3)

Overview (Radio with CD/MP3)

1. 4 (Information)

. Press to show informationon the current station ortrack.

2. FAV (Favorites Pages)

. Press to scroll through thefavorite pages.

3. MENU

. Press to set the number offavorite pages.

. Press to select the SpeedCompensation Volumesetting.

. Press to turn Auto PageText Information on or off.

4. Buttons 1 - 6

. Saves and selects favoritestations.

5. EQ (Equalizer)

. Press to adjust theequalizer.

6. f (Tone/Tune)

. Press to set the bass,midrange, treble, fade, andbalance.

. Turn to manually selectradio stations.

7. CAT (Category)

. Press to display a list of XMcategories.

8. Z EJECT

. Press to eject theloaded CD.

9. Auxiliary Input Jack (IfEquipped)

. Use to connect externalaudio devices.



10. CD/AUX

. Press to scroll throughselecting the CD or anauxiliary device.

11. \ FWD (Forward)

. Press and hold to fastforward through a track.

12. s REV (Reverse)

. Press and hold to gobackward fast through atrack.

13. P (Power/Volume)

. Press to turn theinfotainment system onor off.

. Turn to adjust the volume.

14. ¨ SEEK

. Seeks the next station.

15. © SEEK

. Seeks the previous station.

16. BAND

. Press to scroll through theavailable bands FM1, FM2,AM, or SiriusXM ifequipped.

17. H (Clock)

. Press to set the clockand date.

Operation

Using the Radio

O (Power/Volume) : Press to turnthe system on and off.

Turn clockwise or counterclockwiseto increase or decrease the volume.

4 (Information) : Press to switchthe display between the radiostation frequency and the time.While the ignition is off, press thisbutton to display the time. Press todisplay additional text informationrelated to the current FM-RDSstation or MP3 song. A choice ofadditional information such asChannel, Song, Artist, and CAT(category) can display. Continuepressing to highlight the desired tab,

or press the softkey located underany one of the tabs and theinformation about that tab displays.

Speed Compensated Volume(SCV) : Radios with SCVautomatically adjust the radiovolume to compensate for road andwind noise as the vehicle speedchanges while driving, so that thevolume level stays consistent.

To activate SCV:

1. Set the radio volume to thedesired level.

2. Press the MENU button todisplay the radio setup menu.

3. Press the softkey under theAUTO VOLUM (automaticvolume) tab on the radiodisplay.

4. Press the softkey under thedesired Speed CompensatedVolume setting (OFF, Low,Med, or High) to select thelevel of radio volumecompensation. The displaytimes out after approximately10 seconds. Each higher



setting allows for more radiovolume compensation at fastervehicle speeds.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

To adjust the bass or treble:

1. Press the f knob until Bass orTreble displays.

2. To adjust the setting, do one ofthe following:

. Turn the f knob.

. Press either ¨ SEEK,

or © SEEK.

EQ (Equalization) : Press thisbutton to choose bass and trebleequalization settings designed fordifferent types of music. SelectingMANUAL, or changing bass ortreble, returns the EQ to the manualbass and treble settings.

Unique EQ settings can be savedfor each source.

Adjusting the Speakers(Balance/Fade)

BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade) : Toadjust the balance or fade:

1. Press the f knob until thespeaker control tabs display.

2. Highlight the desired speakercontrol tab by doing one of thefollowing:

. Press the f knob.

. Press the softkey under thedesired tab.

3. Adjust the setting by doing oneof the following:

. Turn the f knob clockwiseor counterclockwise.

. Press ¨ SEEK or © SEEK.

. Press\ FWD ors REV.

To quickly adjust all speaker andtone controls to the middle position,press the f knob for more thantwo seconds.

If the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) isturned on, the radio disables FADEand mutes the rear speakers.

Radio Messages

Calibration Error : The audiosystem has been calibrated for thevehicle from the factory.If Calibration Error displays, itmeans that the radio has not beenconfigured properly for the vehicleand it must be returned to yourdealer for service.

VIN or NO VIN : One of thesemessages will display when theTheftLock system has locked up theradio. Take the vehicle to yourdealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or ifan error cannot be corrected,contact your dealer.



Radio

AM-FM Radio

Radio Data System (RDS)

The radio may have an RDS. TheRDS feature is available for useonly on FM stations that broadcastRDS information. This system reliesupon receiving specific informationfrom these stations and only workswhen the information is available.While the radio is tuned to anFM-RDS station, the station nameor call letters display. In rare cases,a radio station could broadcastincorrect information that causes theradio features to work improperly.If this happens, contact the radiostation.

Finding a Station

BAND or SRCE : Press to switchbetween FM1, FM2, and AM. Theselection displays.

f (Tune) : Turn clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the station frequency.

© SEEK or ¨ SEEK : Press ©SEEK to go to the previous or ¨SEEK to go to the next station andstay there.

To scan stations, press and holdeither button for two seconds until abeep sounds. The radio goes to astation, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next station. ForAM-FM Radio and Radio with CD,the station frequency flashes whilethe radio is in the scan mode. Presseither button again to stop scanning.

The radio seeks and scans stationsonly with a strong signal that are inthe selected band.

Scan presets within the currentselected band by pressing andholding either SEEK button forfour seconds until a double beepsounds. The radio goes to a storedpreset, plays for a few seconds if astrong signal is present, then goesto the next stored preset. Thestation frequency flashes while theradio is in the scan mode.

Storing a Radio Station as aFavorite

You are encouraged to set up radiostation favorites while the vehicle isparked. Tune to favorite stationsusing the presets, favorites button,and steering wheel controls,if equipped. See Defensive Driving0 164.

FAV (Favorites) : If the vehicle hasa FAV button, a maximum of36 stations can be programmed asfavorites using the six softkeysbelow the radio station frequencytabs and by using the radio favoritespage button (FAV button). Press theFAV button to go through up tosix pages of favorites, each havingsix favorite stations available perpage. Each page of favorites cancontain any combination of AM andFM stations.

The balance/fade and tone settingsthat were previously adjusted, arestored with the favorite stations.

To store a station as a favorite:

1. Tune to the desired radiostation.



2. Press the FAV button to displaythe page where the station is tobe stored.

3. Press and hold one of thesix softkeys until a beepsounds. When that softkey ispressed and released, thestation that was set, returns.

4. Repeat the steps for eachsoftkey radio station to bestored as a favorite.

The number of favorites pages canbe set up using the MENU button.To set up the number of favoritespages:


2. Press the softkey below theFAV 1-6 tab.

3. Select the desired number offavorites pages by pressing thesoftkey below the displayedpage numbers.

4. Press the FAV button, or let themenu time out, to return to theoriginal main radio screenshowing the radio stationfrequency tabs and to begin

the process of programmingfavorites for the chosennumber of numbered pages.

Satellite RadioSiriusXM®, if equipped, is a satelliteradio service based in the UnitedStates and Canada only.

Finding a Category (CAT)Station

CAT (Category) : The CAT button isused to find XM channels (ifequipped) while the radio is in theXM mode.

Finding a Channel

BAND or SRCE : Press to switchbetween FM1, FM2, AM, and XM.The selection displays.

f (Tune) : Turn clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the station frequency.

© SEEK or ¨ SEEK : Press ©SEEK to go to the previous or ¨SEEK to go to the next station andstay there.

To scan stations, press and holdeither button for two seconds until abeep sounds. The radio goes to astation, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next station. Thestation frequency flashes while theradio is in the scan mode. Presseither button again to stop scanning.

The radio seeks and scans stationsonly with a strong signal that are inthe selected band.

To scan presets within the currentselected band by pressing andholding either SEEK button forfour seconds until a double beepsounds. The radio goes to a storedpreset, plays for a few seconds if astrong signal is present, then goesto the next stored preset. Thestation frequency flashes while theradio is in the scan mode.

Storing a Radio Station as aFavorite

Drivers are encouraged to set upradio station favorites while thevehicle is parked. Tune to favoritestations using the presets, favorites



button, and steering wheel controls,if the vehicle has this feature. SeeDefensive Driving 0 164.

FAV (Favorites) : If the vehicle hasa FAV button, a maximum of36 stations can be programmed asfavorites using the six softkeysbelow the radio station frequencytabs and by using the radio favoritespage button (FAV button). Press theFAV button to go through up tosix pages of favorites, each havingsix favorite stations available perpage. Each page of favorites cancontain any combination of AM andFM stations.

The balance/fade and tone settingsthat were previously adjusted, arestored with the favorite stations.

To store a station as a favorite:

1. Tune to the desired radiostation.

2. Press the FAV button to displaythe page where the station is tobe stored.

3. Press and hold one of thesix softkeys until a beepsounds. When that softkey ispressed and released, thestation that was set, returns.

4. Repeat the steps for eachsoftkey radio station to bestored as a favorite.

The number of favorites pages canbe set up using the MENU button.To set up the number of favoritespages:


2. Press the softkey below theFAV 1-6 tab.

3. Select the desired number offavorites pages by pressing thesoftkey below the displayedpage numbers.

4. Press the FAV button, or let themenu time out, to return to theoriginal main radio screenshowing the radio stationfrequency tabs and to beginthe process of programmingfavorites for the chosennumber of numbered pages.

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and staticcan occur during normal radioreception if items such as cell phonechargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronicdevices are plugged into theaccessory power outlet. If there isinterference or static, unplug theitem from the accessory poweroutlet.

AM

The range for most AM stations isgreater than for FM, especially atnight. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere witheach other. For better radioreception, most AM radio stationsboost the power levels during theday, and then reduce these levelsduring the night. Static can alsooccur when things like storms andpower lines interfere with radioreception. When this happens, tryreducing the treble on the radio.



FM Stereo

FM stereo gives the best sound, butFM signals reach only about 16 to65 km (10 to 40 mi). Tall buildings orhills can interfere with FM signals,causing the sound to fade inand out.

Cellular Phone Usage

Cellular phone usage may causeinterference with the radio. Thisinterference may occur whenmaking or receiving phone calls,charging the phone's battery,or simply having the phone on. Thisinterference causes an increasedlevel of static while listening to theradio. If static is received whilelistening to the radio, unplug thecellular phone and turn it off.

Fixed Mast AntennaThe fixed mast antenna canwithstand most car washes withoutbeing damaged as long as it issecurely attached to the base. If themast becomes slightly bent,straighten it out by hand. If the mastis badly bent, replace it.

Make sure there is sufficientclearance when entering garages orparking structures.

Occasionally check to make surethe antenna is tightened to its base.If tightening is required, tightenby hand.

Audio Players

CD Player

Care of the CD Player

Do not add any label to a CD.It could get caught in the CD. If aCD is recorded on a personalcomputer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of therecorded CD with a marking pen.

The use of CD lens cleaners is notadvised, due to the risk ofcontaminating the lens of the CDoptics with lubricants internal to theCD player mechanism.

Caution

If a label is added to a CD, morethan one CD is inserted into theslot at a time, or an attempt ismade to play scratched ordamaged CDs, the CD playercould be damaged. While usingthe CD player, use only CDs ingood condition without any label,

(Continued)



Caution (Continued)

load one CD at a time, and keepthe CD player and the loading slotfree of foreign materials, liquids,and debris.

If an error displays, see “CD PlayerMessages” later in this section.

Care of CDs

If playing a CD-R, the sound qualitycan be reduced due to CD-R orCD-RW quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the musicthat has been recorded, and theway the CD-R or CD-RW has beenhandled. Handle them carefully.Store CD-Rs or CD-RWs in theiroriginal cases or other protectivecases and away from direct sunlightand dust. The CD player scans thebottom surface of the disc. If thesurface of a CD is damaged, suchas cracked, broken, or scratched,the CD does not play properly or notat all. Do not touch the bottom sideof a CD while handling it; this could

damage the surface. Pick up CDsby the outer edges or the edge ofthe hole and the outer edge.

If the surface of a CD is soiled,clean it with a soft, lint-free cloth ordampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild,neutral detergent solution mixedwith water. Make sure the wipingprocess starts from the center tothe edge.

Inserting a CD

Insert a CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player pulls it inand the CD should begin playing.

Ejecting a CD

Z EJECT : Press and release toeject the disc. Remove the CDwhen Remove Disc displays. If thedisc is not removed, after severalseconds the disc is automaticallypulled back into the player.

Playing a CD

If the ignition or radio is turned offwith a CD in the player, it stays inthe player. When the ignition or

radio is turned on, the CD startsplaying where it stopped, if it wasthe last selected audio source.

When a CD is inserted, the CDsymbol displays on the left side ofthe radio display. As each new trackstarts to play, the track numberdisplays.

The CD player can play the smaller8 cm (3 in) single CDs with anadapter ring. Full-size CDs and thesmaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary) : Press tocycle between CD or Auxiliary whenlistening to the radio. The CD iconand a message showing the discand/or track number will displaywhen a CD is in the player. Pressagain and the system automaticallysearches for an auxiliary inputdevice; see Auxiliary Devices 0 144.If a portable audio player is notconnected, “No Input Device Found”displays.

4 (Information) : Press to displayadditional text information related tothe current song. If information isavailable, the song title information



displays on the top line of thedisplay and artist informationdisplays on the bottom line. Wheninformation is not available, NOINFO displays.

f (Tune) : Turn to select tracks onthe CD that is currently playing.

© SEEK : Press to go to the start ofthe current track if more than10 seconds on the CD have played.

Press to go to the previous track ifless than 10 seconds on the CDhave played.

Press and hold, or press multipletimes, to continue moving backwardthrough the tracks on the CD.

¨ SEEK : Press to go to the nexttrack.

Press and hold, or press multipletimes, to continue moving forwardthrough the tracks on the CD.

s REV (Fast Reverse) : Pressand hold to reverse playback quicklywithin a track.

\ FWD (Fast Forward) : Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly within a track.

RDM (Random) : Press to listen totracks in random, rather thansequential order. To use random, doone of the following:

For the AM-FM Radio with CD/MP3:

1. Press the RDM button until therandom icon displays.

2. Press the RDM button againuntil the random icondisappears from the display.

For the Radio with CD/MP3:

1. Press the softkey positionedunder the RDM tab untilRandom Current Disc displays.

2. Press the softkey again to turnoff random play.

MP3-Supported Files

The Radio with CD/MP3 have thecapability of playing an MP3 CD-Ror CD-RW disc.

Format

Radios that have the capability ofplaying MP3s can play .mp3 or .wmafiles that were recorded onto aCD-R or CD-RW disc. The files canbe recorded with the following fixed

bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps, 56 kbps,64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps,128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps,224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbps ora variable bit rate.

Compressed Audio or Mixed ModeDiscs

The radio can play discs thatcontain both uncompressed CDaudio and MP3 files. If both formatsare on the disc, the radio reads allMP3 files first, then theuncompressed CD audio files.

CD-R- or CD-RW-Supported Fileand Folder Structure

The radio supports:

. Up to 50 folders.

. Up to eight folders in depth.

. Up to 50 playlists.

. Up to 255 files.

. Playlists with an .m3u or .wplextension.

. Files with an .mp3, .wma, or .cdafile extension.



Root Directory

The root directory is treated as afolder. Files are stored in the rootdirectory when the disc or storagedevice does not contain folders.Files accessed from the rootdirectory of a CD display asF1 ROOT.

Empty Folder

Folders that do not contain files areskipped, and the player advances tothe next folder that contains files.

Order of Play

Compressed audio files areaccessed in the following order:

. Playlists (Px).

. Files stored in the root directory.

. Files stored in folders in the rootdirectory.

Tracks are played in the followingorder:

. Play begins from the first track inthe first playlist and continuessequentially through all tracks ineach playlist. When the last

track of the last playlist hasplayed, play continues from thefirst track of the first playlist.

. Play begins from the first track inthe first folder and continuessequentially through all tracks ineach folder. When the last trackof the last folder has played,play continues from the firsttrack of the first folder.

File System and Naming

The song name that displays is thesong name contained in the ID3 tag.If the song name is not present inthe ID3 tag, then the radio displaysthe file name without the extension(such as .mp3) as the track name.

Track names longer than 32characters or four pages areshortened. The display does notshow parts of words on the lastpage of text, and the extension ofthe file name is not displayed.

Preprogrammed Playlists

CDs that have preprogrammedplaylists created using WinAmp™,MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™software can be accessed; however,

there is no playlist-editing capabilityusing the radio. These playlists aretreated as special folders containingcompressed audio song files.

Playlists that have an .m3u or .plsfile extension and are stored on aUSB device may be supported bythe radio with a USB port.

Playlists can be changed by usingthe softkeys below the Sc andc T tabs, the f knob, the © SEEKbutton, or the ¨ SEEK button. AnMP3 CD-R or CD-RW that has beenrecorded without using file folderscan be played. If a CD-R or CD-RWcontains more than the maximum of50 folders, 15 playlists, and512 folders and files, the playerallows access and navigates up tothe maximum, but all items over themaximum are not accessible.

Playing an MP3

4 (Information) : Press to displayadditional text information related tothe current song. If information isavailable, the song title informationdisplays on the top line of thedisplay and artist information



displays on the bottom line. Wheninformation is not available, NOINFO displays.

f (Tune) : Turn to select MP3s onthe CD currently playing.

© SEEK : Press to go to the start ofthe track, if more than 10 secondshave played. Press and hold orpress multiple times to continuemoving backward through tracks.

¨ SEEK : Press to go to the nexttrack. Press and hold or pressmultiple times to continue movingforward through tracks.

s REV (Reverse) : Press and holdto reverse playback quickly. Soundis heard at a reduced volume andthe elapsed time of the file displays.Releases REV to resume playing.

\ FWD (Fast Forward) : Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly. Sound is heard at a reducedvolume and the elapsed time of thefile displays. Release\ FWD toresume playing. The elapsed time ofthe file displays.

Sc (Previous Folder) : Pressthe softkey below the Sc tab togo to the first track in the previousfolder.

c T (Next Folder) : Press thesoftkey below thec T tab to go tothe first track in the next folder.

RDM (Random) : Press to listen totracks in random, rather thansequential order. To use random, doone of the following:

For the Radio with CD/MP3:

1. Press the softkey under theRDM tab until Random CurrentDisc displays.

2. Press the softkey again to turnoff random play.

h (Music Navigator) : Press thesoftkey below theh tab to playthe files in order by artist or album.

The player scans the disc to sort thefiles by artist and album ID3 taginformation. It can take severalminutes to scan the disc depending

on the number of files on the disc.The radio may begin playing while itis scanning in the background.

When the scan is finished, the discbegins playing files in order byartist. The current artist playing isshown on the second line of thedisplay. Once all songs by that artistare played, the player moves to thenext artist in alphabetical order andbegins playing files by that artist.

To listen to files by another artist,press the softkey below either arrowtab. The disc goes to the next orprevious artist in alphabetical order.Continue pressing either softkeybelow the arrow tab until the desiredartist displays.

To change from playback by artist toplayback by album:

1. Press the softkey below theSort By tab.

2. Press one of the softkeysbelow the Album tab from thesort screen.

3. Press the softkey below theBack tab to return to the mainmusic navigator screen.



The album name displays on thesecond line between the arrows,and songs from the current albumbegin to play. Once all songs fromthat album have played, the playermoves to the next album inalphabetical order on the CD andbegins playing MP3s from thatalbum.

To exit music navigator mode, pressthe softkey below the Back tab toreturn to normal MP3 playback.

CD Player Messages

CHECK DISC : If this messagedisplays and/or the CD ejects, itcould be for one of the followingreasons:

. It is very hot. When thetemperature returns to normal,the CD should play.

. The road is very rough. Whenthe road becomes smoother, theCD should play.

. The CD is dirty, scratched, wet,or upside down.

. The air is very humid. If so, waitabout an hour and try again.

. There was a problem whileburning the CD.

. The label is caught in the CDplayer.

If the CD is not playing correctly, forany other reason, try a knowngood CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or ifan error cannot be corrected,contact your dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write itdown and provide it to your dealerwhen reporting the problem.

Auxiliary Devices

Using the Auxiliary Input Jack

Radios with an auxiliary input jackon the lower right side of thefaceplate can connect to an externalaudio device such as an iPod®,MP3 player, or CD player, for use asanother source for audio listening.This input jack is not an audiooutput; do not plug headphones intothe front auxiliary input jack.

Drivers are encouraged to set upany auxiliary device while thevehicle is in P (Park). SeeDefensive Driving 0 164 for moreinformation on driver distraction.

To use a portable audio player,connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable tothe radio's front auxiliary input jack.When a device is connected, pressthe radio CD/AUX button to beginplaying audio from the device overthe vehicle speakers.

For optimal sound quality, increasethe portable audio device's volumeto the loudest level.

It is always best to power theportable audio device through itsown battery while playing.

O (Power/Volume) : Turn clockwiseor counterclockwise to increase ordecrease the volume of the portableplayer. Additional volumeadjustments might have to be madefrom the portable device if thevolume is not loud or soft enough.



BAND : If equipped, press to listento the radio when a portable audiodevice is playing. The portableaudio device continues playing.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary) :If equipped, press to play a CDwhen a portable audio device isplaying. Press again and the systembegins playing audio from theconnected portable audio player. If aportable audio player is notconnected, “No Input Device Found”displays.

SRCE (Source) : If equipped, pressto listen to the radio when a portableaudio device is playing. Theportable audio device continuesplaying.

Press to play a CD when a portableaudio device is playing. Press againand the system begins playingaudio from the connected portableaudio player. If a portable audioplayer is not connected, “No InputDevice Found” displays.

Using the USB Port

Radios with a USB port can controla USB storage device or an iPod®

using the radio buttons and knobs.See “Playing an MP3” in CD Player0 139 for information about how toconnect and control a USB storagedevice or an iPod.

USB Support

If equipped, the USB port is on theinstrument panel and uses theUSB 2.0 standard.

USB-Supported Devices

. USB flash drive

. Portable USB hard drive

. Fifth generation or later iPod

. iPod nano®

. iPod touch®

. iPod classic®

Not all iPods and USB drives arecompatible with the USB port.

Make sure the iPod has the latestfirmware from Apple® for properoperation. iPod firmware can beupdated using the latest iTunes®

application. See www.apple.com/itunes.

For help with identifying the iPod, goto www.apple.com/support.

Radios that have a USB port canplay .mp3 and .wma files that arestored on a USB storage device aswell as AAC files that are stored onan iPod.

USB-Supported File and FolderStructure

The radio supports:

. Up to 700 folders.

. Up to eight folders in depth.

. Up to 65,535 files.



. Folder and file names up to64 bytes.

. Files with an .mp3 or .wma fileextension.

. AAC files stored on an iPod.

. FAT16.

. FAT32.

Connecting a USB StorageDevice or iPod

The USB port can be used tocontrol an iPod or a USB storagedevice.

To connect a USB storage device,connect the device to the USB porton the instrument panel.

To connect an iPod, connect oneend of the USB cable that camewith the iPod to the iPod’s dockconnector and connect the otherend to the USB port on theinstrument panel. If the vehicle is onand the USB connection works, “OKto disconnect” and a GM logo mayappear on the iPod, and iPodappears on the radio display. TheiPod music appears on the radiodisplay and begins playing.

The iPod charges while it isconnected to the vehicle if thevehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORYor ON/RUN position. When thevehicle is turned off, the iPodautomatically powers off and will notcharge or draw power from thevehicle's battery.

If you have an older iPod model thatis not supported, it can still be usedby connecting it to the auxiliaryinput jack using a standard 3.5 mm(1/8 in) stereo cable. See “Using theAuxiliary Input Jack” previously inthis section.

Using the Radio to Control aUSB Storage Device or iPod

The radio can control a USBstorage device or an iPod using theradio buttons and knobs, anddisplay song information on theradio display.

f (Tune) : Turn to select files.

© SEEK : Press to go to the start ofthe track, if more than 10 secondshave played. Press and hold orpress multiple times to continuemoving backward through tracks.

¨ SEEK : Press to go to the nexttrack. Press and hold or pressmultiple times to continue movingforward through tracks.

s REV (Reverse) : Press and holdto reverse playback quickly. Soundis heard at a reduced volume.Releases REV to resume playing.The elapsed time of the filedisplays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward) : Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly. Sound is heard at a reducedvolume. Release\ FWD toresume playing. The elapsed time ofthe file displays.

4 (Information) : Press to displayadditional information about theselected track.



Using Softkeys to Control aUSB Storage Device or iPod

The five softkeys below the radiodisplay are used to control thefunctions listed below.

To use the softkeys:

1. Press the first or fifth softkeybelow the radio display todisplay the functions listedbelow, or press the softkeybelow the function if it iscurrently displayed.

2. Press the softkey below the tabwith the function on it to usethat function.

j (Pause) : Press the softkeybelow j to pause the track. The tabappears raised when pause is beingused. Press the softkey below jagain to resume playback.

Back : Press the softkey below theBack tab to go back to the maindisplay screen on an iPod, or theroot directory on a USB storagedevice.

c (Folder View) : Press thesoftkey belowc to view thecontents of the current folder on theUSB drive. To browse and selectfiles:

1. Press the softkey belowc.

2. Turn f to scroll through the listof folders.

3. Press f to select the desiredfolder. If there is more then onefolder, repeat Steps 1 and 2until the desired folder isreached.

4. Turn f to scroll through thefiles in the selected folder.

5. Press f to select the desiredfile to be played.

To skip through large lists, the fivesoftkeys can be used to navigate inthe following order:

. First softkey, first item in the list.

. Second softkey, 1% through thelist each time the softkey ispressed.

. Third softkey, 5% through the listeach time the softkey is pressed.

. Fourth softkey, 10% through thelist each time the softkey ispressed.

. Fifth softkey, end of the list.

h (Music Navigator) : Press thesoftkey belowh to view andselect a file on an iPod, using theiPod's menu system. Files aresorted by:

. Playlists

. Artists

. Albums

. Genres

. Songs

. Composers

To select files:

1. Press the softkey belowh.

2. Turn f to scroll through the listof menus.

3. Press f to select thedesired menu.



4. Turn f to scroll through thefolders or files in theselected menu.

5. Press f to select the desiredfile to be played.

To skip through large lists, the fivesoftkeys can be used to navigate inthe following order:

. First softkey, first item in the list.

. Second softkey, 1% through thelist each time the softkey ispressed.

. Third softkey, 5% through the listeach time the softkey is pressed.

. Fourth softkey, 10% through thelist each time the softkey ispressed.

. Fifth softkey, end of the list.

Repeat Functionality

To use Repeat:

Press the softkey below" or'to select between Repeat All andRepeat Track.

" (Repeat All) : Press the softkeybelow" to repeat all tracks. Thetab appears lowered when RepeatAll is being used. This is the defaultmode when a USB storage deviceor iPod is first connected.

' (Repeat Track) : Press thesoftkey below' to repeat onetrack. The tab appears raised whenRepeat Track is being used.

Shuffle Functionality

To use Shuffle:

Press the softkey below>,2,C , or= to select betweenShuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs/Shuffle Songs, Shuffle Album,or Shuffle Folder.

> (Shuffle Off) : Press thesoftkey below2 to turn shuffleoff. This is the default mode when aUSB storage device or iPod is firstconnected.

2 (Shuffle All Songs/ShuffleSongs) : Press the softkeybelow= orC to shuffle allsongs on the USB storage deviceor iPod.

C (Shuffle Album) : Press thesoftkey below> to shuffle allsongs in the current album onan iPod.

= (Shuffle Folder) : Press thesoftkey below> to shuffle allsongs in the current folder on a USBstorage device.



OnStar SystemOnStar® with 4G LTE

If equipped with OnStar 4G LTE, upto seven devices, such assmartphones, tablets, and laptops,can be connected to high-speedInternet through the vehicle’s built-inWi-Fi hotspot.

Call 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) to connect to anOnStar Advisor for assistance. Seewww.onstar.com for a detailedinstruction guide, vehicle availability,details, and system limitations.Services and apps vary by make,model, year, carrier, availability, andconditions. 4G LTE service isavailable in select markets. 4G LTEperformance is based on industryaverages and vehicle systemsdesign. Some services require adata plan.

Phone

BluetoothFor vehicles equipped withBluetooth capability, the system caninteract with many cell phones,allowing:

. Placement and receipt of calls ina hands-free mode.

. Sharing of the cell phone’saddress book or contact list withthe vehicle.

To minimize driver distraction,before driving, and with the vehicleparked:

. Become familiar with thefeatures of the cell phone.Organize the phone book andcontact lists clearly and deleteduplicate or rarely used entries.If possible, program speed dialor other shortcuts.

. Review the controls andoperation of the infotainmentsystem.



. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.The system may not work withall cell phones. See “Pairing” inthis section for more information.

. If the cell phone has voicedialing capability, learn to usethat feature to access theaddress book or contact list. See“Voice Pass-Thru” in this sectionfor more information.

. See “Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers” in this section formore information.

{ Warning

When using a cell phone, it canbe distracting to look too long ortoo often at the screen of thephone or the infotainment system.Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often could cause acrash resulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.

A Bluetooth system can use aBluetooth-capable cell phone with aHands-Free Profile to make andreceive phone calls. The system

can be used while the key is in theON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORYposition. The range of the Bluetoothsystem can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft).Not all phones support all functions,and not all phones work with thein-vehicle Bluetooth system. Seewww.gm.com/bluetooth for moreinformation on compatible phones.

Voice Recognition

The Bluetooth system uses voicerecognition to interpret voicecommands to dial phone numbersand name tags.

For additional information, say“Help” while you are in a voicerecognition menu.

Noise : Keep interior noise levels toa minimum. The system may notrecognize voice commands if thereis too much background noise.

When to Speak : A short tonesounds after the system respondsindicating when it is waiting for avoice command. Wait until the toneand then speak.

How to Speak : Speak clearly in acalm and natural voice.

Audio System

When using the in-vehicle Bluetoothsystem, sound comes through thevehicle's front audio systemspeakers and overrides the audiosystem. Use the audio systemvolume knob, during a call, tochange the volume level. Theadjusted volume level remains inmemory for later calls. To preventmissed calls, a minimum volumelevel is used if the volume is turneddown too low.

Bluetooth Controls

Use the buttons on the steeringwheel to operate the in-vehicleBluetooth system. See SteeringWheel Controls 0 86.

b / g (Push to Talk) : Press toanswer incoming calls, confirmsystem information, and startspeech recognition.

c /x (End) : Press to end a call,reject a call, or cancel an operation.



Pairing

A Bluetooth-enabled cell phonemust be paired to the Bluetoothsystem and then connected to thevehicle before it can be used. Seethe cell phone manufacturer's userguide for Bluetooth functions beforepairing the cell phone. If a Bluetoothphone is not connected, calls will bemade using OnStar Hands-FreeCalling, if equipped. See OnStar,if equipped.

Pairing Information

. A Bluetooth phone with MP3capability cannot be paired tothe vehicle as a phone and anMP3 player at the same time.

. Up to five cell phones can bepaired to the Bluetooth system.

. The pairing process is disabledwhen the vehicle is moving.

. Pairing only needs to becompleted once, unless thepairing information on the cellphone changes or the cell phoneis deleted from the system.

. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time.

. If multiple paired cell phones arewithin range of the system, thesystem connects to the firstavailable paired cell phone in theorder that they were first pairedto the system. To connect to adifferent paired phone, see“Connecting to a DifferentPhone” later in this section.

Pairing a Phone

1. Press and hold b / g fortwo seconds.

2. Say “Bluetooth.” This commandcan be skipped.

3. Say “Pair.” The systemresponds with instructions anda four-digit PersonalIdentification Number (PIN).The PIN is used in Step 5.

4. Start the pairing process on thecell phone that you want topair. For help with this process,see the cell phonemanufacturer's user guide.

5. Locate the device named “YourVehicle” in the list on the cellphone. Follow the instructionson the cell phone to enter thePIN provided in Step 3. Afterthe PIN is successfully entered,the system prompts you toprovide a name for the pairedcell phone. This name will beused to indicate which phonesare paired and connected tothe vehicle. The systemresponds with “<phone name>has been successfully paired”after the pairing process iscomplete.

6. Repeat Steps 1–5 to pairadditional phones.

Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones

The system can list all cell phonespaired to it. If a paired cell phone isalso connected to the vehicle, thesystem responds with “is connected”after that phone name.


2. Say “Bluetooth.”



3. Say “List.”

Deleting a Paired Phone

If the phone name you want todelete is unknown, see “Listing AllPaired and Connected Phones.”



3. Say “Delete.” The system askswhich phone to delete.

4. Say the name of the phone youwant to delete.

Connecting to a Different Phone

To connect to a different cell phone,the Bluetooth system looks for thenext available cell phone in theorder in which all the available cellphones were paired. Depending onwhich cell phone you want toconnect to, you may have to usethis command several times.



3. Say “Change phone.”

. If another cell phone isfound, the response will be“<Phone name> is nowconnected.”

. If another cell phone is notfound, the original phoneremains connected.

Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers

The system can store up to 30phone numbers as name tags in theHands-Free Directory that is sharedbetween the Bluetooth and OnStarsystems, if equipped.

The following commands are usedto delete and store phone numbers.

Store : This command will store aphone number, or a group ofnumbers as a name tag.

Digit Store : This command allowsa phone number to be stored as aname tag by entering the digits oneat a time.

Delete : This command is used todelete individual name tags.

Delete All Name Tags : Thiscommand deletes all stored nametags in the Hands-Free CallingDirectory and the OnStarTurn-by-Turn Destinations Directory,if equipped.

Using the “Store” Command


2. Say “Store.”

3. Say the phone number orgroup of numbers you want tostore all at once with nopauses, then follow thedirections given by the systemto save a name tag for thisnumber.

Using the “Digit Store” Command

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear the lastnumber.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.




2. Say “Digit Store.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to store. Aftereach digit is entered, thesystem repeats back the digit itheard followed by a tone. Afterthe last digit has been entered,say “Store,” and then follow thedirections given by the systemto save a name tag for thisnumber.

Using the “Delete” Command


2. Say “Delete.”

3. Say the name tag you want todelete.

Using the “Delete All Name Tags”Command

This command deletes all storedname tags in the Hands-FreeCalling Directory and the OnStarTurn-by-Turn Destinations Directory,if equipped.

To delete all name tags:


2. Say “Delete all name tags.”

Listing Stored Numbers

The list command will list all storednumbers and name tags.

Using the “List” Command


2. Say “Directory.”

3. Say “Hands-Free Calling.”

4. Say “List.”

Making a Call

Calls can be made using thefollowing commands.

Dial or Call : The dial or callcommand can be usedinterchangeably to dial a phonenumber or a stored name tag.

Digit Dial : This command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.

Re-dial : This command is used todial the last number used on the cellphone.

Using the “Dial” or “Call”Command


2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing, or say the name tag.

Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.

Calling 911 Emergency



3. Say “911.”





Using the “Digit Dial” Command

The digit dial command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.After each digit is entered, thesystem repeats back the digit itheard followed by a tone.

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear the lastnumber.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Dial.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to dial. Aftereach digit is entered, thesystem repeats back the digit itheard followed by a tone. Afterthe last digit has been entered,say “Dial.”


Using the “Re-dial” Command


2. After the tone, say “Re-dial.”


Receiving a Call

When an incoming call is received,the audio system mutes and a ringtone is heard in the vehicle.

. Press b / g to answer the call.

. Pressc /x to ignore a call.

Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe cell phone and enabled by thewireless service carrier.

. Press b / g to answer anincoming call when another callis active. The original call isplaced on hold.

. Press b / g again to return tothe original call.

. To ignore the incoming call, noaction is required.

. Pressc /x to disconnect thecurrent call and switch to the callon hold.

Three-Way Calling

Three-way calling must besupported on the cell phone andenabled by the wireless servicecarrier.

1. While on a call, press b / g.2. Say “Three-way call.”

3. Use the dial or call commandto dial the number of the thirdparty to be called.

4. Once the call is connected,press b / g to link all callerstogether.

Ending a Call

Pressc /x to end a call.



Muting a Call

During a call, all sounds from insidethe vehicle can be muted so that theperson on the other end of the callcannot hear them.

. To mute a call, press b / g , andthen say “Mute call.”

. To cancel mute, press b / g ,and then say “Un-mute call.”

Transferring a Call

Audio can be transferred betweenthe Bluetooth system and the cellphone.

The cell phone must be paired andconnected with the Bluetoothsystem before a call can betransferred. The connection processcan take up to two minutes after theignition is turned to ON/RUN.

Transferring Audio from theBluetooth System to a Cell Phone

During a call with the audio in thevehicle:

1. Press b / g.2. Say “Transfer Call.”

Transferring Audio to theBluetooth System from a CellPhone

During a call with the audio on thecell phone, press b / g. The audiotransfers to the vehicle. If the audiodoes not transfer to the vehicle, usethe audio transfer feature on the cellphone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide for moreinformation.

Voice Pass-Thru

Voice pass-thru allows access to thevoice recognition commands on thecell phone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide to see ifthe cell phone supports this feature.

To access contacts stored in the cellphone:


2. Say “Bluetooth.” This commandcan be skipped.

3. Say “Voice.” The systemresponds “OK, accessing<phone name>.”

The cell phone's normal promptmessages will go through their cycleaccording to the phone's operatinginstructions.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) Tones

The Bluetooth system can sendnumbers and the numbers stored asname tags during a call. You canuse this feature when calling amenu-driven phone system.Account numbers can also bestored for use.

Sending a Number or Name TagDuring a Call

1. Press b / g. The systemresponds “Ready,” followed bya tone.

2. Say “Dial.”

3. Say the number or name tagto send.

Clearing the System

Unless information is deleted out ofthe in-vehicle Bluetooth system, itwill be retained indefinitely. Thisincludes all saved name tags in the



phone book and phone pairinginformation. For information on howto delete this information, see theprevious section “Deleting a PairedPhone” and the previous sectionson deleting name tags.

Other Information

The Bluetooth® word mark andlogos are owned by the Bluetooth®

SIG, Inc. and any use of such marksby General Motors is under license.Other trademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.

See Radio Frequency Statement0 320.


Climate Controls 157

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsClimate Control Systems . . . . . 157Rear Heating System . . . . . . . . . 159Rear Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Climate Control SystemsThe heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled withthis system.

Vehicles without Air Conditioning

1. Fan Control



9 (Fan Control) : Turn the knobclockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the fan speed.

9 (Off) : Turns the system off.

Temperature Control : Turn theknob clockwise or counterclockwiseto increase or decrease thetemperature inside the vehicle.

Air Delivery Mode Control : Turnthe knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to change thecurrent airflow mode.

H (Vent) : Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.


158 Climate Controls

) (Bi-Level) : Air is dividedbetween the instrument panel andfloor outlets, with some air directedtoward the windshield.

6 (Floor) : Air is directed to thefloor outlets with some air directedto the windshield and side windows.

- (Defog) : This mode clears thewindows of fog or moisture. Outsideair is directed to the floor anddefroster outlets. Adjust thetemperature knob for warmer orcooler air. The air conditioningcompressor might turn on in thissetting to dehumidify the air.

1 (Defrost) : This mode clears thewindshield of fog or frost morequickly. Air is directed to thewindshield, with some to the flooroutlets and front side windows. Theair conditioning compressor mightturn on in this setting to dehumidifythe air.

Do not drive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.

Vehicles with Air Conditioning

1. Fan Control



4. Rear Window Defogger

On hot days, open the windows tolet hot inside air escape; then closethem. This helps to reduce the timeneeded for the vehicle to cool downand the system operates moreefficiently.

# (Air Conditioning) : Cools anddehumidifies the air inside of thevehicle.

V (Maximum Air Conditioning) :Cools the air inside the vehiclefaster, by recirculating the inside air.

Rear Window Defogger

If equipped with a rear windowdefogger, a warming grid is used toremove fog or frost from the rearwindow.

1 (Rear Window Defogger) :Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off. An indicator lighton the button comes on to show thatthe rear window defogger is on.



The defogger only works when theignition is in ON/RUN. The defoggerturns off if the ignition is in the ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFFposition.

Do not drive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.

Caution

Do not use a razor blade or sharpobject to clear the inside rearwindow. Do not adhere anythingto the defogger grid lines in therear glass. These actions maydamage the rear defogger.Repairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Rear Heating SystemIf equipped, the rear heating systemlets you adjust the amount of airflowing into the rear of the vehicle,from the front seating area. Thisfeature works with the main climatecontrol system in the vehicle.

AUX : The thumbwheel for thissystem is on the instrument panelbelow the audio system.

9 (Fan) : Turn the thumbwheel upor down to increase or decrease theamount of heated air sent to therear seating area.

Q (High) : This position supplies themost amount of heat to the rearseating area.

c (Medium) : This positionsupplies half the amount of heat tothe rear seating area.

R (Low) : This position supplies theleast amount of heat to the rearseating area.

9 (Off) : This turns the rearheating system off.

Rear Climate ControlSystemIf equipped with a rear heating andair conditioning system, it controlsthe temperature, fan speed, and airdelivery for the rear seatpassengers only. The front climatecontrol panel is in the overheadconsole between the driver andfront passenger.



Front Climate Control Panel

1. Fan Control



Use this control panel to maintain aseparate temperature setting. Adjustthe direction of the airflow or adjustthe fan speed for the rear seatpassenger(s).

When the fan knob is in the AUXposition, the rear climate controlpanel can be used to adjust theclimate settings in the rearseating area.



Rear Climate Control Panel

1. Fan Control



For vehicles with a rear climatecontrol panel, it is located overheadbehind the driver and frontpassenger, centered in front of thesecond row. To adjust the rearclimate control panel settings by arear seat passenger, the frontclimate control panel fan knob mustbe in the AUX position. The fanspeed, air delivery mode, andtemperature can then be adjusted.

AUX (Auxiliary) : Turn the fan knobon the front climate control panel toAUX to let rear seat passengers usethe control panel in the rear seatingarea. This disables the front controlpanel. To return control to the frontpanel, move the fan knob outof AUX.

9 (Off) : Turns the system off.

9 (Fan Control) : Turn clockwiseor counterclockwise to increase ordecrease the fan speed in the rearseating area.

Temperature Control : Turnclockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease thetemperature in the rearseating area.

The air conditioning system on themain climate control panel must beturned on to direct cooled air to therear of the vehicle. If it is not on,then the temperature in the rear ofthe vehicle remains at cabintemperature.

Air Delivery Mode Control : Turnclockwise or counterclockwise tochange the direction of the airflow inthe rear seating area.

To change the current mode, selectone of the following:

H (Vent) : Air is directed to theupper outlets, with some directed tothe floor outlets.

2 (Floor) : Air is directed to thefloor outlets.

Be sure to keep the area under thefront seats clear of any objects sothat the air inside of the vehicle cancirculate effectively.



For information on how to use themain climate control system, seeClimate Control Systems 0 157. Forinformation on ventilation, see AirVents 0 162.

Air VentsUse the outlets located near thecenter and on the sides of theinstrument panel to change thedirection of airflow.

Operation Tips. Clear away any ice, snow or

leaves from the air inlets at thebase of the windshield that mayblock the flow of air into thevehicle.

. Use of non-GM approved hooddeflectors may adversely affectthe performance of the system.

. Keep the path under the frontseats clear of objects to helpcirculate the air inside of thevehicle more effectively.


Driving and Operating 163

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDistracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 165Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . 166Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . 167Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . 168Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . 169Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . 174Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . 176Fast Idle System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Parking over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . . 182Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

BrakesAntilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Ride Control SystemsTraction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Driver Assistance SystemsRear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . 193Parking Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

FuelFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

California FuelRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 198Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198E85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Trailer TowingGeneral TowingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211


164 Driving and Operating

Driving Information

Distracted DrivingDistraction comes in many formsand can take your focus from thetask of driving. Exercise goodjudgment and do not let otheractivities divert your attention awayfrom the road. Many localgovernments have enacted lawsregarding driver distraction. Becomefamiliar with the local laws inyour area.

To avoid distracted driving, alwayskeep your eyes on the road, handson the wheel, and mind on the drive.

. Do not use a phone indemanding driving situations.Use a hands-free method toplace or receive necessaryphone calls.

. Watch the road. Do not read,take notes, or look upinformation on phones or otherelectronic devices.

. Designate a front seatpassenger to handle potentialdistractions.

. Become familiar with vehiclefeatures before driving, such asprogramming favorite radiostations and adjusting climatecontrol and seat settings.Program all trip information intoany navigation device prior todriving.

. Wait until the vehicle is parkedto retrieve items that have fallento the floor.

. Stop or park the vehicle to tendto children.

. Keep pets in an appropriatecarrier or restraint.

. Avoid stressful conversationswhile driving, whether with apassenger or on a cell phone.

{ Warning

Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often could cause acrash resulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.

Refer to the infotainment section formore information on using thatsystem and the navigation system,if equipped, including pairing andusing a cell phone.

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The firststep in driving defensively is to wearthe safety belt. See Safety Belts0 45.

. Assume that other road users(pedestrians, bicyclists, andother drivers) are going to becareless and make mistakes.Anticipate what they might doand be ready.

. Allow enough following distancebetween you and the driver infront of you.

. Focus on the task of driving.

Drunk DrivingDeath and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.



{ Warning

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by evena small amount of alcohol. Youcan have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking.

Do not drink and drive or ride witha driver who has been drinking.Ride home in a cab; or if you arewith a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.

Control of a VehicleBraking, steering, and acceleratingare important factors in helping tocontrol a vehicle while driving.

BrakingBraking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Deciding topush the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it isreaction time.

Average driver reaction time isabout three-quarters of a second. Inthat time, a vehicle moving at100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m(66 ft), which could be a lot ofdistance in an emergency.

Helpful braking tips to keep in mindinclude:

. Keep enough distance betweenyou and the vehicle in frontof you.

. Avoid needless heavy braking.

. Keep pace with traffic.

If the engine ever stops while thevehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump thebrakes. Doing so could make thepedal harder to push down. If theengine stops, there will be somepower brake assist but it will beused when the brake is applied.Once the power assist is used up, itcan take longer to stop and thebrake pedal will be harder to push.

Steering

Hydraulic Power Steering

Your vehicle has hydraulic powersteering. It may requiremaintenance. See Power SteeringFluid 0 230.

If power steering assist is lostbecause the engine stops orbecause of a system malfunction,the vehicle can be steered but mayrequired increased effort. See yourdealer if there is a problem.

Caution

If the steering wheel is turneduntil it reaches the end of itstravel, and is held in that positionfor more than 15 seconds,damage may occur to the powersteering system and there may beloss of power steering assist.

Curve Tips. Take curves at a reasonable

speed.



. Reduce speed before entering acurve.

. Maintain a reasonable steadyspeed through the curve

. Wait until the vehicle is out ofthe curve before acceleratinggently into the straightaway.

Steering in Emergencies. There are some situations when

steering around a problem maybe more effective than braking.

. Holding both sides of thesteering wheel allows you to turn180 degrees without removinga hand.

. Antilock Brake System (ABS)allows steering while braking.

Off-Road Recovery

The vehicle's right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving. Followthese tips:

1. Ease off the accelerator andthen, if there is nothing in theway, steer the vehicle so that itstraddles the edge of thepavement.

2. Turn the steering wheel aboutone-eighth of a turn, until theright front tire contacts thepavement edge.

3. Turn the steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.

Loss of Control

Skidding

There are three types of skids thatcorrespond to the vehicle's threecontrol systems:

. Braking Skid — wheels are notrolling.

. Steering or Cornering Skid —too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip andlose cornering force.

. Acceleration Skid — too muchthrottle causes the drivingwheels to spin.

Defensive drivers avoid most skidsby taking reasonable care suited toexisting conditions, and by notoverdriving those conditions. Butskids are always possible.

If the vehicle starts to slide, followthese suggestions:

. Ease your foot off theaccelerator pedal and steer theway you want the vehicle to go.



The vehicle may straighten out.Be ready for a second skid if itoccurs.

. Slow down and adjust yourdriving according to weatherconditions. Stopping distancecan be longer and vehiclecontrol can be affected whentraction is reduced by water,snow, ice, gravel, or othermaterial on the road. Learn torecognize warning clues — suchas enough water, ice, or packedsnow on the road to make amirrored surface — and slowdown when you have any doubt.

. Try to avoid sudden steering,acceleration, or braking,including reducing vehicle speedby shifting to a lower gear. Anysudden changes could causethe tires to slide.

Remember: Antilock brakes helpavoid only the braking skid.

Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep-standing or flowing water.

{ Warning

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well in aquick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause thevehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicle

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

occupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under the vehicle'stires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road iswet enough and you are going fastenough. When the vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:

. Allow extra following distance.

. Pass with caution.

. Keep windshield wipingequipment in good shape.



. Keep the windshield washer fluidreservoir filled.

. Have good tires with propertread depth. See Tires 0 250.

. Turn off cruise control.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips include:

. Keep the vehicle serviced and ingood shape.

. Check all fluid levels and brakes,tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Shift to a lower gear when goingdown steep or long hills.

{ Warning

Using the brakes to slow thevehicle on a long downhill slopecan cause brake overheating, canreduce brake performance, andcould result in a loss of braking.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Shift the transmission to a lowergear to let the engine assist thebrakes on a steep downhill slope.

{ Warning

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. This can causeoverheating of the brakes andloss of steering. Always have theengine running and the vehiclein gear.

. Drive at speeds that keep thevehicle in its own lane. Do notswing wide or cross thecenter line.

. Be alert on top of hills;something could be in your lane(e.g., stalled car, accident).

. Pay attention to special roadsigns (e.g., falling rocks area,winding roads, long grades,passing or no-passing zones)and take appropriate action.

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Snow or ice between the tires andthe road creates less traction orgrip, so drive carefully. Wet ice canoccur at about 0 °C (32 °F) whenfreezing rain begins to fall. Avoiddriving on wet ice or in freezing rainuntil roads can be treated.

For slippery road driving:

. Accelerate gently. Acceleratingtoo quickly causes the wheels tospin and makes the surfaceunder the tires slick.

. Turn on Traction Control. SeeTraction Control/ElectronicStability Control 0 188.

. Antilock Brake System (ABS)improves vehicle stability duringhard stops, but the brakesshould be applied sooner than



when on dry pavement. SeeAntilock Brake System (ABS)0 187.

. Allow greater following distanceand watch for slippery spots. Icypatches can occur on otherwiseclear roads in shaded areas.The surface of a curve or anoverpass can remain icy whenthe surrounding roads are clear.Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking whileon ice.

. Turn off cruise control.

Blizzard Conditions

Stay with the vehicle unless there ishelp nearby. If possible, useRoadside Assistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program 0 314. To gethelp and keep everyone in thevehicle safe:


. Tie a red cloth to an outsidemirror.

{ Warning

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This maycause exhaust gases to getinside. Engine exhaust containscarbon monoxide (CO), whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

If the vehicle is stuck in snow:

. Clear snow from the base ofthe vehicle, especially anyblocking the exhaust pipe.

. Open a window about 5 cm(2 in) on the vehicle sidethat is away from the wind,to bring in fresh air.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to circulate the airinside the vehicle and set

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

the fan speed to the highestsetting. See “ClimateControl Systems.”

For more information about CO,see Engine Exhaust 0 181.

To save fuel, run the engine forshort periods to warm the vehicleand then shut the engine off andpartially close the window. Movingabout to keep warm also helps.

If it takes time for help to arrive,when running the engine, push theaccelerator pedal slightly so theengine runs faster than the idlespeed. This keeps the batterycharged to restart the vehicle and tosignal for help with the headlamps.Do this as little as possible, tosave fuel.

If the Vehicle Is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.



If stuck too severely for the tractionsystem to free the vehicle, turn thetraction system off and use therocking method. See TractionControl/Electronic Stability Control0 188.

{ Warning

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and youor others could be injured. Thevehicle can overheat, causing anengine compartment fire or otherdamage. Spin the wheels as littleas possible and avoid goingabove 56 km/h (35 mph).

Rocking the Vehicle to Getit Out

Turn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area around thefront wheels. Turn off any tractionsystem. Shift back and forthbetween R (Reverse) and a lowforward gear, spinning the wheelsas little as possible. To preventtransmission wear, wait until thewheels stop spinning before shifting

gears. Release the acceleratorpedal while shifting, and presslightly on the accelerator pedalwhen the transmission is in gear.Slowly spinning the wheels in theforward and reverse directionscauses a rocking motion that couldfree the vehicle. If that does not getthe vehicle out after a few tries, itmight need to be towed out. If thevehicle does need to be towed out,see Towing the Vehicle 0 283.

Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know howmuch weight the vehicle cancarry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight andincludes the weight of alloccupants, cargo, and allnonfactory-installed options.Two labels on the vehicle mayshow how much weight it wasdesigned to carry, the Tire andLoading Information label andthe Certification/Tire label.

{ Warning

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoreduce stopping distance,damage the tires, and shortenthe life of the vehicle.



Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Label Example

A vehicle specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the center pillar(B-pillar). The tire and loadinginformation label shows thenumber of occupant seatingpositions (1), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (2) inkilograms and pounds.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label also shows thesize of the original equipmenttires (3) and the recommended

cold tire inflation pressures (4).For more information on tiresand inflation see Tires 0 250and Tire Pressure 0 258.

There is also important loadinginformation on the vehicleCertification/Tire label. It mayshow the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR) and the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR) forthe front and rear axle. See“Certification/Tire Label” later inthis section.

“Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit–

1. Locate the statement "Thecombined weight ofoccupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs." on your vehicle’splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will beriding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kg orXXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount ofcargo and luggage loadcapacity. For example, if the"XXX" amount equals1400 lbs. and there will befive 150 lb passengers inyour vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggageload capacity is 650 lbs.(1400-750 (5 x 150) =650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, load from yourtrailer will be transferred to



your vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine howthis reduces the availablecargo and luggage loadcapacity of your vehicle.”

See Trailer Towing 0 204 forimportant information on towing atrailer, towing safety rules andtrailering tips.

Example 1

1. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 1 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs)

2. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 =136 kg (300 lbs)

3. Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 317 kg(700 lbs)

Example 2

A. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 2 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs)

B. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 136 kg(750 lbs)

C. Available Cargo Weight =113 kg (250 lbs)

Example 3

1. Maximum Vehicle CapacityWeight for Example 3 =453 kg (1,000 lbs)

2. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 =453 kg (1,000 lbs)

3. Available Cargo Weight =0 kg (0 lbs)

Refer to the vehicle tire andloading information label forspecific information about thevehicle's capacity weight andseating positions. The combined



weight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceedthe vehicle capacity weight.

Certification/Tire Label

A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is attached to thecenter pillar (B-pillar). The labelmay show the size of thevehicle's original tires and theinflation pressures needed toobtain the gross weight capacityof the vehicle. This is calledGross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR). The GVWR includesthe weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, fuel, and cargo.

The Certification/Tire label alsomay show the maximum weightsfor the front and rear axles,called Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR). To find out the actualloads on the front and rearaxles, you need to go to a weighstation and weigh the vehicle.Your dealer can help you withthis. Be sure to spread out theload equally on both sides of thecenterline.

{ Warning

Things you put inside thevehicle can strike and injurepeople in a sudden stop orturn, or in a crash.

. Put things in the cargoarea of the vehicle. Try tospread the weight evenly.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

. Do not leave anunsecured child restraintin the vehicle.

. When you carrysomething inside thevehicle, secure itwhenever you can.

. Do not leave a seatfolded down unless youneed to.

Add-On Equipment

When carrying removable items,a limit on how many peoplecarried inside the vehicle maybe necessary. Be sure to weighthe vehicle before buying andinstalling the new equipment.



Starting andOperating

New Vehicle Break-In

Caution

The vehicle does not need anelaborate break-in. But it willperform better in the long run ifyou follow these guidelines:

. Keep the vehicle speed at88 km/h (55 mph) or less forthe first 805 km (500mi).

. Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast or slow,for the first 805 km (500 mi).Do not make full-throttlestarts. Avoid downshifting tobrake or slow the vehicle.

. Avoid making hard stops forthe first 322 km (200mi) orso. During this time the newbrake linings are not yetbroken in. Hard stops withnew linings can mean

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

premature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow thisbreaking-in guideline everytime you get new brakelinings.

. Do not tow a trailer duringbreak-in. See Trailer Towing0 204 for the trailer towingcapabilities of the vehicleand more information.

Following break-in, engine speedand load can be graduallyincreased.

Ignition Positions

The ignition switch has four differentpositions.

To shift out of P (Park), the ignitionmust be in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brakepedal applied.

0 (STOPPING THE ENGINE/LOCK/OFF) : When the vehicle is stopped,turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF to turn the engine off. RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) will remainactive. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) 0 179.



This position locks the ignition andtransmission.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems and disablethe airbags.

If the vehicle must be shut off in anemergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).This can be done while thevehicle is moving. After shiftingto N (Neutral), firmly apply thebrakes and steer the vehicle toa safe location.

3. Come to a complete stop, shiftto P (Park), and turn theignition to LOCK/OFF. Onvehicles with an automatictransmission, the shift levermust be in P (Park) to turn theignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position.

4. Set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake 0 187.

{ Warning

Turning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassist in the brake and steeringsystems and disable the airbags.While driving, only shut thevehicle off in an emergency.

If the vehicle cannot be pulled over,and must be shut off while driving,turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.

Caution

Using a tool to force the key toturn in the ignition could causedamage to the switch or break thekey. Use the correct key, makesure it is all the way in, and turn itonly with your hand. If the keycannot be turned by hand, seeyour dealer.

1 (ACC/ACCESSORY) : This is theposition in which you can operatethings like the radio and thewindshield wipers when the engineis off.

2 (ON/RUN) : This position can beused to operate the electricalaccessories and to display someinstrument cluster warning andindicator lights. This position canalso be used for service anddiagnostics, and to verify the properoperation of the malfunctionindicator lamp as may be requiredfor emission inspection purposes.The switch stays in this positionwhen the engine is running.

If you leave the key in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN positionwith the engine off, the battery couldbe drained. You may not be able tostart the vehicle if the battery isallowed to drain for an extendedperiod of time.

3 (START) : This is the position thatstarts the engine. When the enginestarts, release the key. The ignitionswitch returns to ON/RUN fordriving.



A warning tone will sound when thedriver door is opened, the ignition isin ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFFand the key is in the ignition.

Starting the EngineIf the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax dieselsupplement.

To place the transmission in theproper gear:

Move the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). The engine will not startin any other position. To restart theengine when the vehicle is alreadymoving, use N (Neutral) only.

Caution

If you add electrical parts oraccessories, you could changethe way the engine operates. Anyresulting damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.See Add-On Electrical Equipment0 211.

Caution

Do not try to shift to P (Park) if thevehicle is moving. If you do, youcould damage the transmission.Shift to P (Park) only when thevehicle is stopped.

Caution

If the steering wheel is turneduntil it reaches the end of itstravel, and is held in that positionwhile starting the vehicle, damagemay occur to the hydraulic powersteering system and there may beloss of power steering assist.

Starting Procedure

1. With your foot off theaccelerator pedal, turn theignition key to START. Whenthe engine starts, let go of thekey. The idle speed will godown as your engine getswarm. Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.

Operate the engine andtransmission gently to allow theoil to warm up and lubricate allmoving parts.

When the Low Fuel warninglamp is on and the FUELLEVEL LOW message isdisplayed in the DriverInformation Center (DIC), theComputer-Controlled CrankingSystem is disabled to preventpossible vehicle componentdamage. When this happens,hold the ignition switch in theSTART position to continueengine cranking.

Caution

Cranking the engine for longperiods of time, by returning theignition to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.



2. If the engine does not startafter 5-10 seconds, especiallyin very cold weather (below−18 °C or 0 °F), it could beflooded with too muchgasoline. Try pushing theaccelerator pedal all the way tothe floor and holding it there asyou hold the key in START forup to 15 seconds. Wait at least15 seconds between each try,to allow the cranking motor tocool down. When the enginestarts, let go of the key andaccelerator. If the vehicle startsbriefly but then stops again, dothe same thing. This clears theextra gasoline from the engine.Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.Operate the engine andtransmission gently until the oilwarms up and lubricates allmoving parts.

Fast Idle SystemIf equipped, this feature is availableonly with cruise control. The manualfast idle switch is operated using thecruise control buttons on the leftside of the steering wheel.

This system can be used toincrease engine idle speedwhenever the following conditionsare met:

. The parking brake is set.

. The brake pedal is not pressed.

. The vehicle must not be movingand the accelerator must not bepressed.

To control the fast idle:

. To enable the Fast Idle System,press and release the cruisecontrol on/off button and ensurethat the switch indicator lightis lit.

. Press and release the cruisecontrol SET- button. Enginespeed will be held atapproximately 1200 rpm.

When the fast idle is active, theDriver Information Center (DIC) willdisplay FAST IDLE ON.

One of the following actions will turnoff the fast idle:

. Pressing the brake.

. Selecting the cruise controlcancel button.

. Releasing the parking brake.

. Moving the transmission shiftlever out of P (Park) orN (Neutral).

. Selecting the cruise control on/off button when it waspreviously on.

. Pressing the cruise control SET-button a second time.

. Pressing the accelerator morethan one-quarter of theway down.

. Turning the ignition switch to theLOCK/OFF position.



Engine HeaterIf the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax dieselsupplement.

The engine coolant heater canprovide easier starting and betterfuel economy during enginewarm-up in cold weather conditionsat or below −18 °C (0 °F). Vehicleswith an engine coolant heatershould be plugged in at least fourhours before starting. An internalthermostat in the plug end of thecord may exist which will preventengine coolant heater operation attemperatures above −18 °C (0 °F).

To Use the Engine CoolantHeater

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap theelectrical cord.

The cord for the engine coolantheater is on the driver side ofthe engine compartment and isattached to the hose for thepower steering reservoir.

Check the heater cord fordamage. If it is damaged, donot use it. See your dealer fora replacement. Inspect thecord for damage yearly.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded110-volt AC outlet.

{ Warning

Improper use of the heater cordor an extension cord can damagethe cord and may result inoverheating and fire.

. Plug the cord into athree-prong electrical utilityreceptacle that is protectedby a ground fault detectionfunction. An ungroundedoutlet could cause anelectric shock.

. Use a weatherproof,heavy-duty, 15 amp-ratedextension cord if needed.Failure to use therecommended extensioncord in good operating

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

condition, or using adamaged heater orextension cord, could makeit overheat and cause a fire,property damage, electricshock, and injury.

. Do not operate the vehiclewith the heater cordpermanently attached to thevehicle. Possible heatercord and thermostatdamage could occur.

. While in use, do not let theheater cord touch vehicleparts or sharp edges. Neverclose the hood on theheater cord.

. Before starting the vehicle,unplug the cord, reattachthe cover to the plug, andsecurely fasten the cord.Keep the cord away fromany moving parts.



4. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store thecord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine partsand prevent damage.

The length of time the heater shouldremain plugged in depends onseveral factors. Ask a dealer in thearea where you will be parking thevehicle for the best advice on this.

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)These vehicle accessories can beused for up to 10 minutes after theengine is turned off:

. Audio System

. Power Windows (if equipped)

These features will work when theignition key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the key isturned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF,power to the radio and powerwindows will continue to work10 minutes or until the driver door isopened.

Shifting Into Park1. Hold the brake pedal down,

then set the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever into theP (Park) position by pulling theshift lever toward you andmoving it up as far as it will go.

3. Turn the ignition key toLOCK/OFF.

4. Remove the key and take itwith you. If you can leave thevehicle with the ignition key inyour hand, the vehicle isin P (Park).

Leaving the Vehicle with theEngine Running

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.It could overheat and catch fire.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehiclecan move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park 0 179.If you are towing a trailer, seeDriving Characteristics andTowing Tips 0 201.

If you have to leave the vehicle withthe engine running, be sure thevehicle is in P (Park) and theparking brake is firmly set. After theshift lever is moved into P (Park),hold the regular brake pedal down.Then, see if you can move the shiftlever away from P (Park) without



first pulling it toward you. If you can,it means that the shift lever was notfully locked into P (Park).

Torque Lock

If you are parking on a hill and youdo not shift the transmission intoP (Park) properly, the weight of thevehicle can put too much force onthe parking pawl in thetransmission. It might be difficult topull the shift lever out of P (Park).This is called torque lock. Toprevent torque lock, set the parkingbrake and then shift into P (Park)properly before you leave the driverseat. To find out how, see ShiftingInto Park 0 179.

When you are ready to drive, movethe shift lever out of P (Park) beforereleasing the parking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you mightneed to have another vehicle pushyours a little uphill to take some ofthe pressure from the parking pawlin the transmission. Then youshould be able to pull the shift leverout of P (Park).

Shifting out of ParkThe vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock controlsystem. You have to fully apply thebrakes before you can shift fromP (Park) when the ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. SeeAutomatic Transmission 0 182.

The shift lock control system isdesigned to:

. Prevent the ignition key frombeing removed unless the shiftlever is in P (Park).

. Prevent movement of the shiftlever out of P (Park), unless theignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the regularbrake pedal is applied.

The shift lock control system isalways functional except in the caseof a dead battery or low voltage(less than 9 V) battery.

If the vehicle has an unchargedbattery or a battery with low voltage,try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting - NorthAmerica 0 280.

To shift out of P (Park):

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still are unable to shift out ofP (Park):

1. Ease the pressure on the shiftlever.

2. While holding down the brakepedal, push the shift lever allthe way into P (Park).

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you are still having a problemshifting, have the vehicle serviced.



Parking over ThingsThat Burn

{ Warning

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,or other things that can burn.

Engine Exhaust

{ Warning

Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:

. The vehicle idles in areaswith poor ventilation(parking garages, tunnels,deep snow that may blockunderbody airflow or tailpipes).

. The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

. The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

. The vehicle exhaust systemhas been modified,damaged, or improperlyrepaired.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or aftermarketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected orif it is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with thewindows completely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.



Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running.

If the vehicle is left with the enginerunning, follow the proper steps tobe sure the vehicle will not move.See Shifting Into Park 0 179 andEngine Exhaust 0 181.

If parking on a hill and pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips 0 201.

AutomaticTransmissionA shift position indicator is in theinstrument cluster.

There are several different positionsfor the shift lever.

See “Range Selection Mode” underManual Mode 0 185.

P : This position locks the rearwheels. It is the best position to usewhen starting the engine becausethe vehicle cannot move easily.When parked on a hill, especiallywhen the vehicle has a heavy load,you might notice an increase in theeffort to shift out of P (Park). See“Torque Lock” under Shifting IntoPark 0 179.

{ Warning

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehiclecan move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park 0 179 andDriving Characteristics andTowing Tips 0 201.

R : Use this gear to back up.

Caution

Shifting to R (Reverse) while thevehicle is moving forward coulddamage the transmission. The

(Continued)



Caution (Continued)

repairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Shift toR (Reverse) only after the vehicleis stopped.

To rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice, or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, see Ifthe Vehicle Is Stuck 0 169.

N : In this position, the engine doesnot connect with the wheels.To restart when you are alreadymoving, use N (Neutral) only. Also,use N (Neutral) when the vehicle isbeing towed.

{ Warning

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hit

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

people or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.

Caution

Shifting out of P (Park) orN (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be sure theengine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

D : This position is for normaldriving. It provides the best fueleconomy. If you need more powerfor passing, and you are:

. Going less than about 55 km/h(35 mph), push the acceleratorpedal about halfway down.

. Going about 55 km/h (35 mph) ormore, push the accelerator allthe way down.

By doing this, the vehicle shiftsdown to the next gear and hasmore power.

D (Drive) can be used when towinga trailer, carrying a heavy load,or driving on steep hills. You mightwant to shift the transmission to alower gear selection if thetransmission shifts too often.

Downshifting the transmission inslippery road conditions could resultin skidding. See “Skidding” underLoss of Control 0 166.

The vehicle has a shift stabilizationfeature that adjusts the transmissionshifting to the current drivingconditions in order to reduce rapidupshifts and downshifts. This shiftstabilization feature is designed todetermine, before making anupshift, if the engine is able tomaintain vehicle speed by analyzingthings such as vehicle speed,throttle position, and vehicle load.If the shift stabilization featuredetermines that a current vehiclespeed cannot be maintained, thetransmission does not upshift andinstead holds the current gear.



In some cases, this could appear tobe a delayed shift, however thetransmission is operating normally.

The transmission uses adaptiveshift controls. Adaptive shift controlscontinually compare key shiftparameters to pre-programmedideal shifts stored in thetransmission’s computer. Thetransmission constantly makesadjustments to improve vehicleperformance according to how thevehicle is being used, such as witha heavy load or when thetemperature changes. During thisadaptive shift control process,shifting might feel different as thetransmission determines the bestsettings.

The shift quality of a new vehiclemay not be ideal because theadaptive shift control process maynot have determined the bestsettings for a particular shift orcondition. Shift quality will improvewith continued driving.

When temperatures are very cold,the transmission's gear shiftingcould be delayed, providing more

stable shifts until the engine warmsup. Shifts could be more noticeablewith a cold transmission. Thisdifference in shifting is normal.

M : This position lets drivers selectthe range of gears appropriate forcurrent driving conditions. If thevehicle has this feature, see “RangeSelection Mode” under ManualMode 0 185.

3 : This position is also used fornormal driving. It reduces vehiclespeed more than D (Drive) withoutusing the brakes. You might choose3 (Third) instead of D (Drive) whendriving on hilly, winding roads; whentowing a trailer, so there is lessshifting between gears; and whengoing down a steep hill. See “RangeSelection Mode” under ManualMode 0 185.

2 : This position reduces vehiclespeed even more than 3 (Third)without using the brakes. You canuse 2 (Second) on hills. It can helpcontrol vehicle speed as you godown steep mountain roads, butthen you would also want to use the

brakes off and on. See “RangeSelection Mode” under ManualMode 0 185.

If you manually select 2 (Second) inan automatic transmission, thetransmission will start insecond gear. You can use thisfeature for reducing the speed of therear wheels when trying to start thevehicle from a stop on slippery roadsurfaces.

1 : This position reduces vehiclespeed without using the brakes.You can use it for major/severedowngrades where the vehiclewould otherwise accelerate due tosteepness of grade. When you shiftto 1 (First) it provides the lowestgear appropriate to current roadspeed and continues to downshiftas the vehicle slows, eventuallydownshifting to 1 (First) gear. Thetransmission can be held in 1 (First)gear using Range Selection Modeor the shift lever. See “RangeSelection Mode” under ManualMode 0 185.



Caution

Spinning the tires or holding thevehicle in one place on a hillusing only the accelerator pedalmay damage the transmission.The repair will not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. If you arestuck, do not spin the tires. Whenstopping on a hill, use the brakesto hold the vehicle in place.

Normal Mode Grade Braking

This mode is enabled when thevehicle is started, but is not enabledin Range Selection Mode. It assistsin maintaining desired vehiclespeeds when driving on downhillgrades by using the engine andtransmission to slow the vehicle.The first time the system activatesfor each ignition key cycle, a DICmessage will be displayed. SeeTransmission Messages 0 116.

To disable or enable Normal ModeGrade Braking within the currentignition key cycle, press and holdthe Tow/Haul button for

three seconds. A DIC messagedisplays. See TransmissionMessages 0 116.

For other forms of grade braking,see Tow/Haul Mode 0 186 andCruise Control 0 190.

Manual Mode

Range Selection Mode

If equipped, Range Selection Modehelps control the vehicle'stransmission and vehicle speedwhile driving downhill or towing atrailer by letting you select a desiredrange of gears.

To use this feature:

1. Move the shift lever toM (Manual Mode).

2. Press the +/− buttons on theshift lever, to select the desiredrange of gears for currentdriving conditions.

When M (Manual Mode) is selecteda number displays in the DIC next tothe M indicating the current gear.

This number is the highest gear thatcan be used. However, the vehiclecan automatically shift to lowergears as it adjusts to drivingconditions. This means that allgears below that number areavailable. When 5 (Fifth) is selected,1 (First) through 5 (Fifth) gears areautomatically shifted by the vehicle,but 6 (Sixth) cannot be used untilthe +/− button on the steeringcolumn lever is used to change tothe gear.

Grade Braking is not available whenRange Selection Mode is active.See Tow/Haul Mode 0 186.

While using Range Selection Mode,cruise control and the Tow/HaulMode can be used.



Caution

Spinning the tires or holding thevehicle in one place on a hillusing only the accelerator pedalmay damage the transmission.The repair will not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. If you arestuck, do not spin the tires. Whenstopping on a hill, use the brakesto hold the vehicle in place.

Low Traction Mode

Low Traction Mode can assist invehicle acceleration when roadconditions are slippery. While thevehicle is at a stop, select thesecond gear range using RangeSelection Mode. This will limittorque to the wheels after it detectswheel slip, preventing the tires fromspinning.

Tow/Haul Mode

If equipped, Tow/Haul Mode adjuststhe transmission shift pattern toreduce shift cycling, providingincreased performance, vehiclecontrol, and transmission coolingwhen towing or hauling heavy loads.

Turn the Tow/Haul Mode on and offby pressing the button on theinstrument panel. When Tow/Haul ison, a light on the instrument clusterwill come on.

See Tow/Haul Mode Light 0 102.

Also see “Tow/Haul Mode” underTowing Equipment 0 208.

Tow/Haul Mode Grade Braking

Tow/Haul Mode Grade Braking isonly enabled while the Tow/HaulMode is selected and the vehicle isnot in the Range Selection Mode.See “Tow/Haul Mode” listedpreviously and Manual Mode 0 185.Tow/Haul Mode Grade Brakingassists in maintaining desiredvehicle speeds when driving ondownhill grades by using the engineand transmission to slow thevehicle.

To disable or enable Tow/Haul ModeGrade Braking within the currentignition key cycle, press and holdthe Tow/Haul button forthree seconds. A DIC message willbe displayed. See TransmissionMessages 0 116.

See Towing Equipment 0 208.

For other forms of grade braking,see Automatic Transmission 0 182and Cruise Control 0 190.



Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has ABS, an advancedelectronic braking system that helpsprevent a braking skid.

When the vehicle begins to driveaway, ABS checks itself.A momentary motor or clicking noisemight be heard while this test isgoing on, and it might even benoticed that the brake pedal movesa little. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Light0 102.

If driving safely on a wet road and itbecomes necessary to slam on thebrakes and continue braking to

avoid a sudden obstacle, acomputer senses the wheels areslowing down. If one of the wheelsis about to stop rolling, the computerwill separately work the brakes ateach wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This can helpyou steer around the obstacle whilebraking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controlsbraking pressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a foot up tothe brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you,there will not be enough time toapply the brakes if that vehiclesuddenly slows or stops. Alwaysleave enough room up ahead tostop, even with ABS.

Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly and letABS work. You may hear the ABSpump or motor operating and feelthe brake pedal pulsate. This isnormal.

Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows you to steer and brakeat the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can helpmore than even the very bestbraking.

Parking Brake



To set the parking brake, hold theregular brake pedal, then pushdown the parking brake pedal.

If the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light will come on.

To release the parking brake, holdthe regular brake pedal down. Pullthe handle, located just above theparking brake pedal, with theparking brake symbol, to release theparking brake.

If the ignition is on when the parkingbrake is released, the brake systemwarning light will go off.

Caution

Driving with the parking brake oncan overheat the brake systemand cause premature wear ordamage to brake system parts.Make sure that the parking brakeis fully released and the brakewarning light is off before driving.

If you are towing a trailer and areparking on a hill, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips0 201.

Ride Control Systems

Traction Control/Electronic StabilityControlThe vehicle may have a vehiclestability enhancement system calledStabiliTrak. It is an advancedcomputer controlled system thatassists the driver with directionalcontrol of the vehicle in difficultdriving conditions.

StabiliTrak activates when thecomputer senses a discrepancybetween the intended path and thedirection the vehicle is actuallytraveling. StabiliTrak selectivelyapplies braking pressure at any oneof the vehicle's brakes to assist thedriver with keeping the vehicle onthe intended path.

When the vehicle is started andbegins to move, the systemperforms several diagnostic checksto ensure there are no problems.The system may be heard or feltwhile it is working. This is normaland does not mean there is a



problem with the vehicle. Thesystem should initialize before thevehicle reaches 40 km/h (25 mph).In some cases, it may takeapproximately 3.2 km (2 mi) ofdriving before the system initializes.

The Traction Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak indicator light comes onin the instrument cluster when thesystem requires service.

When StabiliTrak activates, theTCS/StabiliTrak indicator lightflashes in the instrument cluster.This also occurs when TCS isactivated.

See Traction Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light 0 103.

For your safety, the system can onlybe disabled when the vehicle speedis less than 40 km/h (25 mph).

Press the StabiliTrak button on theinstrument panel once to turn off theTCS. The appropriate message isdisplayed in the DIC. See RideControl System Messages 0 114.

Press and hold the StabiliTrakbutton to turn off StabiliTrak andTCS. The StabiliTrak OFF lightilluminates and the appropriate

messages will be displayed in theDIC. See Ride Control SystemMessages 0 114.

To turn StabiliTrak and TCS backon, press the StabiliTrak buttonagain. StabiliTrak will automaticallyturn back on when the vehiclespeed exceeds 40 km/h (25 mph).

When the StabiliTrak system hasbeen turned off, system noises maystill be heard as a result of thebrake-traction control coming on.

It is recommended to leave thesystem on for normal drivingconditions, but it may be necessaryto turn the system off if the vehicleis stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow,and you want to “rock” the vehicle toattempt to free it. See If the VehicleIs Stuck 0 169.

StabiliTrak System Operation

The StabiliTrak system is normallyon, except when the system isinitializing or has been disabled withthe StabiliTrak button. TheStabiliTrak system will automaticallyactivate to assist the driver inmaintaining vehicle directional



control in most driving conditions.When activated, the StabiliTraksystem may reduce engine power tothe wheels and apply braking toindividual wheels as necessary toassist the driver with vehicledirectional control. If cruise controlis being used when StabiliTrakactivates, the cruise controlautomatically disengages. Thecruise control can be re-engagedwhen road conditions allow. SeeCruise Control 0 190.

The StabiliTrak system may alsoturn off automatically if it determinesthat a problem exists with thesystem. If the problem does notclear itself after restarting thevehicle, see your dealer for service.

Traction Control Operation

TCS is part of the StabiliTraksystem. TCS limits wheel spin byreducing engine power to thewheels and by applying brakes toeach individual wheel as necessary.

If the brake-traction control systemactivates constantly or if the brakeshave heated up due to high speedbraking, the brake-traction control

will be automatically disabled. Thesystem will come back on after thebrakes have cooled. This can takeup to two minutes or longerdepending on brake usage.

TCS may activate on dry or roughroads or under conditions such asheavy acceleration while turning orabrupt upshifts/downshifts of thetransmission. When this reduction inacceleration occurs, it may benoticed, or a noise or vibration maybe heard. This is normal.

Adding non-dealer accessories canaffect the vehicle's performance.See Accessories and Modifications0 213.

Locking Rear AxleVehicles with a locking rear axle cangive more traction on snow, mud,ice, sand, or gravel. It works like astandard axle most of the time, butwhen traction is low, this feature willallow the rear wheel with the mosttraction to move the vehicle.

Cruise Control

{ Warning

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. Do not usecruise control on winding roads orin heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads.

If equipped with cruise control, aspeed of about 40 km/h (25 mph) ormore can be maintained withoutkeeping your foot on theaccelerator. Cruise control does notwork at speeds below about 40 km/h(25 mph).

If the vehicle has StabiliTrak and thesystem begins to limit wheel spin,cruise control will automaticallydisengage. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 188.



When road conditions allow cruisecontrol to be safely used again,cruise control can be turnedback on.

If the brakes are applied, cruisecontrol disengages.

I (On/Off) : Press to turn cruisecontrol on or off. The white indicatorcomes on in the instrument clusterwhen cruise control is turned on.

+RES (Resume/Accelerate) : Ifthere is a set speed in memory,press briefly to resume to apreviously set speed, or press and

hold to accelerate. If cruise controlis already active, use to increasevehicle speed.

SET− (Set/Coast) : Press briefly toset the speed and activate cruisecontrol, or press and hold todecelerate. If cruise control isalready active, use to decreasevehicle speed.

[ (Cancel) : Press to disengagecruise control without erasing theset speed from memory.

Setting Cruise Control

IfI is on when not in use, theSET− or +RES button could getpressed and go into cruise when notdesired. KeepI off when cruise isnot being used.

1. PressI to turn the cruisesystem on.

2. Get up to the desired speed.

3. Press and release SET−. Thedesired set speed brieflyappears in the instrumentcluster.

4. Remove your foot from theaccelerator.

The cruise control indicator on theinstrument cluster turns green aftercruise control has been set to thedesired speed. See InstrumentCluster 0 93.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at adesired speed and then the brakesare applied, the cruise control isdisengaged without erasing the setspeed from memory.

Once the vehicle speed reachesabout 40 km/h (25 mph) or more,briefly press +RES. The vehiclereturns to the previous set speed.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated:

. Press and hold +RES until thedesired speed is reached, thenrelease it.



. To increase vehicle speed insmall increments, briefly press+RES. For each press, thevehicle goes about 1.6 km/h(1 mph) faster.

The speedometer reading can bedisplayed in either English or metricunits. See Driver Information Center(DIC) 0 105. The increment valueused depends on the unitsdisplayed.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated:

. Press and hold SET– until thedesired lower speed is reached,then release it.

. To decrease the vehicle speed insmall increments, briefly pressSET–. For each press, thevehicle goes about 1.6 km/h(1 mph) slower.

The speedometer reading can bedisplayed in either English or metricunits. See Driver Information Center(DIC) 0 105. The increment valueused depends on the unitsdisplayed.

Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease the vehicle speed. Whenyou take your foot off the pedal, thevehicle will slow down to theprevious set cruise speed. Whilepressing the accelerator pedal orshortly following the release tooverride cruise control, brieflypressing SET– will result in cruiseset to the current vehicle speed.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well cruise control works onhills depends on the vehicle speed,load, and the steepness of the hills.When going up steep hills, youmight have to step on theaccelerator pedal to maintain yourspeed.

While going downhill:

. Vehicles with a 4-speedautomatic transmission mayneed to have the brakes appliedor the transmission shifted to alower gear to help maintaindriver selected speed.

. Vehicles with a 6-speedautomatic transmission haveCruise Grade Braking to helpmaintain driver selected speed.

Cruise Grade Braking is enabledwhen the vehicle is started andcruise control is active. It is notenabled in Range Selection Mode.It assists in maintaining driverselected speed when driving ondownhill grades by using the engineand transmission to slow thevehicle.

To disable and enable Cruise GradeBraking for the current ignition keycycle, press and hold the Tow/Haulbutton for three seconds. A DICmessage displays. SeeTransmission Messages 0 116.

When the brakes are applied thecruise control is disengaged.



Ending Cruise Control

There are four ways to end cruisecontrol:

. Step lightly on the brake pedal.

. Press [.

. Shift the transmission toN (Neutral).

. To turn off cruise control,pressI.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed iserased from memory ifI ispressed or if the vehicle isturned off.

Driver AssistanceSystems

Rear VisionCamera (RVC)If equipped, the RVC system isdesigned to help the driver whenbacking up by displaying a view ofthe area behind the vehicle.

{ Warning

The camera(s) do not displaychildren, pedestrians, bicyclists,crossing traffic, animals, or anyother object outside of thecameras’ field of view, below thebumper, or under the vehicle.Shown distances may be differentfrom actual distances. Do notdrive or park the vehicle usingonly these camera(s). Alwayscheck behind and around thevehicle before driving. Failure touse proper care may result ininjury, death, or vehicle damage.

Vehicles without NavigationSystem

When the vehicle is on and shiftedinto R (Reverse), the video imageappears on the inside rearviewmirror. The video image disappearsafter the vehicle is shifted out ofR (Reverse).

Vehicles with NavigationSystem

When the vehicle is shifted intoR (Reverse), the video imageappears on the navigation screen.After a delay, the navigation screendisplays the previous screen afterthe vehicle is shifted out ofR (Reverse).

The delay that is received aftershifting out of R (Reverse) isapproximately 10 seconds. Return tothe previous screen sooner byperforming one of the following:

. Press a hard key on thenavigation system.

. Shift into P (Park).

. Reach a vehicle speed of8 km/h (5 mph).



Symbols and Guidelines

The navigation system may have afeature that allows for viewingparking assist symbols and/orguidelines on the navigation screenwhile using the RVC. The RearParking Assist (RPA) system mustnot be disabled to use the cautionsymbols. If RPA has been disabledand the symbols have been turnedon, the Rear Parking AssistSymbols Unavailable error messagemay display. See Parking Assist0 195.

The symbols appear near objectsdetected by the RPA system. Thesymbol may cover the object whenviewing the navigation screen. Theguideline overlay can help the driveralign the vehicle when backing intoa parking spot.

To turn the symbols or guidelines onor off:

1. Shift into P (Park).

2. Press MENU to enter theconfigure menu options. Turnthe Multifunction knob until theDisplay feature is highlighted

and press the Multifunctionknob; or press the Displayscreen button.

3. Select the Rear CameraOptions screen button. TheRear Camera Options screendisplays.

4. Touch the Symbols orGuidelines screen button. Thescreen button will behighlighted when the featureis on.

RVC Location

The camera is above the licenseplate.

This shows the field of view that thecamera provides.

1. View displayed by thecamera

1. View displayed by thecamera



2. Corners of the rear bumper

Displayed images may be further orcloser than they appear. The areadisplayed is limited and objects thatare close to either corner of thebumper or under the bumper do notdisplay.

When the System Does NotSeem To Work Properly

The RVC system might not workproperly or display a clear image if:

. It is dark.

. The sun or the beam ofheadlamps is shining directlyinto the camera lens.

. Ice, snow, mud, or anything elsebuilds up on the camera lens.Clean the lens, rinse it withwater, and wipe it with a softcloth.

. The back of the vehicle is in anaccident. The position andmounting angle of the cameracan change or the camera canbe affected. Be sure to have the

camera and its position andmounting angle checked at yourdealer.

The RVC system display in therearview mirror may turn off or notappear as expected due to one ofthe following conditions. If thisoccurs, the left indicator light on themirror will flash.

. A slow flash may indicate a lossof video signal, or no videosignal present during the reversecycle.

. A fast flash may indicate that thedisplay has been on for themaximum allowable time duringa reverse cycle, or the displayhas reached an OverTemperature limit.

The fast flash conditions areused to protect the video devicefrom high temperatureconditions. Once conditionsreturn to normal, the device willreset and the indicator will stopflashing.

During any of these fault conditions,the display will be blank and theindicator will flash while the vehicleis in R (Reverse) or until theconditions return to normal.

Parking AssistIf equipped, the Rear Parking Assist(RPA) system uses sensors on therear bumper to assist with parkingand avoiding objects while inR (Reverse).

{ Warning

The parking assist system doesnot detect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, animals, or objectsbelow the bumper or that are tooclose or too far from the vehicle.It is not available at speedsgreater than 8 km/h (5 mph). Toprevent injury, death, or vehicledamage, even with parking assist,always check the area around thevehicle and check all mirrorsbefore backing.



How the System Works

RPA comes on automatically whenthe shift lever is moved intoR (Reverse). A single beep soundsto indicate the system is working.

RPA operates only at speeds lessthan 8 km/h (5 mph).

An obstacle detection is indicatedby beeps. The time between beepsgets shorter as the vehicleapproaches the obstacle. Repeatedbeeps are heard when the distanceis less than 30 cm (12 in).

To be detected, objects must be atleast 25 cm (10 in) off the groundand below rear door level. Objectsmust also be within 2.5 m (8 ft) fromthe rear bumper. This distance maybe less during warmer or humidweather.

Turning the System On and Off

The system can be disabled throughthe Driver Information Center (DIC).See “Park Assist” under DriverInformation Center (DIC) 0 105.

RPA defaults to the on setting eachtime the vehicle is started.

Turn RPA off when towing a trailer.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

The following messages may bedisplayed on the DIC:

SERVICE PARK ASSIST : If thismessage occurs, take the vehicle toyour dealer for repair.

PARK ASSIST OFF : This messageoccurs if the driver disables thesystem or if the vehicle is drivenabove 8 km/h (5 mph) inR (Reverse).

PARK ASST BLOCKED SEEOWNERS MANUAL : Thismessage can occur under thefollowing conditions:

. The sensors are not clean. Keepthe rear bumper free of mud,dirt, snow, ice, slush, and frost.The message may not clear untilfrost or ice has melted all aroundand inside the sensor.

. A trailer is attached to thevehicle, or a bicycle or an objecthanging out of the rear doorduring the current or last drive

cycle. RPA will return to normaloperation after it is determinedthe object is removed. Thiscould take a few drive cycles.

. A tow bar is attached to thevehicle.

Other conditions may affect systemperformance, such as vibrationsfrom a jackhammer or thecompression of air brakes on a verylarge truck.



FuelFor diesel engine vehicles, see“Fuel for Diesel Engines” in theDuramax diesel supplement.

For gasoline engine vehicles, use ofthe recommended fuel is animportant part of the propermaintenance of this vehicle. Whendriving in the U.S. and Canada, tohelp keep the engine clean andmaintain optimum vehicleperformance, we recommend usingTOP TIER Detergent Gasolines.

See www.toptiergas.com for a list ofTOP TIER Detergent Gasolines.

If the vehicle has a yellow fuel cap,E85 or FlexFuel can be used in thevehicle. See E85 or FlexFuel 0 198.

Use regular unleaded gasolinemeeting ASTM specification D4814with a posted octane rating of 87 orhigher. Do not use gasoline with anoctane rating below 87; as it maycause engine damage and will lowerfuel economy.

Use of Seasonal Fuels

Use summer and winter fuels in theappropriate season. The fuelsindustry automatically modifies thefuel for the appropriate season.If fuel is left in the vehicle tank forlong periods of time, driving orstarting could be affected. Drive thevehicle until the fuel is at one-halftank or less, then refuel with thecurrent seasonal fuel.

Prohibited Fuels

Gasolines containing oxygenatessuch as ethers and ethanol, as wellas reformulated gasolines, areavailable in some cities. If thesegasolines comply with thepreviously described specification,

then they are acceptable to use.However, E85 (85% ethanol) andother fuels containing more than15% ethanol must be used only inFlexFuel vehicles.

Caution

Do not use fuel containingmethanol. It can corrode metalparts in the fuel system and alsodamage plastic and rubber parts.That damage would not becovered under the vehiclewarranty.

Some gasolines, mainly high octaneracing gasolines, can contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). Do not usegasolines and/or fuel additives withMMT as they can reduce spark pluglife and affect emission controlsystem performance. Themalfunction indicator lamp may turnon. If this occurs, see your dealerfor service.



California FuelRequirementsIf the vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards, it isdesigned to operate on fuels thatmeet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission controllabel. If this fuel is not available instates adopting California EmissionsStandards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meetingfederal specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance mightbe affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp could turn on and thevehicle may not pass a smog-checktest. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp (Check Engine Light) 0 100.If this occurs, return to yourauthorized dealer for diagnosis. If itis determined that the condition iscaused by the type of fuel used,repairs may not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Fuels in ForeignCountriesIf planning to drive in countriesoutside the U.S. or Canada, theproper fuel might be hard to find.Check regional auto club or fuelretail brand websites for availabilityin the country where driving. Neveruse leaded gasoline, fuel containingmethanol, manganese, or any otherfuel not recommended. Costlyrepairs caused by use of improperfuel would not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Fuel AdditivesTo keep fuel systems clean, TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline isrecommended. See Fuel 0 197.

If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline isnot available, one bottle of FuelSystem Treatment PLUS added tothe fuel tank at every engine oilchange can help. Fuel SystemTreatment PLUS is the onlygasoline additive recommended byGeneral Motors. It is available atyour dealer.

Do not use additives with E85 orFlexFuel.

E85 or FlexFuelVehicles with a yellow fuel cap canuse either unleaded gasoline or fuelcontaining up to 85% ethanol (E85).All other vehicles should use onlythe unleaded gasoline as describedin Fuel 0 197.

The use of E85 or FlexFuel isencouraged when the vehicle isdesigned to use it. E85 or FlexFuelis made from renewable sources.

To help locate fuel stations thatcarry E85 or FlexFuel, the U.S.Department of Energy has analternative fuels website. Seewww.afdc.energy.gov/afdc/locator/stations.

E85 or FlexFuel should meet ASTMSpecification D 5798 or CAN/CGSB–3.512 in Canada. Do not usethe fuel if the ethanol content isgreater than 85%. Fuel mixtures thatdo not meet ASTM or CGSBspecifications can affect driveabilityand could cause the malfunctionindicator lamp to come on.



After refueling, the vehiclecalculates the composition of thefuel. It is not recommended torepeatedly switch between fuels.If fuels are switched frequently, addas much fuel as possible and do notadd less than 11 L (3 gal) whenrefueling. Drive at least 11 km (7 mi)immediately after refueling to allowthe vehicle to adapt to the change inethanol concentration.

Because E85 or FlexFuel has lessenergy per liter (gallon) thangasoline, the vehicle will need to berefilled more often. See Filling theTank 0 199.

Caution

Some additives are notcompatible with E85 or FlexFueland can harm the vehicle's fuelsystem. Do not add anything toE85 or FlexFuel. Damage causedby additives would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Caution

Do not use fuel containingmethanol. It can corrode metalparts in the fuel system and alsodamage plastic and rubber parts.That damage would not becovered under the vehiclewarranty.

Filling the Tank

{ Warning

Fuel vapors and fuel fires burnviolently and can cause injury ordeath.

. To help avoid injuries to youand others, read and followall the instructions on thefuel pump island.

. Turn off the engine whenrefueling.

. Keep sparks, flames, andsmoking materials awayfrom fuel.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Do not leave the fuel pumpunattended.

. Do not use a cell phonewhile refueling.

. Do not reenter the vehiclewhile pumping fuel.

. Keep children away fromthe fuel pump and never letchildren pump fuel.

. Fuel can spray out if the fuelcap is opened too quickly.This spray can happen if thetank is nearly full, and ismore likely in hot weather.Open the fuel cap slowlyand wait for any hiss noiseto stop, then unscrew thecap all the way.



The fuel cap is behind a hinged fueldoor on the driver side of thevehicle.

If the vehicle has E85 fuel capability,the fuel cap will be yellow and statethat E85 or gasoline can be used.See E85 or FlexFuel 0 198.

To remove the fuel cap, turn itslowly counterclockwise.

While refueling, hang the tetheredfuel cap from the hook on thefuel door.

{ Warning

Overfilling the fuel tank by morethan three clicks of a standard fillnozzle may cause:

. Vehicle performance issues,including engine stalling anddamage to the fuel system.

. Fuel spills.

. Potential fuel fires.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Wait afew seconds after you have finishedpumping before removing thenozzle. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible. SeeExterior Care 0 285.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn itclockwise until it clicks. Make surethe cap is fully installed. Thediagnostic system can determine ifthe fuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. This wouldallow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp (Check EngineLight) 0 100.

{ Warning

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

Caution

If a new fuel cap is needed, besure to get the right type of capfrom your dealer. The wrong typeof fuel cap may not fit properly,may cause the malfunctionindicator lamp to light, and coulddamage the fuel tank andemissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp(Check Engine Light) 0 100.



Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ Warning

Filling a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle can causefuel vapors that can ignite eitherby static electricity or othermeans. You or others could bebadly burned and the vehiclecould be damaged. Always:

. Use approved fuelcontainers.

. Remove the container fromthe vehicle, trunk, or pickupbed before filling.

. Place the container on theground.

. Place the nozzle inside thefill opening of the containerbefore dispensing fuel, andkeep it in contact with the fillopening until filling iscomplete.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Fill the container no morethan 95% full to allow forexpansion.

. Do not smoke, lightmatches, or use lighterswhile pumping fuel.

. Avoid using cell phones orother electronic devices.

Trailer Towing

General TowingInformationOnly use towing equipment that hasbeen designed for the vehicle.Contact your dealer or traileringdealer for assistance with preparingthe vehicle for towing a trailer. Readthe entire section before towing atrailer.

For towing a disabled vehicle, seeTowing the Vehicle 0 283. Fortowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle such as a motor home, seeRecreational Vehicle Towing 0 284.

Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips

Driving with a Trailer

When towing a trailer:

. Become familiar with the stateand local laws that apply totrailer towing.



. Do not tow a trailer during thefirst 800 km (500 mi) to preventdamage to the engine, axle,or other parts.

. Then during the first 800 km(500 mi) of trailer towing, do notdrive over 80 km/h (50 mph) anddo not make starts at full throttle.

. Vehicles can tow in D (Drive).Shift the transmission to a lowergear if the transmission shiftstoo often under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions.

. Turn off Park Assist whentowing.

{ Warning

When towing a trailer, exhaustgases may collect at the rear ofthe vehicle and enter if theliftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-mostwindow is open.

When towing a trailer:

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Do not drive with theliftgate, trunk/hatch,or rear-most window open.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

. Also adjust the climatecontrol system to a settingthat brings in only outsideair. See “Climate ControlSystems” in the Index.

For more information aboutCarbon Monoxide, see EngineExhaust 0 181.

Towing a trailer requires a certainamount of experience. Thecombination you are driving islonger and not as responsive as thevehicle itself. Get acquainted withthe handling and braking of the rigbefore setting out for the open road.

Before starting, check all trailer hitchparts and attachments, safetychains, electrical connectors, lamps,tires, and mirrors. If the trailer has

electric brakes, start thecombination moving and then applythe trailer brake controller by handto be sure the brakes work.

During the trip, check occasionallyto be sure that the load is secureand the lamps and any trailerbrakes still work.

Following Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind thevehicle ahead as you would whendriving the vehicle without a trailer.This can help to avoid heavybraking and sudden turns.

Passing

More passing distance is neededwhen towing a trailer. Thecombination will not accelerate asquickly and is longer so it isnecessary to go much fartherbeyond the passed vehicle beforereturning to the lane.

Backing Up

Hold the bottom of the steeringwheel with one hand. To move thetrailer to the left, move that hand tothe left. To move the trailer to the



right, move your hand to the right.Always back up slowly and,if possible, have someoneguide you.

Making Turns

Caution

Making very sharp turns whiletrailering could cause the trailer tocome in contact with the vehicle.The vehicle could be damaged.Avoid making very sharp turnswhile trailering.

When turning with a trailer, makewider turns than normal. Do this sothe trailer will not strike softshoulders, curbs, road signs, trees,or other objects. Avoid jerky orsudden maneuvers. Signal well inadvance.

If the trailer turn signal bulbs burnout, the arrows on the instrumentcluster will still flash for turns. It isimportant to check occasionally tobe sure the trailer bulbs are stillworking.

Driving on Grades

Reduce speed and shift to a lowergear before starting down a long orsteep downgrade. If thetransmission is not shifted down, thebrakes might get hot and no longerwork well.

Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shiftthe transmission to a lower gear ifthe transmission shifts too oftenunder heavy loads and/or hillyconditions.

The Tow/Haul Mode may be used ifthe transmission shifts too often.See Tow/Haul Mode 0 186.

When towing at high altitude onsteep uphill grades, consider thefollowing: Engine coolant will boil ata lower temperature than at normalaltitudes. If the engine is turned offimmediately after towing at highaltitude on steep uphill grades, thevehicle may show signs similar toengine overheating. To avoid this,let the engine run while parked,preferably on level ground, with thetransmission in P (Park) for a few

minutes before turning the engineoff. If the overheat warning comeson, see Engine Overheating 0 228.

Parking on Hills

{ Warning

Parking the vehicle on a hill withthe trailer attached can bedangerous. If something goeswrong, the rig could start to move.People can be injured, and boththe vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged. When possible, alwayspark the rig on a flat surface.

If parking the rig on a hill:

1. Press the brake pedal, but donot shift into P (Park) yet. Turnthe wheels into the curb iffacing downhill or into traffic iffacing uphill.

2. Have someone place chocksunder the trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are inplace, release the regularbrakes until the chocks absorbthe load.



4. Reapply the brake pedal. Thenapply the parking brake andshift into P (Park).

5. Release the brake pedal.

Leaving After Parking on a Hill

1. Apply and hold the brakepedal.

2. Start the engine.

3. Shift into a gear.

4. Release the parking brake.

5. Let up on the brake pedal.

6. Drive slowly until the trailer isclear of the chocks.

7. Stop and have someone pickup and store the chocks.

Maintenance when TrailerTowing

The vehicle needs service moreoften when pulling a trailer. SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 295.Things that are especially importantin trailer operation are automatictransmission fluid, engine oil, axlelubricant, belts, cooling system, and

brake system. It is a good idea toinspect these before and duringthe trip.

Check periodically to see that allhitch nuts and bolts are tight.

Trailer TowingIf the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax dieselsupplement.

{ Warning

The driver can lose control whenpulling a trailer if the correctequipment is not used or thevehicle is not driven properly. Forexample, if the trailer is tooheavy, the brakes may not workwell— or even at all. The driverand passengers could beseriously injured. The vehicle mayalso be damaged; the resultingrepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Pull a traileronly if all the steps in this sectionhave been followed. Ask your

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

dealer for advice and informationabout towing a trailer with thevehicle.

Caution

Pulling a trailer improperly candamage the vehicle and result incostly repairs not covered by thevehicle warranty. To pull a trailercorrectly, follow the advice in thissection and see your dealer forimportant information abouttowing a trailer with the vehicle.

To identify the trailering capacity ofthe vehicle, read the information in“Weight of the Trailer” following.

Trailering is different than justdriving the vehicle by itself.Trailering means changes inhandling, acceleration, braking,durability, and fuel economy.



Successful, safe trailering takescorrect equipment, and it has to beused properly.

The following information has manytime-tested, important trailering tipsand safety rules. Many of these areimportant for your safety and that ofyour passengers. So please readthis section carefully before pulling atrailer.

Weight of the Trailer

How heavy can a trailer safely be?

It depends on how the rig is used.For example, speed, altitude, roadgrades, outside temperature, andhow much the vehicle is used to pulla trailer are all important. It candepend on any special equipmenton the vehicle, and the amount oftongue weight the vehicle can carry.See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue”later in this section.

Maximum trailer weight is calculatedassuming only the driver is in thetow vehicle and it has all therequired trailering equipment. Theweight of additional optional

equipment, passengers,and cargo inthe tow vehicle must be subtractedfrom the maximum trailer weight.

Use the following chart to determinehow much the vehicle can weigh,based upon the vehicle model andoptions.



Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR*

G2500 Cargo Van 2WD Short Wheelbase

4.8LV8 3.42 4 037 kg (8,900 lb) 6 623 kg (14,600 lb)

6.0LV8 3.42 4 536 kg (10,000 lb) 7 257 kg (16,000 lb)

G2500 Cargo Van 2WD Long Wheelbase

4.8LV8 3.42 3 719 kg (8,200 lb) 6 623 kg (14,600 lb)

6.0LV8 3.42 4 536 kg (10,000 lb) 7 257 kg (16,000 lb)

G2500 Passenger Van 2WD Short Wheelbase

4.8LV8 3.42 3 946 kg (8,700 lb) 6 623 kg (14,600 lb)

6.0LV8 3.42 4 355 kg (9,600 lb) 7 257 kg (16,000 lb)

G3500 Cargo Van 2WD Short Wheelbase

4.8LV8 3.42 4 037 kg (8,900 lb) 6 623 kg (14,600 lb)

6.0LV8 3.42 4 536 kg (10,000 lb) 7 257 kg (16,000 lb)

G3500 Cargo Van 2WD Long Wheelbase

4.8LV8 3.42 3 946 kg (8,700 lb) 6 623 kg (14,600 lb)

6.0LV8 3.42 4 536 kg (10,000 lb) 7 257 kg (16,000 lb)

G3500 Passenger Van 2WD Short Wheelbase

4.8LV8 3.42 3 719 kg (8,200 lb) 6 623 kg (14,600 lb)

6.0LV8 3.42 4 355 kg (9,600 lb) 7 257 kg (16,000 lb)



Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR*

G3500 Passenger Van 2WD Long Wheelbase

4.8LV8 3.42 3 583 kg (7,900 lb) 6 623 kg (14,600 lb)

6.0LV8 3.42 4 218 kg (9,300 lb) 7 257 kg (16,000 lb)

*The Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle andtrailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment, and conversion. The GCWR for the vehicle should not beexceeded.

Ask your dealer for traileringinformation or advice.

Weight of the Trailer Tongue

The tongue load (1) of any trailer isan important weight to measurebecause it affects the total grossweight of the vehicle. The GrossVehicle Weight (GVW) includes thecurb weight of the vehicle, anycargo carried in it, and the peoplewho will be riding in the vehicle.If there are a lot of options,equipment, passengers, or cargo inthe vehicle, it will reduce the tongueweight the vehicle can carry, whichwill also reduce the trailer weight thevehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,the tongue load must be added to

the GVW because the vehicle willbe carrying that weight, too. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 170 for moreinformation about the vehicle'smaximum load capacity.

The trailer tongue weight (1) shouldbe 10 percent to 15 percent of thetotal loaded trailer weight (2), up to amaximum of 181 kg (400 lb) with aweight carrying hitch. The trailertongue weight (1) should be10 percent to 15 percent of the totalloaded trailer weight (2), up to amaximum of 454 kg (1,000 lb) with aweight distributing hitch.

Do not exceed the maximumallowable tongue weight for thevehicle. Choose the shortest hitchextension that will position the hitchball closest to the vehicle. This willhelp reduce the effect of trailertongue weight on the rear axle.



After loading the trailer, weigh thetrailer and then the tongue,separately, to see if the weights areproper. If they are not, adjustmentsmight be made by moving someitems around in the trailer.

Trailering may be limited by thevehicle's ability to carry tongueweight. Tongue weight cannot causethe vehicle to exceed the GVWR(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) orthe RGAWR (Rear Gross AxleWeight Rating). The effect ofadditional weight may reduce thetrailering capacity more than thetotal of the additional weight.

It is important that the vehicle doesnot exceed any of its ratings —GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR, MaximumTrailer Rating, or Tongue Weight.The only way to be sure it is notexceeding any of these ratings is toweigh the vehicle and trailer.

Total Weight on the Vehicle'sTires

Be sure the vehicle tires are inflatedto the upper limit for cold tires.These numbers can be found on theCertification label at the rear edge of

the driver door, or see Vehicle LoadLimits 0 170. Make sure not to goover the GVW limit for the vehicle,or the GAWR, including the weightof the trailer tongue. If using aweight distributing hitch, make surenot to go over the rear axle limitbefore applying the weightdistribution spring bars.

Towing Equipment

Hitches

The correct hitch equipment helpsmaintain combination control. Manytrailers can be towed with aweight-carrying hitch which simplyfeatures a coupler latched to thehitch ball, or a tow eye latched to apintle hook. Other trailers mayrequire a weight-distributing hitchthat uses spring bars to distributethe trailer tongue weight among thetwo vehicle and trailer axles. See“Weight of the Trailer Tongue” underTrailer Towing 0 204 for rating limitswith various hitch types.

Consider using sway controls withany trailer. Ask a traileringprofessional about sway controls orrefer to the trailer manufacturer'srecommendations and instructions.

Weight-Distributing Hitchesand Weight Carrying Hitches

A weight distributing hitch may beuseful with some trailers. Use thefollowing guidelines to determine if aweight distributing hitch shouldbe used.

1. Front of Vehicle2. Body to Ground Distance



When using a weight-distributinghitch, the hitch must be adjusted sothe distance (2) remains the sameboth before and after coupling thetrailer to the tow vehicle.

Safety Chains

Always attach chains between thevehicle and the trailer. Cross thesafety chains under the tongue ofthe trailer to help prevent the tonguefrom contacting the road if itbecomes separated from the hitch.Always leave just enough slack sothe rig can turn. Never allow safetychains to drag on the ground.

Trailer Brakes

A loaded trailer that weighs morethan 680 kg (1,500 lb) needs to haveits own brake system that isadequate for the weight of thetrailer. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for the trailer brakesso they are installed, adjusted andmaintained properly.

Trailer Wiring Harness

The optional heavy-duty trailerwiring package includes a wiringharness, with a seven-pin connectorat the rear of the vehicle and afour-wire harness assembly underthe driver side of the instrumentpanel. The four-wire harnessassembly comes without aconnector.

If the vehicle does not have a trailerhitch, the seven-wire harnessassembly with connector is tapedtogether and located in a framepocket at the driver side rear leftcorner of the frame.

If the vehicle has a trailer hitch, theseven-wire harness assembly withconnector is attached to a bracketon the hitch platform. In both cases,the seven-wire harness has aconnector and includes a 30-ampfeed wire.

The seven-wire harness connectorcontains the following trailer circuits:

. Light Green: Back-up Lamps(10A fuse)**

. White: Ground

. Dark Blue: Trailer Brake Signal

. Dark Green: Right Rear Stopand Turn Signal*

. Red/Black Stripe: Battery Feed(30A Fuse)

. Brown: Trailer Park LampSupply Voltage (15A fuse)**

. Yellow: Left Rear Stop and TurnSignal *

The four-wire harness (withoutconnector) contains the followingcircuits:

. Black: Ground

. Red/White: Battery Feed

. Dark Blue: Trailer Brake Signal

. Light Blue: CHMSL/StoplampSupply Voltage

* If the vehicle is a cutaway withtrailer provisions, a 15 amp fuse willbe shared for both left/stop trailerturn and right/stop trailer turnsignals. However, the cutawaylighting connector will have a10 amp fuse for each signal.



** If the vehicle is a cutaway withtrailer provisions, a 15 amp fuse willbe shared for trailer park lamps andcutaway rear lighting connector parklamps. Also, a 10 amp fuse will beshared for trailer back-up lamps andcutaway rear lighting connectorback-up lamps.

Tow/Haul Mode

This button is on the instrumentpanel, to the right of the steeringwheel.

Pressing this button turns on and offthe Tow/Haul Mode.

This indicator light on the instrumentcluster comes on when the Tow/Haul Mode is on.

Tow/Haul is a feature that assistswhen pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load. See Tow/HaulMode 0 186.

Tow/Haul is designed to be mosteffective when the vehicle andtrailer combined weight is at least75 percent of the vehicle GrossCombined Weight Rating (GCWR).See “Weight of the Trailer” in TrailerTowing 0 204. Tow/Haul is mostuseful under the following drivingconditions:

. When pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load throughrolling terrain.

. When pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load instop-and-go traffic.

. When pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load in busyparking lots where improved lowspeed control of the vehicle isdesired.

Operating the vehicle in Tow/HaulMode when lightly loaded or with notrailer at all will not cause damage.However, there is no benefit to theselection of Tow/Haul when thevehicle is unloaded. Such aselection when unloaded may resultin unpleasant engine andtransmission driving characteristicsand reduced fuel economy. Tow/Haul is recommended only whenpulling a heavy trailer or a large orheavy load.



Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipment

{ Warning

The Data Link Connector (DLC) isused for vehicle service andEmission Inspection/Maintenancetesting. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp (Check Engine Light)0 100. A device connected to theDLC — such as an aftermarketfleet or driver-behavior trackingdevice — may interfere withvehicle systems. This could affectvehicle operation and cause acrash. Such devices may alsoaccess information stored in thevehicle’s systems.

Caution

Some electrical equipment candamage the vehicle or causecomponents to not work andwould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Always checkwith your dealer before addingelectrical equipment.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle's 12-volt battery, even if thevehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle 0 63 and Adding Equipmentto the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle0 63.


212 Vehicle Care

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 213California Proposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

California PerchlorateMaterials Requirements . . . . . 213

Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . 219Automatic TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . 223Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . . . 228Engine Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . 230Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Battery - North America . . . . . . 233Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234Noise Control System . . . . . . . . 234Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 236Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . 237

Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 237

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 238Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker,and Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . 240

Taillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) . . . . . . . . . 242

License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . 242Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Electrical SystemElectrical System Overload . . . 243Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . 244

Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Floor Console Fuse Block . . . . 248

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251All-Terrain Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . 252Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Tire Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258Tire Pressure MonitorSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263Dual Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . 264When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266Different Size Tires andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 269


Vehicle Care 213

Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . 271Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 280

Jump StartingJump Starting - NorthAmerica . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Towing the VehicleTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 283Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

General InformationFor service and parts needs, visityour dealer. You will receivegenuine GM parts and GM-trainedand supported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one ofthese marks:

California Proposition65 WarningWARNING: Most motor vehicles,including this one, contain and/oremit chemicals known to the Stateof California to cause cancer andbirth defects or other reproductive

harm. Engine exhaust, many partsand systems, many fluids, andsome component wear by-productscontain and/or emit thesechemicals.

See Battery - North America 0 233and Jump Starting - North America0 280.

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, safety belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries contained inRemote Keyless Entry transmitters,may contain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Accessories andModificationsAdding non-dealer accessories ormaking modifications to the vehiclecan affect vehicle performance andsafety, including such things as


214 Vehicle Care

airbags, braking, stability, ride andhandling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, andelectronic systems like antilockbrakes, traction control, and stabilitycontrol. These accessories ormodifications could even causemalfunction or damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from modifications or theinstallation or use of non-GMcertified parts, including controlmodule or software modifications, isnot covered under the terms of thevehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. See yourdealer to accessorize the vehicleusing genuine GM Accessoriesinstalled by a dealer technician.

Also, see Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 63.

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to work onyour vehicle if you do not havethe proper knowledge, servicemanual, tools, or parts. Alwaysfollow owner manual proceduresand consult the service manualfor your vehicle before doing anyservice work.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much moreabout how to service the vehiclethan this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Information0 319.

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 63.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date ofany service work performed. SeeMaintenance Records 0 305.

Caution

Even small amounts ofcontamination can cause damageto vehicle systems. Do not allowcontaminants to contact the fluids,reservoir caps, or dipsticks.

HoodTo open the hood:

1. Pull the handle with this symbolon it. It is in front of the driverside door frame near the floor.


Vehicle Care 215

2. Go to the front of the vehicleand lift up the secondary hoodrelease, which is underneaththe middle of the hood.

3. Lift the hood, release the hoodprop from its retainer, and putthe hood prop into the slot inthe hood.

If the vehicle has an underhoodlamp, it will automatically come onand stay on until the hood is closed.

Before closing the hood, be sure allof the filler caps are on properly.Then lift the hood to relievepressure on the hood prop. Removethe hood prop from the slot in thehood and return the prop to itsretainer. Let the hood down andclose it firmly.


216 Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Overview

6.0L V8 Engine Shown (4.8L V8 Engine Similar)


Vehicle Care 217

1. Battery - North America 0 233.

2. Radiator Pressure Cap. SeeCooling System 0 224.

3. Coolant Recovery Tank. SeeCooling System 0 224.

4. Automatic Transmission FluidDipstick. See “Checking theFluid Level” under AutomaticTransmission Fluid 0 220.

5. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “Whento Add Engine Oil” underEngine Oil 0 217.

6. Engine Oil Dipstick. See“Checking Engine Oil” underEngine Oil 0 217.

7. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 0 223.

8. Power Steering FluidReservoir. See Power SteeringFluid 0 230.

9. Brake Master CylinderReservoir. See Brake Fluid0 232.

10. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See “Adding WasherFluid” under Washer Fluid0 231.

Engine OilFor diesel engine vehicles, see“Engine Oil” in the Duramax dieselsupplement.

To ensure proper engineperformance and long life, carefulattention must be paid to engine oil.Following these simple, butimportant steps will help protectyour investment:

. Always use engine oil approvedto the proper specification and ofthe proper viscosity grade. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil”in this section.

. Check the engine oil levelregularly and maintain theproper oil level. See “CheckingEngine Oil” and “When to AddEngine Oil” in this section.

. Change the engine oil at theappropriate time. See Engine OilLife System 0 219.

. Always dispose of engine oilproperly. See “What to Do withUsed Oil” in this section.

Checking Engine Oil

It is a good idea to check the engineoil level at each fuel fill. In order toget an accurate reading, the vehiclemust be on level ground. Theengine oil dipstick handle is a loop.See Engine Compartment Overview0 216 for the location of the engineoil dipstick.

Obtaining an accurate oil levelreading is essential:

1. If the engine has been runningrecently, turn off the engine andallow several minutes for the oilto drain back into the oil pan.Checking the oil level too soonafter engine shutoff will notprovide an accurate oil levelreading.

{ Warning

The engine oil dipstick handlemay be hot; it could burn you.Use a towel or glove to touch thedipstick handle.


218 Vehicle Care

2. Pull out the dipstick and wipe itwith a clean paper towel orcloth, then push it back in allthe way. Remove it again,keeping the tip down, andcheck the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatchedarea at the tip of the dipstick, add1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oiland then recheck the level. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” inthis section for an explanation ofwhat kind of oil to use. For engineoil crankcase capacity, seeCapacities and Specifications 0 307.

Caution

Do not add too much oil. Oillevels above or below theacceptable operating rangeshown on the dipstick are harmfulto the engine. If you find that youhave an oil level above theoperating range, i.e., the enginehas so much oil that the oil levelgets above the cross-hatchedarea that shows the properoperating range, the engine couldbe damaged. You should drainout the excess oil or limit drivingof the vehicle and seek a serviceprofessional to remove theexcess amount of oil.

See Engine Compartment Overview0 216 for the location of the engineoil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the wayback in when through.

Selecting the Right Engine Oil

Selecting the right engine oildepends on both the proper oilspecification and viscosity grade.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 303.

Specification

Ask for and use engine oils thatmeet the dexos1™ specification.Engine oils that have beenapproved by GM as meeting thedexos1 specification are markedwith the dexos1 approved logo. Seewww.gmdexos.com.

Caution

Failure to use the recommendedengine oil can result in enginedamage not covered by the

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 219

Caution (Continued)

vehicle warranty. Check with yourdealer or service provider onwhether the oil is approved to thedexos1 specification.

Viscosity Grade

Use SAE 5W-30 viscosity gradeengine oil.

Cold Temperature Operation: In anarea of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −29 °C(−20 °F), an SAE 0W-30 oil may beused. An oil of this viscosity gradewill provide easier cold starting forthe engine at extremely lowtemperatures. When selecting an oilof the appropriate viscosity grade,always select an oil of the correctspecification. See “Specification”earlier in this section for moreinformation.

Engine Oil Additives/EngineOil Flushes

Do not add anything to the oil. Therecommended oils meeting thedexos1 specification are all that isneeded for good performance andengine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change yourown oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Neverdispose of oil by putting it in the

trash or pouring it on the ground,into sewers, or into streams orbodies of water. Recycle it by takingit to a place that collects used oil.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is basedon a combination of factors whichinclude engine revolutions, enginetemperature, and miles driven.Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an oil change isindicated can vary considerably. Forthe oil life system to work properly,the system must be reset every timethe oil is changed.

When the system has calculatedthat oil life has been diminished, itindicates that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message comes on. SeeEngine Oil Messages 0 112.Change the oil as soon as possiblewithin the next 1 000 km (600 mi).It is possible that, if driving underthe best conditions, the oil life


220 Vehicle Care

system might indicate that an oilchange is not necessary for up to ayear. The engine oil and filter mustbe changed at least once a yearand, at this time, the system mustbe reset. Your dealer has trainedservice people who will perform thiswork and reset the system. It is alsoimportant to check the oil regularlyover the course of an oil draininterval and keep it at the properlevel.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine OilLife System

Reset the system whenever theengine oil is changed so that thesystem can calculate the nextengine oil change. To reset thesystem:

1. Turn the ignition key to ON/RUN with the engine off.

2. Fully press and release theaccelerator pedal slowly threetimes within five seconds.

3. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage comes back on when thevehicle is started, the engine oil lifesystem has not reset. Repeat theprocedure.

Automatic TransmissionFluid

When to Check and ChangeAutomatic Transmission Fluid

It is usually not necessary to checkthe transmission fluid level. The onlyreason for fluid loss is atransmission leak or overheatedtransmission. If a small leak issuspected, use the followingprocedures to check the fluid level.However, if there is a large leak, itmay be necessary to have thevehicle towed to a dealer and haveit repaired before driving the vehiclefurther.

Change the fluid and filter at theintervals listed in MaintenanceSchedule 0 295, and be sure to usethe transmission fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants 0 303.

How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid

Because this operation can bedifficult, it is recommended to havethis check done at your dealer,which can monitor the transmissiontemperature. The transmission fluidlevel increases with temperature. Toobtain a highly accurate fluid levelcheck, the transmission temperaturemust be measured.

If it is decided to check the fluidlevel, be sure to follow all theinstructions here, or a false readingon the dipstick may occur.

Caution

Too much or too little fluid candamage the transmission. Toomuch can mean that some of the

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 221

Caution (Continued)

fluid could come out and fall onhot engine parts or exhaustsystem parts, starting a fire. Toolittle fluid could cause thetransmission to overheat. Be sureto get an accurate reading ifchecking the transmission fluid.

Wait at least 30 minutes with theengine off, before checking thetransmission fluid level if the vehiclehas been driven:

. In hot weather, when outsidetemperatures are above 32 °C(90 °F).

. The vehicle is heavily loaded.

. At high speed for quite a while inhot weather.

. In heavy traffic and hot weather.

. While pulling a trailer.

After driving under these conditions,a hot check can be performed. Thefluid should be hot, which is 71 °C to93 °C (160 °F to 200 °F).

A cold fluid level check can beperformed after the vehicle hasbeen sitting for eight hours or morewith the engine off, but this is usedonly as a reference. Let the enginerun at idle for five minutes if theoutside temperature is between 15 °C to 32 °C (60 °F to 90 °F). Shouldthe fluid level be low during this coldcheck, the fluid must be checkedwarm or hot before adding fluid.If the outside temperature is colderthan 15 °C (60 °F) or hotter than 32 °C (90 °F), a cold check cannot beperformed.

A warm fluid level check can beperformed by driving the vehicleunder lightly loaded conditions andoutside temperatures between 10 °Cto 27 °C (50 °F to 80 °F). Thevehicle should be driven for at least24 km (15 mi) before performing awarm check. Checking the fluidwarm or hot will give a moreaccurate reading of the fluid levelthan a cold check.

Because the vehicle is equippedwith a high-efficiency air-to-oilcooler, the transmission fluidtemperature may not reach the

required hot fluid level checkingtemperature under normal lightlyloaded driving vehicle conditions.

Checking the Fluid Level

Prepare the vehicle:

1. Park the vehicle on a levelplace. Keep the enginerunning.

2. With the parking brake applied,place the shift lever in P (Park).

3. With a foot on the brake pedal,move the shift lever througheach gear range, pausing forabout three seconds in eachrange. When M is reached,move the selector from M1through M3. Then, position theshift lever in P (Park).

4. Let the engine run at idle fortwo minutes or more.

Then, without shutting off theengine, use the steps that follow.


222 Vehicle Care

The transmission dipstick is nearthe center of the enginecompartment and will be labeledwith the graphic shown.

See Engine Compartment Overview0 216 for more information onlocation.

1. COLD Range2. WARM Range3. HOT Range

1. Flip the handle up, pull out thedipstick, and wipe it with aclean rag or paper towel.

2. Push it back in all the way, waitthree seconds, and pull it backout again.

3. Check both sides of thedipstick, and read the lowerlevel. The fluid level must be inthe COLD (1) range for a coldcheck, transmissiontemperature 27 °C to 32 °C(80 °F to 90 °F); between theCOLD (1) and HOT (3) rangefor a WARM (2) check, 50 °C to60 °C (122 °F to 140 °F); or inthe HOT (3) cross-hatchedrange for a hot check, 71 °C to93 °C (160 °F to 200 °F). Besure to keep the dipstickpointed down to get anaccurate reading.

4. If the fluid level is in theacceptable range, push thedipstick back in all the way;then flip the handle down tolock the dipstick in place.

How to Add AutomaticTransmission Fluid

Refer to Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 303 to determine whatkind of transmission fluid to use.

1. WARM Range2. HOT Range

Using a funnel, add fluid down thetransmission dipstick tube only afterchecking the transmission fluidwhile it is warm or hot. A cold checkis used only as a reference. If thefluid level is low, add only enough ofthe proper fluid to bring the level upto the middle of the WARM (1) orHOT (2) range depending on theambient temperature and priordriving conditions. Refer to “How toCheck Automatic TransmissionFluid” earlier in this section forinstructions on driving to achievewarm or hot transmission fluid.It does not take much fluid,generally less than 0.5 L (1 pt). Donot overfill.


Vehicle Care 223

Caution

Use of the incorrect automatictransmission fluid may damagethe vehicle, and the damage maynot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Always use theautomatic transmission fluid listedin Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 303.

. After adding fluid, recheck thefluid level as described under“How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid,” earlier inthis section.

. When the correct fluid level isobtained, push the dipstick backin all the way; then flip thehandle down to lock the dipstickin place.

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

The engine air cleaner/filter is nearthe center of the enginecompartment. See EngineCompartment Overview 0 216.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

For intervals on changing andinspecting the engine air filter, seeMaintenance Schedule 0 295.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

Do not start the engine or have theengine running with the engine aircleaner/filter housing open. Beforeremoving the engine air cleaner/filter, make sure that the engine aircleaner/filter housing and nearbycomponents are free of dirt anddebris. Remove the engine aircleaner/filter. Lightly tap and shakethe engine air cleaner/filter (awayfrom the vehicle), to release loosedust and dirt. Inspect the engine aircleaner/filter for damage, andreplace if damaged. Do not cleanthe engine air cleaner/filter orcomponents with water orcompressed air.

To inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter:

1. Unhook the retainer clips andremove the cover.

2. Lift the filter out of the engineair cleaner/filter housing. Careshould be taken to dislodge aslittle dirt as possible.


224 Vehicle Care

3. Clean the engine air cleaner/filter housing.

4. Inspect or replace the engineair cleaner/filter. Make sure thatthe filter fits properly into thehousing.

5. Reinstall the cover and fastenthe retaining clips.

{ Warning

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you orothers to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; ithelps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. Use caution whenworking on the engine and do notdrive with the air cleaner/filter off.

Caution

If the air cleaner/filter is off, dirtcan easily get into the engine,which could damage it. Alwayshave the air cleaner/filter in placewhen you are driving.

Cooling SystemThe cooling system allows theengine to maintain the correctworking temperature.

1. Radiator Pressure Cap2. Coolant Recovery Tank3. Engine Cooling Fan (Out

of View)

{ Warning

An electric engine cooling fan canstart even when the engine is notrunning. To avoid injury, always

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

keep hands, clothing, and toolsaway from any enginecooling fan.

{ Warning

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If you do,you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is aleak. If you run the engine, itcould lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and youcould be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

Caution

Using coolant other thanDEX-COOL® can causepremature engine, heater core,

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 225

Caution (Continued)

or radiator corrosion. In addition,the engine coolant could requirechanging sooner. Any repairswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Always useDEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolantin the vehicle.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehicle isfilled with DEX-COOL® enginecoolant. This coolant is designed toremain in the vehicle for 5 years or240 000 km (150,000mi), whicheveroccurs first.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating,see Engine Overheating 0 228.

What to Use

{ Warning

Adding only plain water or someother liquid to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain waterand other liquids, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The coolant warning system is setfor the proper coolant mixture.With plain water or the wrongmixture, the engine could get toohot but you would not get theoverheat warning. The enginecould catch fire and you or otherscould be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant. If using this mixture,nothing else needs to be added.This mixture:

. Gives freezing protection downto −37 °C (−34 °F), outsidetemperature.

. Gives boiling protection up to129 °C (265 °F), enginetemperature.

. Protects against rust andcorrosion.

. Will not damage aluminum parts.

. Helps keep the proper enginetemperature.

Caution

If improper coolant mixture,inhibitors, or additives are used inthe vehicle cooling system, theengine could overheat and bedamaged. Too much water in themixture can freeze and crackengine cooling parts. The repairswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Use only theproper mixture of engine coolantfor the cooling system. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants 0 303.

Never dispose of engine coolant byputting it in the trash, pouring it onthe ground, or into sewers, streams,


226 Vehicle Care

or bodies of water. Have the coolantchanged by an authorized servicecenter, familiar with legalrequirements regarding usedcoolant disposal. This will helpprotect the environment and yourhealth.

Checking Coolant

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface when checking the coolantlevel.

Check to see if coolant is visible inthe coolant recovery tank. If thecoolant inside the coolant recoverytank is boiling, do not do anythingelse until it cools down. If coolant isvisible but the coolant level is not ator above the COLD FILL mark, adda 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant at thecoolant recovery tank, but be surethe cooling system is cool beforethis is done.

The coolant recovery tank cap hasthis symbol on it.

When the engine is cold, the coolantlevel should be at or above theCOLD FILL mark. If it is not, therecould be a leak in the coolingsystem.

If the coolant is low, add the coolantor take the vehicle to a dealer forservice.

How to Add Coolant to theRecovery Tank for GasolineEngines

{ Warning

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

Caution

This vehicle has a specificcoolant fill procedure. Failure tofollow this procedure could causethe engine to overheat and beseverely damaged.

If coolant is needed, add the properDEX-COOL coolant mixture at thecoolant recovery tank.

How to Add Coolant to theRadiator

{ Warning

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system can blow outand burn you badly. Never turnthe cap when the cooling system,including the surge tank pressurecap, is hot. Wait for the coolingsystem and surge tank pressurecap to cool.


Vehicle Care 227

If coolant is needed, add the propermixture directly to the radiator, butbe sure the cooling system is coolbefore this is done.

1. Remove the radiator pressurecap when the cooling system,including the radiator pressurecap and upper radiator hose, isno longer hot. Turn thepressure cap slowlycounterclockwise until it firststops. Do not press down whileturning the pressure cap.

If a hiss is heard, wait for thatto stop. A hiss means there isstill some pressure left.

2. Keep turning the pressure cap,but now push down as you turnit. Remove the pressure cap.

3. Fill the radiator with the properDEX-COOL coolant mixture, upto the base of the filler neck.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 303 for moreinformation about the propercoolant mixture.

4. Fill the coolant recovery tank tothe COLD FILL mark.

5. Reinstall the cap back on thecoolant recovery tank, butleave the radiator pressurecap off.


228 Vehicle Care

6. Start the engine and let it rununtil the upper radiator hosecan be felt getting hot. Watchout for the engine cooling fan.

7. By this time, the coolant levelinside the radiator filler neckmay be lower. If the level islower, add more of the properDEX-COOL coolant mixturethrough the filler neck until thelevel reaches the base of thefiller neck.

8. Replace the pressure cap. Atany time during this procedureif coolant begins to flow out ofthe filler neck, reinstall thepressure cap.

Caution

If the pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss andpossible engine damage mayoccur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

Engine OverheatingIf the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax dieselsupplement.

The vehicle has an indicator to warnof engine overheating.

There is an engine coolanttemperature gauge on the vehicle'sinstrument cluster. See EngineCoolant Temperature Gauge 0 96.

If the decision is made not to lift thehood when this warning appears,but instead get service help rightaway, see Roadside AssistanceProgram 0 314.

If the decision is made to lift thehood, make sure the vehicle isparked on a level surface.

Then check to see if the enginecooling fans are running. If theengine is overheating, the fanshould be running. If it is not, do notcontinue to run the engine and havethe vehicle serviced.

See if the engine cooling fan speedincreases when idle speed isdoubled by pushing the acceleratorpedal down. If it does not, thevehicle needs service. Turn off theengine.

Caution

Running the engine withoutcoolant may cause damage or afire. Vehicle damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.


Vehicle Care 229

If Steam is Coming from theEngine Compartment

{ Warning

Steam from an overheated enginecan burn you badly, even if youjust open the hood. Stay awayfrom the engine if you see or hearsteam coming from it. Just turn itoff and get everyone away fromthe vehicle until it cools down.Wait until there is no sign ofsteam or coolant before you openthe hood.

If you keep driving when theengine is overheated, the liquidsin it can catch fire. You or otherscould be badly burned. Stop theengine if it overheats, and get outof the vehicle until the engineis cool.

If No Steam is Coming fromthe Engine Compartment

If an engine overheat warning isdisplayed but no steam can be seenor heard, the problem may not be

too serious. Sometimes the enginecan get a little too hot when thevehicle:

. Climbs a long hill on a hot day.

. Stops after high-speed driving.

. Idles for long periods in traffic.

. Tows a trailer. See “Driving onGrades” under Trailer Towing0 204.

If the overheat warning is displayedwith no sign of steam:

1. Turn the air off.

2. Turn the heater on to thehighest temperature and to thehighest fan speed. Open thewindows as necessary.

3. When it is safe to do so, pull offthe road, shift to P (Park) orN (Neutral) and let theengine idle.

If the engine coolant temperaturegauge is no longer in the overheatzone or an overheat warning nolonger displays, the vehicle can bedriven. Continue to drive the vehicleslowly for about 10 minutes. Keep asafe vehicle distance from the

vehicle in front. If the warning doesnot come back on, continue to drivenormally and have the coolingsystem checked for proper fill andfunction.

If the warning continues, pull over,stop, and park the vehicleright away.

If there is still no sign of steam,push down the accelerator until theengine speed is about twice as fastas normal idle speed for at leastthree minutes while parked. If thewarning is still on, turn off theengine until it cools down.

If the decision is made not to lift thehood, get service help right away.

Engine FanThe vehicle has a clutched enginecooling fan. When the clutch isengaged, the fan spins faster toprovide more air to cool the engine.In most everyday driving conditions,the fan is spinning slower and theclutch is not fully engaged. Thisimproves fuel economy and reducesfan noise. Under heavy vehicleloading, trailer towing, and/or high


230 Vehicle Care

outside temperatures, the fan speedincreases as the clutch more fullyengages, so an increase in fannoise may be heard. This is normaland should not be mistaken as thetransmission slipping or makingextra shifts. It is merely the coolingsystem functioning properly. The fanwill slow down when additionalcooling is not required and theclutch partially disengages.

This fan noise may be heard whenstarting the engine. It will go awayas the fan clutch partiallydisengages.

Power Steering Fluid

The power steering fluid reservoir isin the engine compartment on thedriver side of the vehicle. SeeEngine Compartment Overview0 216 for reservoir location.

When to Check Power SteeringFluid

It is not necessary to regularlycheck power steering fluid unlessthere is a leak suspected in thesystem or an unusual noise isheard. A fluid loss in this systemcould indicate a problem. Have thesystem inspected and repaired.

How to Check Power SteeringFluid

To check the power steering fluid:

1. Turn the key off and let theengine compartmentcool down.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of thereservoir clean.

3. Unscrew the cap and wipe thedipstick with a clean rag.

4. Replace the cap andcompletely tighten it.

5. Remove the cap again andlook at the fluid level on thedipstick.

The level should be at the COLDFILL mark. If necessary, add onlyenough fluid to bring the level up tothe mark.

To prevent contamination of brakefluid, never check or fill the powersteering reservoir with the brakemaster cylinder cover off.

What to Use

Caution

Use of the incorrect fluid maydamage the vehicle and thedamages may not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Always usethe correct fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants 0 303.

To determine what kind of fluid touse, see Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 303. Always use theproper fluid. Failure to use theproper fluid can cause leaks anddamage hoses and seals.


Vehicle Care 231

Washer Fluid

What to Use

When the vehicle needs windshieldwasher fluid, be sure to read themanufacturer's instructions beforeuse. If operating the vehicle in anarea where the temperature may fallbelow freezing, use a fluid that hassufficient protection againstfreezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluid untilthe tank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview 0 216 forreservoir location.

Caution

. Do not use washer fluid thatcontains any type of waterrepellent coating. This cancause the wiper blades tochatter or skip.

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in thewindshield washer. It candamage the windshieldwasher system and paint.

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause thesolution to freeze anddamage the washer fluidtank and other parts of thewasher system.

. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer instructions foradding water.

. Fill the washer fluid tankonly three-quarters full whenit is very cold. This allowsfor fluid expansion if

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

freezing occurs, which coulddamage the tank if it iscompletely full.

BrakesDisc brake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or beheard all the time when the vehicleis moving, except when applying thebrake pedal firmly.

{ Warning

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toa crash. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.


232 Vehicle Care

Caution

Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costlybrake repair.

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when thebrakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear andevenly tighten wheel nuts in theproper sequence to torquespecifications. See Capacities andSpecifications 0 307.

Brake pads should be replaced ascomplete sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedaldoes not return to normal height,or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a signthat brake service may be required.

Replacing Brake System Parts

Always replace brake system partswith new, approved replacementparts. If this is not done, the brakesmay not work properly. The brakingperformance expected can changein many other ways if the wrongreplacement brake parts areinstalled or parts are improperlyinstalled.

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinder reservoiris filled with DOT 3 brake fluid. SeeEngine Compartment Overview0 216 for the location of thereservoir.

There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoir maygo down:

. Normal brake lining wear. Whennew linings are installed, thefluid level goes back up.

. A fluid leak in the brakehydraulic system. Have thebrake hydraulic system fixed.With a leak, the brakes will notwork well.

Always clean the brake fluidreservoir cap and the area aroundthe cap before removing it.

Do not top off the brake fluid.Adding fluid does not correct a leak.If fluid is added when the linings areworn, there will be too much fluidwhen new brake linings areinstalled. Add or remove fluid, asnecessary, only when work is doneon the brake hydraulic system.

{ Warning

If too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and burn,if the engine is hot enough. Youor others could be burned, andthe vehicle could be damaged.

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 233

Warning (Continued)

Add brake fluid only when work isdone on the brake hydraulicsystem.

When the brake fluid falls to a lowlevel, the brake warning light comeson. See Brake System WarningLight 0 101.

Brake fluid absorbs water over time.Replace brake fluid at the specifiedintervals to prevent increasedstopping distance. See MaintenanceSchedule 0 295.

Checking Brake Fluid

Check brake fluid by looking at thebrake fluid reservoir. See EngineCompartment Overview 0 216.

The fluid level should be aboveMIN. If it is not, have the brakehydraulic system checked to see ifthere is a leak.

After work is done on the brakehydraulic system, make sure thelevel is above MIN but not over theMAX mark.

What to Add

Use only GM approved DOT 3brake fluid from a clean, sealedcontainer. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants 0 303.

{ Warning

The wrong or contaminated brakefluid could result in damage to thebrake system. This could result inthe loss of braking leading to apossible injury. Always use theproper brake fluid.

Caution

If brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle's painted surfaces, thepaint finish can be damaged.Immediately wash off any paintedsurface.

Battery - North AmericaThe original equipment battery ismaintenance free. Do not removethe cap and do not add fluid.

Refer to the replacement numbershown on the original battery labelwhen a new battery is needed. SeeEngine Compartment Overview0 216 for battery location.


234 Vehicle Care

{ Warning

WARNING: Battery posts,terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and leadcompounds, chemicals known tothe State of California to causecancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. Batteries alsocontain other chemicals known tothe State of California to causecancer. WASH HANDS AFTERHANDLING. See CaliforniaProposition 65 Warning 0 213.

Vehicle Storage

{ Warning

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you arenot careful. See Jump Starting -North America 0 280 for tips onworking around a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery to keep the battery fromrunning down.

Extended Storage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery or use a battery tricklecharger.

Rear Axle

When to Check Lubricant

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule0 295 to determine how often tocheck the lubricant.

How to Check Lubricant

To get an accurate reading, thevehicle should be on a levelsurface.

The proper level for the 2500 and3500 Series is from 0 to 6 mm (1/4 in) below the bottom of the fill plughole. Add only enough fluid to reachthe proper level.

What to Use

Refer to Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 303 to determine whatkind of lubricant to use.

Noise Control SystemNoise Emission Warranty

General Motors warrants to the firstperson who purchases this vehiclefor purposes other than resale andto each subsequent purchaser that


Vehicle Care 235

this vehicle as manufactured byGeneral Motors was designed, builtand equipped to conform at the timeit left General Motors control with allapplicable U.S. EPA Noise ControlRegulations. This warranty coversthis vehicle as designed, built andequipped by General Motors and isnot limited to any particular part,component or system of themanufactured by General Motors.Defects in design, assembly or anypart, component or system of thevehicle manufactured by GeneralMotors, which at the time it leftGeneral Motors control causednoise emissions to exceed Federalstandards, are covered by thewarranty for the life of the vehicle.

The following information relates tocompliance with federal noiseemission standards for vehicles witha Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR) of more than 4 536 kg(10,000 lbs). The MaintenanceSchedule provides information onmaintaining the noise control systemto minimize degradation of the noiseemission control system during the

life of the vehicle. The noise controlsystem warranty is given in thevehicle warranty booklet.

These standards apply only tovehicles sold in the United States.

Federal law prohibits the followingacts or the causing thereof:

1. The removal or renderinginoperative by any person,other than for purposes ofmaintenance, repair orreplacement, of any device orelement of design incorporatedinto any new vehicle for thepurpose of noise control, priorto its sale or delivery to theultimate purchaser or while it isin use; or

2. The use of the vehicle aftersuch device or element ofdesign has been removed orrendered inoperative by anyperson.

Among those acts presumed toconstitute tampering are the actslisted below.

Insulation:

. Removal of the noise shields orany underhood insulation.

Engine:

. Removal or rendering enginespeed governor, if the vehiclehas one, inoperative so as toallow engine speed to exceedmanufacturer specifications.

Fan and Drive:

. Removal of fan clutch, if thevehicle has one, or renderingclutch inoperative.

. Removal of the fan shroud, if thevehicle has one.

Air Intake:

. Removal of the air cleanersilencer.

. Modification of the air cleaner.

Exhaust:

. Removal of the muffler and/orresonator.

. Removal of the exhaust pipesand exhaust pipe clamps.


236 Vehicle Care

Fuel Operated Heater (FOH) —Diesel Engine:

. Removal of the muffler.

Starter Switch Check

{ Warning

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Apply both the parking brakeand the regular brake.

Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turn offthe engine immediately if itstarts.

3. Try to start the engine in eachgear. The vehicle should startonly in P (Park) or N (Neutral).

If the vehicle starts in any otherposition, contact your dealer forservice.

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlFunction Check

{ Warning

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It should beparked on a level surface.

2. Apply the parking brake. Beready to apply the regularbrake immediately if the vehiclebegins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn theignition on, but do not start theengine. Without applying theregular brake, try to move the

shift lever out of P (Park) withnormal effort. If the shift levermoves out of P (Park), contactyour dealer for service.

Ignition TransmissionLock CheckWhile parked and with the parkingbrake set, try to turn the ignition toLOCK/OFF in each shift leverposition.

. The ignition should turn toLOCK/OFF only when the shiftlever is in P (Park).

. The ignition key should comeout only in LOCK/OFF.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.


Vehicle Care 237

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ Warning

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.

. To check the parking brake'sholding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove footpressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

. To check the P (Park)mechanism's holding ability:With the engine running, shift toP (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear and cracking.See Maintenance Schedule 0 295.

Replacement blades come indifferent types and are removed indifferent ways. For proper type andlength, see MaintenanceReplacement Parts 0 304.

Caution

Allowing the wiper arm to touchthe windshield when no wiperblade is installed could damagethe windshield. Any damage thatoccurs would not be covered by

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

the vehicle warranty. Do not allowthe wiper arm to touch thewindshield.

1. Lift the wiper arm away fromthe windshield.

2. Push the release lever (2) todisengage the hook and pushthe wiper arm (1) out of theblade assembly (3).

3. Push the new blade assemblysecurely on the wiper arm untilthe release lever clicks intoplace.


238 Vehicle Care

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset andshould need no further adjustment.

If the vehicle is damaged in a crash,the headlamp aim may be affected.If adjustment to the headlamps isnecessary, see your dealer.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, see Replacement Bulbs0 242.

For any bulb-changing procedurenot listed in this section, contactyour dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{ Warning

Halogen bulbs have pressurizedgas inside and can burst if youdrop or scratch the bulb. You orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the instructionson the bulb package.

Headlamps

Composite Headlamp

1. High-Beam Headlamp2. Low-Beam Headlamp

To remove the headlamp assemblyfrom the vehicle and access thebulbs:

1. Open the hood. See Hood0 214.


Vehicle Care 239

2. Remove the two bolts from theheadlamp assembly.

3. Lift the headlamp assembly torelease the lower tabs from theradiator support.

4. Turn the headlamp forward andupward to remove it from thegrille.

5. Disconnect the electricalconnector.

6. Turn the bulb counterclockwiseone-quarter turn to remove itfrom the headlamp assembly.

7. Install the new bulb into theheadlamp assembly andconnect the electricalconnector.

8. Reverse the steps to reinstallthe headlamp assembly.

To prevent headlamp vibrationand shortened bulb life, besure to insert the headlamp

assembly tabs in the slots atthe lower portion of thehousing.

Sealed-Beam Headlamp

1. Headlamp Retainer Screws2. Headlamp Retainer3. Sealed-Beam

Headlamp Bulb

To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Remove the four screws (1)from the headlamp retainer (2).

Pull the retainer (2) out and setit aside.


240 Vehicle Care

2. Pull the bulb (3) forward to gainaccess to the electricalconnector.

3. Disconnect the electricalconnector (2) and remove theheadlamp bulb (1).

4. Reverse Steps 1–3 to reinstallthe headlamp.

Front Turn Signal,Sidemarker, and ParkingLamps

1. Front Parking and TurnSignal Lamp

2. Front Sidemarker Lamp

To replace the front turn signal,sidemarker, and/or parking lampbulb(s):

1. Use a small tool to unlatch theoutboard clip on the lamp bypushing inboard and prying thelamp assembly forward.

2. Remove the lamp from thegrille.

3. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise one-quarterturn and remove it from thelamp assembly.

4. Remove the bulb from thesocket by pulling it straight out.

5. Replace the bulb.

6. Turn the bulb socket clockwiseto reinstall it in the lampassembly.

7. Reinstall the lamp assemblyinto the grille until the outboardclip snaps into place.


Vehicle Care 241

TaillampsTo replace a taillamp/turn signallamp or back-up lamp bulb:

1. Remove the two inboard nutsfrom the inside of the taillampassembly.

2. The third nut (3) is under theapplique piece (2) above thelamp. Remove the two inboardapplique nuts. Pull theapplique (2) straight rearwardslightly to clear the studs. Thenrotate the applique (2) just farenough to gain access to theouter push pins (1).

3. Carefully disconnect the pushpins (1) from the appliquebracket.

4. Remove the third nut (3) fromthe upper outboard side ofthe lamp.

5. Remove the taillamp assemblyfrom the vehicle.

6. Remove the taillamp/turn signallamp (1) or back-up lamp (2)bulb socket by turning itcounterclockwise one-quarterturn and pulling it out of thelamp assembly.

7. Remove the bulb by pulling itstraight out.

8. Push the new bulb into thesocket.

9. Reinstall the bulb socket byturning it clockwise into thelamp assembly.

10. Reverse Steps 1–5 to reinstallthe taillamp assembly andapplique.


242 Vehicle Care

Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL)The CHMSL is above the rear doorsat the center of the vehicle.

To replace a bulb:

1. Remove the two screws fromthe CHMSL assembly.

2. Remove the CHMSL assembly.

3. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise one-quarterturn to remove it from the lampassembly.

4. Pull the old bulb straight out ofthe socket and push the newbulb into the socket.

5. Turn the bulb socket clockwiseone-quarter turn to install it inthe lamp assembly.

6. Reinstall the CHMSL assemblyand two screws.

Do not block or damage the CHMSLwhen items are loaded on the roofof the vehicle.

License Plate Lamp

1. Bulb Socket

2. License Plate BulbAssembly

3. Screws

To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Remove the screws (3) thatsecure the license plate bulbassembly (2).

2. Turn the bulb socket (1)counterclockwise and pull thebulb straight out of the socket.

3. Install the new bulb.

4. Reverse Steps 1 and 2 toreinstall the license plate bulbassembly.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior LampBulb

Number

Back-up, RearParking, Stoplamp,and TurnSignal Lamp

3157KX

CenterHigh-MountedStoplamp(CHMSL)

912LL


Vehicle Care 243

Exterior LampBulb

Number

Front Parking andTurn Signal Lamp

3157KX

FrontSidemarker Lamp

194LL

LicensePlate Lamp

194LL

Headlamps

CompositeHigh-BeamHeadlamp

9005LL

CompositeLow-BeamHeadlamp

9006LL

Sealed BeamHeadlamp

H6054

For replacement bulbs not listedhere, contact your dealer.

Electrical System

Electrical SystemOverloadThe vehicle has fuses and circuitbreakers to protect against anelectrical system overload.

When the current electrical load istoo heavy, the circuit breaker opensand closes, protecting the circuituntil the current load returns tonormal or the problem is fixed. Thisgreatly reduces the chance of circuitoverload and fire caused byelectrical problems.

Fuses and circuit breakers protectpower devices in the vehicle.

Replace a bad fuse with a new oneof the identical size and rating.

If there is a problem on the road anda fuse needs to be replaced, thesame amperage fuse can beborrowed. Choose some feature ofthe vehicle that is not needed to useand replace it as soon as possible.

Headlamp Wiring

An electrical overload may causethe lamps to go on and off, or insome cases to remain off. Have theheadlamp wiring checked right awayif the lamps go on and off orremain off.

Windshield Wipers

If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windshieldwipers will stop until the motor coolsand will then restart.

Although the circuit is protectedfrom electrical overload, overloaddue to heavy snow or ice maycause wiper linkage damage.Always clear ice and heavy snowfrom the windshield before using thewindshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by anelectrical problem and not snow orice, be sure to get it fixed.


244 Vehicle Care

Fuses and CircuitBreakersThe wiring circuits in the vehicle areprotected from short circuits by acombination of fuses and circuitbreakers. This greatly reduces thechance of fires caused by electricalproblems.

Look at the silver-colored bandinside the fuse. If the band is brokenor melted, replace the fuse. Be sureyou replace a bad fuse with a newone of the identical size and rating.

Engine CompartmentFuse BlockThe fuse block is located in theengine compartment on the driverside of the vehicle.

Vehicles with upfitter content

See www.gmupfitter.com for upfitterprovisions and best practices.

Caution

Spilling liquid on any electricalcomponent on the vehicle maydamage it. Always keep thecovers on any electricalcomponent.


Vehicle Care 245

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

Mini Fuse Usage

3 Right Stop/TurnTrailer

Mini Fuse Usage

4 Spare

5 Spare

6 Fuel SystemControl ModuleIgnition

7 Body ControlModule 5



10 Instrument Cluster

11 Trailer Wiring

12 Inside Rear VisionCamera Module

13 Spare

14 Windshield Washer

16 Horn

17 Transmission

18 Air ConditioningCompressor


246 Vehicle Care

Mini Fuse Usage

19 Engine ControlModule Battery

20 Spare

21 Left Stop/TurnTrailer

22 Spare

23 Spare

24 Fuel Pump

25 Auxiliary PowerOutlet


27 Special EquipmentOption

28 Airbag

29 Steering WheelSensor

30 Engine ControlModule Ignition/Glow Plug Module

31 TransmissionControl ModuleIgnition

Mini Fuse Usage

32 TransmissionControl ModuleBattery

33 Rear Parking AidModule

34 Spare

35 Fuel OperatedHeater Module

36 Fuel SystemControl ModuleBattery

51 Left High-BeamHeadlamp

52 Right High-BeamHeadlamp

53 Left Low-BeamHeadlamp

54 Right Low-BeamHeadlamp

55 Wiper

56 Canister VentSolenoid

Mini Fuse Usage



61 Spare

62 Oxygen Sensor 2(Post), EV Fan(Diesel)

63 Spare

64 Mass Air Flow/Canister Vent

65 Odd Ignition/Injectors

66 Daytime RunningLamps 2(LOLVL-V22) (IfEquipped)

67 Daytime RunningLamps 1 (UPLVL+V22) (IfEquipped)

68 Auxiliary StopLamps

69 Trailer Stop Lamps


Vehicle Care 247

Mini Fuse Usage

70 Spare

71 Fuel Heater/FlexFuel Sensor


73 Lighter/Data LinkConnection

75 V6 Fuel Injectors

76 Spare

77 Oxygen Sensor2 (Pre)

78 Engine ControlModule Powertrain

79 Even Ignition/Injectors

J-Case Fuse Usage

1 ABS Motor

2 ABS Module

41 Spare

42 Trailer Wiring

43 Fan High

J-Case Fuse Usage

44 Starter Solenoid

45 Engine ControlModule/Powertrain

46 Spare

47 Fan Lo

74 Front Blower

Relay Usage

15 Run/Crank

37 Spare

38 Fuel Pump

39 Crank

40 Air ConditioningCompressor

48 Fan High

49 Powertrain

50 Spare

57 Fan Low

60 Fan Control


248 Vehicle Care

Floor Console Fuse BlockThe floor console fuse block is under the driver seat.

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

Mini-Fuse Usage

F1 Empty

F2 Steering WheelSensor

F3 Auxiliary ParkingLamps (Cut-Away)

F4 Front Park Lamps

F5 Trailer Park Lamps

F6 Upfitter ParkLamps

F7 Right RearPark Lamp

F8 Left RearPark Lamp

F9 Outside RearviewMirror Switch

F10 Airbag/AutomaticOccupant Sensing

F11 OnStar® (IfEquipped)

F12 Empty


Vehicle Care 249

Mini-Fuse Usage

F13 Heating, Ventilationand AirConditioning 2

F14 Heating, Ventilationand AirConditioning 1

F15 Empty

F17 Outside RearviewMirror Heater

F18 Rear WindowDefogger

F19 Compass

F20 Radio/Chime/SiriusXM SatelliteRadio (If Equipped)

F21 Remote FunctionActuator/TirePressure Monitor

F22 Ignition Switch/Discrete LogicIgnitionSensor (PK3)

F23 Instrument Cluster

Mini-Fuse Usage

F25 Heating, Ventilationand AirConditioningControl

F26 Auxiliary/TrailerBackup

F27 Taillamps Backup

F30 Upfitter CourtesyLamps

F31 Front Door Lock

F32 Rear Door Lock

F33 Cargo Door Unlock

F34 Passenger DoorUnlock

F35 Rear PassengerDoor Unlock

F36 Driver Door Unlock

F37 Empty

F38 Empty

J-Case Fuse Usage

F16 Upfitter Auxiliary 1Gas Ambulance

F24 Empty

F28 Upfitter Auxiliary 2Reading LampsGas Ambulance

F29 Rear Blower

Relays Usage

K1 Run (High CurrentMicro)

K2 Empty (HighCurrent Micro)

K3 Park Lamps (HighCurrent Micro)

K4 Upfitter Auxiliary 2(High Current Mini)

K5 Rear Defogger(High CurrentMicro)

K6 RetainedAccessory Power(RAP) (HighCurrent Micro)


250 Vehicle Care

CircuitBreaker

Usage

CB1 Power Seats

CB2 Power Windows

Wheels and Tires

TiresEvery new GM vehicle hashigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer. Seethe warranty manual forinformation regarding the tirewarranty and where to getservice. For additionalinformation refer to the tiremanufacturer.

{ Warning

. Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

. Overloading the tires cancause overheating as aresult of too muchflexing. There could be ablowout and a seriouscrash. See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 170.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Underinflated tires posethe same danger asoverloaded tires. Theresulting crash couldcause serious injury.Check all tires frequentlyto maintain therecommended pressure.Tire pressure should bechecked when the tiresare cold.

. Overinflated tires aremore likely to be cut,punctured, or broken bya sudden impact — suchas when hitting a pothole.Keep tires at therecommended pressure.

. Worn or old tires cancause a crash. If thetread is badly worn,replace them.

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 251

Warning (Continued)

. Replace any tires thathave been damaged byimpacts with potholes,curbs, etc.

. Improperly repaired tirescan cause a crash. Onlythe dealer or anauthorized tire servicecenter should repair,replace, dismount, andmount the tires.

. Do not spin the tires inexcess of 56 km/h(35 mph) on slipperysurfaces such as snow,mud, ice, etc. Excessivespinning may cause thetires to explode.

All-Season TiresThis vehicle may come withall-season tires. These tires aredesigned to provide good overallperformance on most road surfaces

and weather conditions. Originalequipment tires designed to GM'sspecific tire performance criteriahave a TPC specification codemolded onto the sidewall. Originalequipment all-season tires can beidentified by the last two charactersof this TPC code, which willbe “MS.”

Consider installing winter tires onthe vehicle if frequent driving onsnow or ice-covered roads isexpected. All-season tires provideadequate performance for mostwinter driving conditions, but theymay not offer the same level oftraction or performance as wintertires on snow or ice-covered roads.See Winter Tires 0 251.

Winter TiresThis vehicle was not originallyequipped with winter tires. Wintertires are designed for increasedtraction on snow and ice-coveredroads. Consider installing wintertires on the vehicle if frequentdriving on ice or snow coveredroads is expected. See your dealer

for details regarding winter tireavailability and proper tire selection.Also, see Buying New Tires 0 266.

With winter tires, there may bedecreased dry road traction,increased road noise, and shortertread life. After changing to wintertires, be alert for changes in vehiclehandling and braking.

If using winter tires:

. Use tires of the same brand andtread type on all four wheelpositions.

. Use only radial ply tires of thesame size, load range, andspeed rating as the originalequipment tires.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipment tiresmay not be available for H, V, W, Y,and ZR speed rated tires. If wintertires with a lower speed rating arechosen, never exceed the tire'smaximum speed capability.


252 Vehicle Care

All-Terrain TiresThis vehicle may have All-TerrainTires. These tires provide goodperformance on most road surfaces,weather conditions, and for off-roaddriving.

The tread pattern on these tires maywear more quickly than other tires.Consider rotating the tires morefrequently than at 12 000 km(7,500 mi) intervals if irregular wearis noted when the tires areinspected. See Tire Inspection0 263.

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire ismolded into the sidewall. Theexamples show a typicalpassenger vehicle and lighttruck tire sidewall.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire

(1) Tire Size : The tire size codeis a combination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection for more detail.

(2) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification) : Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.

GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(3) DOT (Department ofTransportation) : TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that thetire is in compliance with theU.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

DOT Tire Date ofManufacture : The last fourdigits of the TIN indicate the tiremanufactured date. The first twodigits represent the week(01-52) and the last two digits,the year. For example, the thirdweek of the year 2010 wouldhave a four-digit DOT dateof 0310.

(4) Tire Identification Number(TIN) : The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT code are theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,


Vehicle Care 253

tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(5) Tire Ply Material : The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(6) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG) : Tiremanufacturers are required tograde tires based on threeperformance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperatureresistance. For moreinformation, see Uniform TireQuality Grading 0 268.

(7) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit : Maximum load thatcan be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load. Forinformation on recommendedtire pressure see Tire Pressure0 258 and Vehicle Load Limits0 170.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire

(1) Tire Size : The tire size codeis a combination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection for more detail.

(2) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification) : Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.

GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines. This does not applyto Goodyear LT225/75R16 G949RSA and Goodyear LT225/75R16 G933 RSD commercialtruck tires.

(3) Dual Tire Maximum Load :Maximum load that can becarried and the maximumpressure needed to support thatload when used in a dualconfiguration. For information onrecommended tire pressure seeTire Pressure 0 258 and VehicleLoad Limits 0 170.

(4) DOT (Department ofTransportation) : TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that thetire is in compliance with theU.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

DOT Tire Date ofManufacture : The last fourdigits of the TIN indicate the tire


254 Vehicle Care

manufactured date. The first twodigits represent the week(01-52) and the last two digits,the year. For example, the thirdweek of the year 2010 wouldhave a four-digit DOT dateof 0310.

(5) Tire Identification Number(TIN) : The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT code are theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(6) Tire Ply Material : The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(7) Single Tire MaximumLoad : Maximum load that canbe carried and the maximumpressure needed to support that

load when used as a single. Forinformation on recommendedtire pressure see Tire Pressure0 258 and Vehicle Load Limits0 170.

Tire Designations

Tire Size

The following examples showthe different parts of a tire size.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire

(1) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire :The United States version of ametric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character inthe tire size means a passengervehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(2) Tire Width : The three-digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(3) Aspect Ratio : A two-digitnumber that indicates the tireheight-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 75, as shown initem 3 of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire's sidewall is75 percent as high as it is wide.

(4) Construction Code : A lettercode is used to indicate the typeof ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial plyconstruction; the letter D meansdiagonal or bias plyconstruction; and the letter Bmeans belted-bias plyconstruction.

(5) Rim Diameter : Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(6) Service Description : Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of the


Vehicle Care 255

tire. The load index representsthe load carrying capacity a tireis certified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed atire is certified to carry a load.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire

(1) Light Truck (LT-Metric)Tire : The United States versionof a metric tire sizing system.The letters LT as the first twocharacters in the tire size meana light truck tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(2) Tire Width : The three-digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(3) Aspect Ratio : A two-digitnumber that indicates the tireheight-to-width measurements.

For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 75, as shown initem 3 of the light truck(LT-Metric) tire illustration, itwould mean that the tire'ssidewall is 75 percent as high asit is wide.

(4) Construction Code : A lettercode is used to indicate the typeof ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial plyconstruction; the letter D meansdiagonal or bias plyconstruction; and the letter Bmeans belted-bias plyconstruction.

(5) Rim Diameter : Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(6) Load Range : Load Range.

(7) Service Description : Theservice description indicates theload index and speed rating of atire. If two numbers are given asin the example, 120/116, thenthis represents the load index forsingle versus dual wheel usage

(single/dual). The speed rating isthe maximum speed a tire iscertified to carry a load. Thisdoes not apply to GoodyearLT225/75R16 G949 RSA andGoodyear LT225/75R16 G933RSD commercial truck tires; seethe dual tire and single tiremaximum load and load rangeletter designations on the tiresidewall.

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure : The amount ofair inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inch ofthe tire. Air pressure isexpressed in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch).

Accessory Weight : Thecombined weight of optionalaccessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories areautomatic transmission, powerwindows, power seats, and airconditioning.


256 Vehicle Care

Aspect Ratio : The relationshipof a tire's height to its width.

Belt : A rubber coated layer ofcords between the plies and thetread. Cords may be made fromsteel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead : The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire : A pneumatic tirein which the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure : Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch)before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Tire Pressure0 258.

Curb Weight : The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including the

maximum capacity of fuel, oil,and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.

DOT Markings : A code moldedinto the sidewall of a tiresignifying that the tire is incompliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, anddate of production.

GVWR : Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limits0 170.

GAWR FRT : Gross Axle WeightRating for the front axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 170.

GAWR RR : Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 170.

Intended Outboard Sidewall :The side of an asymmetrical tirethat must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa) : The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire : Atire used on light duty trucks andsome multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index : An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure :The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating : Theload rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.


Vehicle Care 257

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight : The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight : Thenumber of occupants a vehicleis designed to seat multiplied by68 kg (150 lb). See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 170.

Occupant Distribution :Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall : Theside of an asymmetrical tire thathas a particular side that facesoutward when mounted on avehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that ishigher or deeper than the samemoldings on the other sidewallof the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire : Atire used on passenger cars andsome light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure : Vehiclemanufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure as shownon the tire placard. See TirePressure 0 258 and VehicleLoad Limits 0 170.

Radial Ply Tire : A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Rim : A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.

Sidewall : The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating : Analphanumeric code assigned toa tire indicating the maximumspeed at which a tire canoperate.

Traction : The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread : The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact withthe road.

Treadwear Indicators : Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across the treadof a tire when only 1.6 mm (1/16 in) of tread remains. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tires0 265.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards) : A tireinformation system that providesconsumers with ratings for atire's traction, temperature, andtreadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tiremanufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures.The ratings are molded into thesidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading 0 268.


258 Vehicle Care

Vehicle Capacity Weight : Thenumber of designated seatingpositions multiplied by68 kg (150 lb) plus the ratedcargo load. See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 170.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire : Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Placard : A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehiclecapacity weight and the originalequipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure.See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” under VehicleLoad Limits 0 170.

Tire PressureTires need the correct amount ofair pressure to operateeffectively.

Caution

Neither tire underinflation noroverinflation is good.Underinflated tires, or tiresthat do not have enough air,can result in:

. Tire overloading andoverheating which couldlead to a blowout.

. Premature orirregular wear.

. Poor handling.

. Reduced fuel economy.

Overinflated tires, or tires thathave too much air, canresult in:

. Unusual wear.

. Poor handling.

. Rough ride.

. Needless damage fromroad hazards.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label on the vehicleindicates the original equipmenttires and the correct cold tireinflation pressures. Therecommended pressure is theminimum air pressure needed tosupport the vehicle's maximumload carrying capacity.

For additional informationregarding how much weight thevehicle can carry, and anexample of the Tire and LoadingInformation label, see VehicleLoad Limits 0 170. How thevehicle is loaded affects vehiclehandling and ride comfort. Neverload the vehicle with moreweight than it was designed tocarry.

When to Check

Check the tires once a monthor more.


Vehicle Care 259

Do not forget the spare tire,if the vehicle has one. SeeFull-Size Spare Tire 0 280 foradditional information.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegauge to check tire pressure.Proper tire inflation cannot bedetermined by looking at the tire.Check the tire inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold, meaningthe vehicle has not been drivenfor at least three hours or nomore than 1.6 km (1 mi).

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregauge firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement.If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label, nofurther adjustment is necessary.If the inflation pressure is low,add air until the recommendedpressure is reached. If the

inflation pressure is high, presson the metal stem in the centerof the tire valve to release air.

Re-check the tire pressure withthe tire gauge.

Put the valve caps back on thevalve stems to keep out dirt andmoisture and prevent leaks. Useonly valve caps designed for thevehicle by GM. TPMS sensorscould be damaged and wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your tires andtransmit tire pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommended

by the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with atire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tirepressure telltale when one or moreof your tires is significantlyunder-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under-inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under-inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stoppingability.


260 Vehicle Care

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups aslong as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.

Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation 0 260.


Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warn thedriver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensors aremounted onto each tire and wheelassembly, excluding the spare tireand wheel assembly. The TPMSsensors monitor the air pressure inthe tires and transmit the tirepressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the TPMS illuminatesthe low tire pressure warning lightlocated on the instrument cluster.If the warning light comes on, stopas soon as possible and inflate thetires to the recommended pressureshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 170.

A message to check the pressure ina specific tire displays in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). The lowtire pressure warning light and theDIC warning message come on ateach ignition cycle until the tires areinflated to the correct inflationpressure. If the vehicle has DICbuttons, tire pressure levels can beviewed. For additional informationand details about the DIC operationand displays, see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) 0 105 and TireMessages 0 116.


Vehicle Care 261

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thiscould be an early indicator that theair pressure is getting low andneeds to be inflated to the properpressure.

A Tire and Loading Information labelshows the size of the originalequipment tires and the correctinflation pressure for the tires whenthey are cold. See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 170, for an example of theTire and Loading Information labeland its location. Also see TirePressure 0 258.

The TPMS can warn about a lowtire pressure condition but it doesnot replace normal tiremaintenance. See Tire Inspection0 263, Tire Rotation 0 263 and Tires0 250.

Caution

Tire sealant materials are not allthe same. A non-approved tiresealant could damage the TPMSsensors. TPMS sensor damagecaused by using an incorrect tiresealant is not covered by thevehicle warranty. Always use onlythe GM approved tire sealantavailable through your dealer orincluded in the vehicle.

TPMS Malfunction Light andMessage

The TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thelow tire pressure warning lightflashes for about one minute andthen stays on for the remainder ofthe ignition cycle. A DIC warningmessage also displays. Themalfunction light and DIC warningmessage come on at each ignition

cycle until the problem is corrected.Some of the conditions that cancause these to come on are:

. One of the road tires has beenreplaced with the spare tire. Thespare tire does not have aTPMS sensor. The malfunctionlight and the DIC messageshould go off after the road tireis replaced and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See "TPMS SensorMatching Process" later in thissection.

. The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was not done or notcompleted successfully afterrotating the tires. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off aftersuccessfully completing thesensor matching process. See"TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess" later in this section.

. One or more TPMS sensors aremissing or damaged. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off when theTPMS sensors are installed and


262 Vehicle Care

the sensor matching process isperformed successfully. Seeyour dealer for service.

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match the original equipmenttires or wheels. Tires and wheelsother than those recommendedcould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires 0 266.

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioningproperly, it cannot detect or signal alow tire condition. See your dealerfor service if the TPMS malfunctionlight and DIC message come onand stay on.

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. The identificationcode needs to be matched to a newtire/wheel position after rotating thevehicle’s tires or replacing one or

more of the TPMS sensors. Also,the TPMS sensor matching processshould be performed after replacinga spare tire with a road tirecontaining the TPMS sensor. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off at the nextignition cycle. The sensors arematched to the tire/wheel positions,using a TPMS relearn tool, in thefollowing order: driver side front tire,passenger side front tire, passengerside rear tire, and driver side rear.See your dealer for service or topurchase a relearn tool. A TPMSrelearn tool can also be purchased.See Tire Pressure Monitor SensorActivation Tool atwww.gmtoolsandequipment.com orcall 1-800-GM TOOLS(1-800-468-6657).

There are two minutes to match thefirst tire/wheel position, andfive minutes overall to match all fourtire/wheel positions. If it takeslonger, the matching process stopsand must be restarted.

The TPMS sensor matchingprocess is:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUNwith the engine off.

3. Press the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter's Qand K buttons at the sametime for approximatelyfive seconds. The horn soundstwice to signal the receiver is inrelearn mode and TIRELEARNING ACTIVE messagedisplays on the DIC screen.

If the vehicle does not haveRKE, press the DriverInformation Center (DIC)vehicle information button untilthe PRESS V TO RELEARNTIRE POSITIONS messagedisplays. The horn soundstwice to signal the receiver is inrelearn mode and TIRELEARNING ACTIVE messagedisplays on the DIC screen.

4. Start with the driver sidefront tire.


Vehicle Care 263

5. Place the relearn tool againstthe tire sidewall, near the valvestem. Then press the button toactivate the TPMS sensor.A horn chirp confirms that thesensor identification code hasbeen matched to this tire andwheel position.

6. Proceed to the passenger sidefront tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 5.

7. Proceed to the passenger siderear tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 5.

8. Proceed to the driver side reartire, and repeat the procedurein Step 5. The horn sounds twotimes to indicate the sensoridentification code has beenmatched to the driver side reartire, and the TPMS sensormatching process is no longeractive. The TIRE LEARNINGACTIVE message on the DICdisplay screen goes off.

9. Turn the ignition switch toLOCK/OFF.

10. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressurelevel as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

Tire InspectionWe recommend that the tires,including the spare tire, if thevehicle has one, be inspectedfor signs of wear or damage atleast once a month.

Replace the tire if:

. The indicators at three ormore places around the tirecan be seen.

. There is cord or fabricshowing through the tire'srubber.

. The tread or sidewall iscracked, cut, or snaggeddeep enough to show cord orfabric.

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannotbe repaired well because ofthe size or location of thedamage.

Tire RotationTires should be rotated every12 000 km (7,500 mi). SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 295.

Tires are rotated to achieve auniform wear for all tires. Thefirst rotation is the mostimportant.

Any time unusual wear isnoticed, rotate the tires as soonas possible and check the wheelalignment. Also check fordamaged tires or wheels. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tires0 265 and Wheel Replacement0 269.


264 Vehicle Care

Use this rotation pattern whenrotating the tires.

If the vehicle has a compactspare tire, do not include it in thetire rotation.

Adjust the front and rear tires tothe recommended inflationpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label afterthe tires have been rotated. SeeTire Pressure 0 258 and VehicleLoad Limits 0 170.

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation 0 260.

Check that all wheel nuts areproperly tightened. See “WheelNut Torque” under Capacitiesand Specifications 0 307.

{ Warning

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

Lightly coat the center of thewheel hub with wheel bearinggrease after a wheel change ortire rotation to prevent corrosionor rust build-up. Do not getgrease on the flat wheelmounting surface or on thewheel nuts or bolts.

Dual Tire RotationWhen the vehicle is new,or whenever a wheel, wheel bolt,or wheel nut is replaced, check thewheel nut torque after160, 1 600, and 10 000 km (100,1,000, and 6,000 mi) of driving. Forproper wheel nut tighteninginformation, see “Removing the FlatTire and Installing the Spare Tire”under Tire Changing 0 272. Alsosee “Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specifications 0 307.

The outer tire on a dual wheel setupgenerally wears faster than theinner tire. Tires last longer and wearmore evenly if they are rotated. SeeTire Inspection 0 263 and TireRotation 0 263. Also seeMaintenance Schedule 0 295.

{ Warning

If the vehicle is operated with atire that is underinflated, the tirecan overheat. An overheated tirecan lose air suddenly or catch

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 265

Warning (Continued)

fire. You or others could beinjured. Properly inflate all tires,including the spare.

See Tires 0 250 and Tire Pressure0 258 for more information onproper tire inflation.

When It Is Time for NewTiresFactors such as maintenance,temperatures, driving speeds,vehicle loading, and road conditionsaffect the wear rate of the tires.

Treadwear indicators are one way totell when it is time for new tires.Treadwear indicators appear whenthe tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)or less of tread remaining.

Some commercial truck tires,including Goodyear LT225/75R16G949 RSA and Goodyear LT225/75R16 G933 RSD, may not havetreadwear indicators. If the tires donot have treadwear indicators,replace the tires when the treaddepth is down to 3.2 mm (1/8 in) forthe front tires, or 1.6 mm (1/16 in) forthe rear tires. See Tire Inspection0 263 and Tire Rotation 0 263 foradditional information.

The rubber in tires ages over time.This also applies to the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, even if it isnever used. Multiple factorsincluding temperatures, loadingconditions, and inflation pressuremaintenance affect how fast agingtakes place. GM recommends thattires, including the spare ifequipped, be replaced after sixyears, regardless of tread wear. Thetire manufacture date is the last fourdigits of the DOT Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN) which is molded intoone side of the tire sidewall. Thefirst two digits represent the week(01-52) and the last two digits, theyear. For example, the third week ofthe year 2010 would have afour-digit DOT date of 0310.

Vehicle Storage

Tires age when stored normallymounted on a parked vehicle. Parka vehicle that will be stored for atleast a month in a cool, dry, cleanarea away from direct sunlight toslow aging. This area should be free


266 Vehicle Care

of grease, gasoline or othersubstances that can deterioraterubber.

Parking for an extended period cancause flat spots on the tires thatmay result in vibrations whiledriving. When storing a vehicle forat least a month, remove the tires orraise the vehicle to reduce theweight from the tires.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for the vehicle. Theoriginal equipment tires installedwere designed to meet GeneralMotors Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec)system rating. Whenreplacement tires are needed,GM strongly recommendsbuying tires with the same TPCSpec rating.

GM's exclusive TPC Specsystem considers over a dozencritical specifications that impactthe overall performance of the

vehicle, including brake systemperformance, ride and handling,traction control, and tirepressure monitoringperformance. GM's TPC Specnumber is molded onto the tire'ssidewall near the tire size. If thetires have an all-season treaddesign, the TPC Spec numberwill be followed by MS for mudand snow. See Tire SidewallLabeling 0 252 for additionalinformation.

GM recommends replacing worntires in complete sets of four (sixfor dual rear wheels). Uniformtread depth on all tires will helpto maintain the performance ofthe vehicle. Braking andhandling performance may beadversely affected if all the tiresare not replaced at the sametime. If proper rotation andmaintenance have been done,all four tires (six for dual rearwheels) should wear out atabout the same time.

See Tire Rotation 0 263 forinformation on proper tirerotation. However, if it isnecessary to replace only oneaxle set of worn tires, place thenew tires on the rear axle (twofor single rear wheels, four fordual rear wheels).

{ Warning

Tires could explode duringimproper service. Attemptingto mount or dismount a tirecould cause injury or death.Only your dealer or authorizedtire service center shouldmount or dismount the tires.

{ Warning

Mixing tires of different sizes,brands, or types may causeloss of control of the vehicle,resulting in a crash or other

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 267

Warning (Continued)

vehicle damage. Use thecorrect size, brand, and typeof tires on all wheels.

This vehicle may have adifferent size spare than theroad tires originally installedon the vehicle. When new, thevehicle included a spare tireand wheel assembly with asimilar overall diameter as theroad tires and wheels, so it isall right to drive on it. Thespare tire was developed foruse on this vehicle and will notaffect vehicle handling.

{ Warning

Using bias-ply tires on thevehicle may cause the wheelrim flanges to develop cracksafter many miles of driving.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

A tire and/or wheel could failsuddenly and cause a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipmenttires may not be available for H,V, W, Y and ZR speed ratedtires. Never exceed the wintertires’ maximum speed capabilitywhen using winter tires with alower speed rating.

If the vehicle tires must bereplaced with a tire that does nothave a TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size,load range, speed rating, andconstruction (radial) as theoriginal tires.

Vehicles that have a tirepressure monitoring systemcould give an inaccuratelow-pressure warning if non-TPC

Spec rated tires are installed.See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem 0 259.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label indicates theoriginal equipment tires on thevehicle. See Vehicle Load Limits0 170 for the label location andmore information about the Tireand Loading Information label.

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf wheels or tires are installed thatare a different size than the originalequipment wheels and tires, vehicleperformance, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollovermay be affected. If the vehicle haselectronic systems such as antilockbrakes, rollover airbags, tractioncontrol, electronic stability control,or All-Wheel Drive, the performanceof these systems can also beaffected.


268 Vehicle Care

{ Warning

If different sized wheels are used,there may not be an acceptablelevel of performance and safety iftires not recommended for thosewheels are selected. Thisincreases the chance of a crashand serious injury. Only use GMspecific wheel and tire systemsdeveloped for the vehicle, andhave them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires 0 266 andAccessories and Modifications0 213.

Uniform Tire QualityGradingThe following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tires bytreadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. This

applies only to vehicles sold inthe United States. The gradesare molded on the sidewalls ofmost passenger car tires. TheUniform Tire Quality Grading(UTQG) system does not applyto deep tread, winter tires,compact spare tires, tires withnominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),or to some limited-productiontires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, theymust also conform to federalsafety requirements andadditional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)standards.

Quality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width. Forexample:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

All Passenger Car Tires MustConform to Federal SafetyRequirements In Addition ToThese Grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on aspecified government testcourse. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one andone-half (1½) times as well onthe government course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from thenorm due to variations in drivinghabits, service practices anddifferences in roadcharacteristics and climate.


Vehicle Care 269

Traction

The traction grades, fromhighest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wetpavement as measured undercontrolled conditions onspecified government testsurfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not includeacceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature

The temperature grades are A(the highest), B, and C,representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat whentested under controlledconditions on a specified indoor

laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can leadto sudden tire failure. The gradeC corresponds to a level ofperformance which allpassenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B andA represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law. Warning: Thetemperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that isproperly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and TireBalanceThe tires and wheels were alignedand balanced at the factory toprovide the longest tire life and bestoverall performance. Adjustments towheel alignment and tire balancingare not necessary on a regularbasis. Consider an alignment checkif there is unusual tire wear or thevehicle is significantly pulling to oneside or the other. Some slight pull tothe left or right, depending on thecrown of the road and/or other roadsurface variations such as troughsor ruts, is normal. If the vehicle isvibrating when driving on a smoothroad, the tires and wheels may needto be rebalanced. See your dealerfor proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted orcorroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, andwheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it.


270 Vehicle Care

Some aluminum wheels can berepaired. See your dealer if any ofthese conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind ofwheel that is needed.

Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset, and bemounted the same way as the one itreplaces.

Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheelnuts, or Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) sensors with newGM original equipment parts.

{ Warning

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts can be dangerous. It couldaffect the braking and handling ofthe vehicle. Tires can lose air,and cause loss of control, causinga crash. Always use the correctwheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts for replacement.

Caution

The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brakecooling, speedometer orodometer calibration, headlampaim, bumper height, vehicleground clearance, and tire or tirechain clearance to the body andchassis.

Used Replacement Wheels

{ Warning

Replacing a wheel with a usedone is dangerous. How it hasbeen used or how far it has beendriven may be unknown. It couldfail suddenly and cause a crash.When replacing wheels, use anew GM original equipmentwheel.

Tire Chains

{ Warning

Tire chains used on a vehiclewithout the proper amount ofclearance can cause damage tothe brakes, suspension, or othervehicle parts. The area damagedby the tire chains could cause youto lose control of the vehicle andyou or others may be injured in acrash. To help avoid damage tothe vehicle, drive slowly, readjust,or remove the device if it iscontacting the vehicle. Do notspin the vehicle's tires. Follow themanufacturer's instructions.

Caution

Use tire chains only where legaland only when necessary. Usechains that are the proper size forthe tires. Install them on the tiresof the rear axle. Do not use

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 271

Caution (Continued)

chains on the tires of the frontaxle. Tighten them as tightly aspossible with the ends securelyfastened. Drive slowly and followthe chain manufacturer'sinstructions. If the chains contactthe vehicle, stop and retightenthem. If the contact continues,slow down until it stops. Drivingtoo fast or spinning the wheelswith chains on will damage thevehicle.

For Cutaway models with LT245/75R16, LT225/75R16 or LT215/85R16 size single or dual rear tires,use Low Profile Z-Chain or SAEClass S cables.

For Cargo or Passenger modelswith P245/70R17, LT225/75R16 orLT245/75R16 size tires, use LowProfile Z-Chain cables. SAE Class Schains are not recommended.

If the vehicle has dual rear tires, donot use individual tire chains. Usetire chains that fit across both dualtires.

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blow outwhile driving, especially if the tiresare maintained properly. See Tires0 250. If air goes out of a tire, it ismuch more likely to leak out slowly.But if there ever is a blowout, hereare a few tips about what to expectand what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tirecreates a drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your foot offthe accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop, well off theroad, if possible.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correction asused in a skid. Stop pressing theaccelerator pedal and steer tostraighten the vehicle. It may be

very bumpy and noisy. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road,if possible.

{ Warning

Driving on a flat tire will causepermanent damage to the tire.Re-inflating a tire after it has beendriven on while severelyunderinflated or flat may cause ablowout and a serious crash.Never attempt to re-inflate a tirethat has been driven on whileseverely underinflated or flat.Have your dealer or an authorizedtire service center repair orreplace the flat tire as soon aspossible.

{ Warning

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairs isdangerous without theappropriate safety equipment and

(Continued)


272 Vehicle Care

Warning (Continued)

training. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place, well off the road,if possible. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers 0 126.

{ Warning

Changing a tire can bedangerous. The vehicle can slipoff the jack and roll over or fallcausing injury or death. Find alevel place to change the tire. Tohelp prevent the vehicle frommoving:

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission in1 (First) or R (Reverse).

3. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

4. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

5. Place wheel blocks,if equipped, on both sides ofthe tire at the oppositecorner of the tire beingchanged.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (2),use the following example as aguide to assist in the placement ofthe wheel blocks (1), if equipped.

1. Wheel Block (If Equipped)2. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to repair or change a tire.

Tire Changing

Removing the Spare Tire andTools

Equipment needed for a cargo vanor a passenger van is in thepassenger side rear corner of thevehicle.


Vehicle Care 273

Remove the retaining wing bolt andlift it off of the mounting bracket.

Equipment needed for a15-passenger seating arrangementis secured on the rear floor on thepassenger side of the vehicle.

Remove the retaining wing bolt andlift it out of the mounting bracket toaccess the equipment.

The tools you will be using include:

1. Jack2. Hoist Handle3. Extension(s)4. Wheel Wrench5. Jack Handle

The spare tire is mounted in the rearunderbody of the vehicle.

Use the hoist handle, extension(s),and the wheel wrench to remove theunderbody-mounted spare tire.

To lower the spare tire from thevehicle:

1. Spare Tire2. Tire/Wheel Retainer3. Hoist Cable


274 Vehicle Care

4. Hoist Assembly5. Hoist Shaft6. Hoist Handle and

Extension(s)7. Wheel Wrench

1. Assemble the wheel wrench (7)to the hoist handle and theextension(s) (6).

2. Open the passenger siderear door.

3. Insert the chisel end of thehoist handle, on an angle,through the hole in the rearfloor panel above the bumper.

Be sure the hoist handleconnects to the hoist shaft. Thechiseled end of the hoisthandle is used to lower thespare tire.

4. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to lower thespare tire to the ground.Continue to turn the wheelwrench until the spare tire canbe pulled out from under thevehicle.

5. Remove the wheel wrench,extension(s), and hoist handleassembly from the hoist shaft.

6. When the tire has beenlowered, pull it closer to reachthe tire retainer and pull it upthrough the wheel opening.

For a vehicle that wascompleted from a cab andchassis, refer to the informationfrom the body supplier/installer.

The spare tire is a full-size tire,like the other tires on thevehicle.

7. Put the spare tire near theflat tire.

8. Close the passenger siderear door.

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

If the vehicle has plastic wheel nutcaps, loosen them by turning thewheel wrench counterclockwise.The wheel nut caps are designed toremain with the center cap. Removethe center cap.

If the wheel has a smooth centerpiece, place the chisel end of thewheel wrench in the slot on thewheel and gently pry it out.


Vehicle Care 275

1. Jack2. Hoist Handle3. Extension(s)4. Wheel Wrench5. Jack Handle

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tire GoesFlat 0 271.

2. Loosen all the wheel nuts withthe wheel wrench. Do notremove them yet.

3. Assemble the jack and tools:

Front Flat: Assemble thejack (1) together with the jackhandle (5), one or twoextension(s) (3), and the wheelwrench (4).

Rear Flat: Assemble thejack (1) together with the jackhandle (5), two extensions (3),and the wheel wrench (4).

Front Position

Front Position

Rear Position


276 Vehicle Care

Rear Alternative Position (DieselVehicles)

4. Position the jack under thevehicle, as shown.

The front position jacking pointis on the frame. The rearposition jacking point is on therear axle.

If the exhaust system interfereswith the jack location in therear axle, such as in Dieselvehicles, place the jack (1) onthe rear axle between the axlehousing and the shockabsorber bracket in order toavoid any interference with theexhaust pipe (2).

{ Warning

Getting under a vehicle when it isjacked up is dangerous. If thevehicle slips off the jack you couldbe badly injured or killed. Neverget under a vehicle when it issupported only by a jack.

{ Warning

Raising the vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned candamage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To helpavoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lifthead into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.

5. Turn the wheel wrenchclockwise to raise the vehicle.Raise the vehicle far enoughoff the ground so there isenough room for the spare tireto fit.

6. Remove all the wheel nuts.

7. Take the flat tire off of themounting surface.

{ Warning

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a paper

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 277

Warning (Continued)

towel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

8. Remove any rust or dirt fromthe wheel bolts, mountingsurfaces, and spare wheel.

{ Warning

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle's wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.

9. Put the wheel nuts back onwith the rounded end of thenuts toward the wheel. Tighteneach wheel nut by hand untilthe wheel is held againstthe hub.

10. Turn the jack handlecounterclockwise to lower thevehicle. Lower the jackcompletely.

{ Warning

Wheel nuts that are not tight canwork loose. If all the nuts on awheel come off, the wheel cancome off the vehicle, causing acrash. All wheel nuts must beproperly tightened. Follow therules in this section to be surethey are.

{ Warning

If wheel studs are damaged, theycan break. If all the studs on awheel broke, the wheel couldcome off and cause a crash.If any stud is damaged becauseof a loose-running wheel, it couldbe that all of the studs aredamaged. To be sure, replace all

(Continued)


278 Vehicle Care

Warning (Continued)

studs on the wheel. If the studholes in a wheel have becomelarger, the wheel could collapse inoperation. Replace any wheel ifits stud holes have become largeror distorted in any way. Inspecthubs and hub‐piloted wheels fordamage. Because of looserunning wheels, piloting paddamage may occur and requirereplacement of the entire hub, forproper centering of the wheels.When replacing studs, hubs,wheel nuts or wheels, be sure touse GM original equipment parts.

{ Warning

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose orcome off. The wheel nuts shouldbe tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specification

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

after replacing. Follow the torquespecification supplied by theaftermarket manufacturer whenusing accessory locking wheelnuts. See Capacities andSpecifications 0 307 for originalequipment wheel nut torquespecifications.

Caution

Improperly tightened wheel nutscan lead to brake pulsation androtor damage. To avoid expensivebrake repairs, evenly tighten thewheel nuts in the propersequence and to the propertorque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications0 307 for the wheel nut torquespecification.

11. Use the wheel wrench totighten the nuts firmly. Turn thewheel wrench clockwise and ina crisscross sequence, asshown.

12. Put the wheel cover or thecenter cap and plastic wheelnut caps back on. Remove anywheel blocks.

Have a technician check thewheel nut tightness of allwheels with a torque wrenchafter the first 160 km (100 mi)and then 1 600 km (1,000 mi)after that. Repeat this servicewhenever a tire is removed or


Vehicle Care 279

serviced. See Capacities andSpecifications 0 307 for moreinformation.

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{ Warning

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.

1. Put the tire on the ground atthe rear of the vehicle with thevalve stem pointed down.

2. Pull the retaining bar throughthe center of the wheel, makingsure it is properly attached.

3. Pull the wheel toward the rearof the vehicle, keeping thecable tight.

4. Open the passenger siderear door.

5. Insert the chisel end of thehoist handle, on an angle,through the hole in the rearfloor panel above the bumper.

6. Turn the wheel wrenchclockwise to fully raise the tireagainst the underside of thevehicle. Continue turning thewheel wrench until the tire issecure and the cable is tight.Two clicks should occur. Thespare tire hoist cannot beovertightened.

7. Make sure the tire is storedsecurely. Push, pull (1), andthen try to turn (2) the tire.If the tire moves, use the wheelwrench to tighten the cable.

Two clicks mean the tire is upall the way.

8. Return the jacking equipmentto the proper location. Securethe items and replace the jackcover.


280 Vehicle Care

Full-Size Spare TireIf this vehicle came with a full-sizespare tire, it was fully inflated whennew, however, it can lose air overtime. Check the inflation pressureregularly. See Tire Pressure 0 258and Vehicle Load Limits 0 170. Forinstructions on how to remove,install, or store a spare tire, see TireChanging 0 272.

After installing the spare tire on thevehicle, stop as soon as possibleand check that the spare is correctlyinflated. The spare tire is made toperform well at speeds up to112 km/h (70 mph) at therecommended inflation pressure, soyou can finish your trip.

Have the damaged or flat road tirerepaired or replaced back onto thevehicle, as soon as possible, so thespare tire will be available in case itis needed again.

Do not mix tires and wheels ofdifferent sizes, because they will notfit. Keep the spare tire and its wheeltogether.

Jump Starting

Jump Starting - NorthAmericaFor more information about thevehicle battery, see Battery - NorthAmerica 0 233.

If the vehicle battery has run down,you may want to use anothervehicle and some jumper cables tostart your vehicle. Be sure to usethe following steps to do it safely.

{ Warning

WARNING: Battery posts,terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and leadcompounds, chemicals known tothe State of California to causecancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. Batteries alsocontain other chemicals known tothe State of California to causecancer. WASH HANDS AFTERHANDLING. See CaliforniaProposition 65 Warning 0 213.

{ Warning

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.

Caution

Ignoring these steps could resultin costly damage to the vehiclethat would not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Trying to startthe vehicle by pushing or pulling itwill not work, and it could damagethe vehicle.


Vehicle Care 281

1. Check the other vehicle.It must have a 12-volt batterywith a negative ground system.

Caution

If the other vehicle does not havea 12-volt system with a negativeground, both vehicles can bedamaged. Only use a vehicle thathas a 12-volt system with anegative ground for jump starting.

2. Get the vehicles close enoughso the jumper cables canreach, but be sure the vehiclesare not touching each other.If they are, it could cause aground connection you do notwant. You would not be able tostart your vehicle, and the badgrounding could damage theelectrical systems.

To avoid the possibility of thevehicles rolling, set the parkingbrake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump startprocedure. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) or a

manual transmission in Neutralbefore setting the parkingbrake.

Caution

If any accessories are left on orplugged in during the jumpstarting procedure, they could bedamaged. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Whenever possible, turnoff or unplug all accessories oneither vehicle when jump starting.

3. Turn off the ignition on bothvehicles. Unplug unnecessaryaccessories plugged into thecigarette lighter or theaccessory power outlet. Turnoff the radio and all lamps thatare not needed. This will avoidsparks and help save bothbatteries. And it could save theradio!

4. Open the hoods and locate thepositive (+) and negative (−)terminal locations of the othervehicle.

On your van, use the unpaintedradio antenna bracket as aremote negative (−) terminal.

{ Warning

Using a match near a battery cancause battery gas to explode.People have been hurt doing this,and some have been blinded.Use a flashlight if you need morelight.

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{ Warning

Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keepyour hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.


282 Vehicle Care

5. Check that the jumper cablesdo not have loose or missinginsulation. If they do, you couldget a shock. The vehiclescould be damaged too.

Before you connect the cables,here are some basic things youshould know. Positive (+) willgo to positive (+) or to a remotepositive (+) terminal if thevehicle has one. Negative (−)will go to an unpainted metalpart or to a remote negative (−)terminal if the vehicle has one.On your van, use the unpaintedradio antenna bracket as aremote negative (−) terminal.

Do not connect positive (+) tonegative (−) or you will get ashort that would damage thebattery and maybe other partstoo. And do not connect thenegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on thedead battery because this cancause sparks.

6. Connect the red positive (+)cable to the positive (+)terminal of the dead battery.Use a remote positive (+)terminal if the vehicle has one.Do not let the other end touchmetal. Connect it to thepositive (+) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if thevehicle has one.

7. Now connect the blacknegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal of thegood battery. Use a remotenegative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.

Do not let the other end touchanything until the next step.The other end of thenegative (−) cable does not goto the dead battery. It goes to aheavy, unpainted metal enginepart or to a remote negative (−)terminal on the vehicle with thedead battery. On your van, usethe unpainted radio antennabracket as a remotenegative (−) terminal.

8. Connect the other end of thenegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal locationon the vehicle with the deadbattery. On your van, use the


Vehicle Care 283

unpainted radio antennabracket as a remotenegative (−) terminal.

Caution

The vehicle uses the unpaintedradio antenna bracket as aremote negative (-) terminal.Move the antenna coaxial cableout of the way before clampingthe negative jumper cable to thefixed antenna bracket. Avoidtouching the negative cable clampto the air conditioning line. Failureto do either of these coulddamage the vehicle. The repairswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

9. Now start the vehicle with thegood battery and run theengine for a while.

10. Try to start the vehicle that hadthe dead battery. If it will notstart after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

Caution

If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correct order,making sure that the cables donot touch each other or othermetal.

Jumper Cable Removal

Reverse the sequence exactly whenremoving the jumper cables.

After starting the disabled vehicleand removing the jumper cables,allow it to idle for several minutes.

Towing the Vehicle

Caution

Incorrectly towing a disabledvehicle may cause damage. Thedamage would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Do not lash or hook tosuspension components. Use theproper straps around the tires tosecure the vehicle.

Have the vehicle towed on a flatbedcar carrier or a wheel lift tow truck. Ifa wheel lift tow truck is used, thedrive wheels cannot contact theroad while the vehicle is beingtowed. A wheel dolly must be usedto lift all drive wheels off the ground.

Consult your dealer or aprofessional towing service if thedisabled vehicle must be towed.


284 Vehicle Care

Recreational VehicleTowingRecreational vehicle towing meanstowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle, such as behind a motorhome. The two most common typesof recreational vehicle towing areknown as dinghy towing and dollytowing. Dinghy towing is towing thevehicle with all four wheels on theground. Dolly towing is towing thevehicle with two wheels on theground and two wheels up on adevice known as a dolly.

Here are some important things toconsider before recreational vehicletowing:

. What is the towing capacity ofthe towing vehicle? Be sure toread the tow vehiclemanufacturer'srecommendations.

. What is the distance that will betraveled? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and howlong they can tow.

. Is the proper towing equipmentgoing to be used? See yourdealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice andequipment recommendations.

. Is the vehicle ready to betowed? Just as preparing thevehicle for a long trip, make surethe vehicle is prepared to betowed.

Caution

Use of a shield mounted in frontof the vehicle grille could restrictairflow and cause damage to thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. If using a shield, onlyuse one that attaches to thetowing vehicle.

Dinghy Towing

Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

Caution

If the vehicle is towed with all fourwheels on the ground, thedrivetrain components could bedamaged. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not tow the vehiclewith all four wheels on theground.

The vehicle should not be towedwith all four wheels on the ground.


Vehicle Care 285

Dolly Towing

Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off theGround)

To tow the vehicle from the rear:

1. Attach the dolly to the towvehicle following the dollymanufacturer's instructions.

2. Drive the rear wheels onto thedolly.

3. Firmly set the parking brake.See Parking Brake 0 187.

4. Put the transmission inP (Park).

5. Secure the vehicle to the dollyfollowing the manufacturer'sinstructions.

6. Use an adequate clampingdevice designed for towing toensure that the front wheelsare locked into the straightposition.

7. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.

If the tow vehicle will not bestarted or driven for six weeksor more, remove the batterycable from the negativeterminal (post) of the battery toprevent the battery fromdraining while towing.

Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Locks

Locks are lubricated at the factory.Use a de-icing agent only whenabsolutely necessary, and have thelocks greased after using. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants 0 303.

Washing the Vehicle

To preserve the vehicle's finish,wash it often and out of directsunlight.

Caution

Do not use petroleum-based,acidic, or abrasive cleaningagents as they can damage thevehicle's paint, metal, or plasticparts. If damage occurs, it wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Approved cleaningproducts can be obtained from

(Continued)


286 Vehicle Care

Caution (Continued)

your dealer. Follow allmanufacturer directions regardingcorrect product usage, necessarysafety precautions, andappropriate disposal of anyvehicle care product.

Caution

Avoid using high-pressurewashes closer than 30 cm (12 in)to the surface of the vehicle. Useof power washers exceeding8,274 kPa (1,200 psi) can resultin damage or removal of paintand decals.

Thee symbol is on anyunderhood compartment electricalcenter that should not be powerwashed. This could cause damagethat would not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

If using an automatic car wash,follow the car wash instructions. Thewindshield wiper and rear windowwiper, if equipped, must be off.Remove any accessories that maybe damaged or interfere with the carwash equipment.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after, to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.

Finish Care

Application of aftermarket clearcoatsealant/wax materials is notrecommended. If painted surfacesare damaged, see your dealer tohave the damage assessed andrepaired. Foreign materials such ascalcium chloride and other salts, icemelting agents, road oil and tar, treesap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., candamage the vehicle's finish if theyremain on painted surfaces. Wash

the vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreignmatter.

Occasional hand waxing or mildpolishing should be done to removeresidue from the paint finish. Seeyour dealer for approved cleaningproducts.

Do not apply waxes or polishes touncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber,decals, simulated wood, or flat paintas damage can occur.

Caution

Machine compounding oraggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.

To keep the paint finish looking new,keep the vehicle garaged orcovered whenever possible.


Vehicle Care 287

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalMoldings

Caution

Failure to clean and protect thebright metal moldings can resultin a hazy white finish or pitting.This damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

The bright metal moldings on thevehicle are aluminum, chrome,or stainless steel. To preventdamage always follow thesecleaning instructions:

. Be sure the molding is cool tothe touch before applying anycleaning solution.

. Use only approved cleaningsolutions for aluminum, chrome,or stainless steel. Somecleaners are highly acidic orcontain alkaline substances andcan damage the moldings.

. Always dilute a concentratedcleaner according to themanufacturer’s instructions.

. Do not use cleaners that are notintended for automotive use.

. Use a nonabrasive wax on thevehicle after washing to protectand extend the molding finish.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses, Emblems, Decals, andStripes

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth, and a car washing soapto clean exterior lamps, lenses,emblems, decals, and stripes.Follow instructions under "Washingthe Vehicle" previously in thissection.

Lamp covers are made of plastic,and some have a UV protectivecoating. Do not clean or wipe themwhile they are dry.

Do not use any of the following onlamp covers:

. Abrasive or caustic agents.

. Washer fluids and other cleaningagents in higher concentrationsthan suggested by themanufacturer.

. Solvents, alcohols, fuels,or other harsh cleaners.

. Ice scrapers or other hard items.

. Aftermarket appearance caps orcovers while the lamps areilluminated, due to excessiveheat generated.

Caution

Failure to clean lamps properlycan cause damage to the lampcover that would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Caution

Using wax on low gloss blackfinish stripes can increase thegloss level and create anon-uniform finish. Clean lowgloss stripes with soap andwater only.


288 Vehicle Care

Air Intakes

Clear debris from the air intakes,between the hood and windshieldwhen washing the vehicle.

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean rubber blades using a lint-freecloth or paper towel soaked withwindshield washer fluid or a milddetergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when cleaning theblades. Bugs, road grime, sap, anda buildup of vehicle wash/waxtreatments may cause wiperstreaking.

Replace the wiper blades if they areworn or damaged. Damage can becaused by extreme dustyconditions, sand, salt, heat, sun,snow, and ice.

Weatherstrips

Apply Dielectric silicone grease onweatherstrips to make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick orsqueak. Lubricate weatherstrips atleast once a year. Hot, dry climates

may require more frequentapplication. Black marks fromrubber material on painted surfacescan be removed by rubbing with aclean cloth. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants 0 303.

Tires

Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner toclean the tires.

Caution

Using petroleum-based tiredressing products on the vehiclemay damage the paint finish and/or tires. When applying a tiredressing, always wipe off anyoverspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.

Wheels and Trim—Aluminumor Chrome

Use a soft, clean cloth with mildsoap and water to clean the wheels.After rinsing thoroughly with cleanwater, dry with a soft, clean towel.A wax may then be applied.

Caution

Chrome wheels and other chrometrim may be damaged if thevehicle is not washed after drivingon roads that have been sprayedwith magnesium, calcium,or sodium chloride. Thesechlorides are used on roads forconditions such as ice and dust.Always wash the chrome withsoap and water after exposure.

Caution

To avoid surface damage, do notuse strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners,brushes, or cleaners that containacid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels. Use onlyapproved cleaners. Also, neverdrive a vehicle with aluminum orchrome-plated wheels through anautomatic car wash that usessilicone carbide tire cleaning

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 289

Caution (Continued)

brushes. Damage could occurand the repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Brake System

Visually inspect brake lines andhoses for proper hook-up, binding,leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspectdisc brake pads for wear and rotorsfor surface condition. Inspect drumbrake linings/shoes for wear orcracks. Inspect other brake parts,including drums, wheel cylinders,calipers, parking brake, mastercylinder, brake fluid reservoir,vacuum pipes, electric vacuumpump including bracket and venthose, if equipped.

Steering, Suspension, andChassis Components

Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damaged, loose,or missing parts or signs of wear atleast once a year.

Inspect power steering for properhook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,chafing, etc.

Visually check constant velocity jointboots and axle seals for leaks.

Lubricate the upper and lowercontrol arm ball joints, at least everyother engine oil change .

Lubricate the tie rod ball joints, idlerarm pivot shaft bearings, idler armsocket, and pitman arm socket, atleast every other engine oil change .

Caution

Lubrication of applicable steering/suspension points should not bedone unless the temperature is−12 °C (10 °F) or higher,or damage could result.

Body Component Lubrication

Lubricate all key lock cylinders,hood hinges, liftgate hinges, and thefuel door hinge unless thecomponents are plastic. Applyingsilicone grease on weatherstrips

with a clean cloth will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stickor squeak.

Underbody Maintenance

At least twice a year, spring and fall,use plain water to flush dirt anddebris from the vehicle's underbody.Your dealer or an underbody carwashing system can do this. If notremoved, rust and corrosion candevelop.

Do not directly power wash thetransfer case and/or front/rear axleoutput seals. High pressure watercan overcome the seals andcontaminate the fluid. Contaminatedfluid will decrease the life of thetransfer case and/or axles andshould be replaced.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosionmaterial to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosionprotection.


290 Vehicle Care

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.

Finish Damage

Quickly repair minor chips andscratches with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer to avoidcorrosion. Larger areas of finishdamage can be corrected in yourdealer's body and paint shop.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Airborne pollutants can fall uponand attack painted vehicle surfacescausing blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface. See “Finish Care”previously in this section.

Interior CareTo prevent dirt particle abrasions,regularly clean the vehicle's interior.Immediately remove any soils.Newspapers or dark garments cantransfer color to the vehicle’sinterior.

Use a soft bristle brush to removedust from knobs and crevices on theinstrument cluster. Using a mildsoap solution, immediately removehand lotions, sunscreen, and insectrepellent from all interior surfaces orpermanent damage may result.

Use cleaners specifically designedfor the surfaces being cleaned toprevent permanent damage. Applycleaners directly to the cleaningcloth. Do not spray cleaners on anyswitches or controls. Removecleaners quickly.

Before using cleaners, read andfollow to all safety instructions onthe label. While cleaning the interior,open the doors and windows to getproper ventilation.

To prevent damage, do not cleanthe interior using the followingcleaners or techniques:

. Never use a razor or any othersharp object to remove a soilfrom any interior surface.

. Never use a brush with stiffbristles.

. Never rub any surfaceaggressively or with too muchpressure.

. Do not use laundry detergents ordishwashing soaps withdegreasers. For liquid cleaners,use approximately 20 drops per3.8 L (1 gal) of water.A concentrated soap solution willcreate streaks and attract dirt.Do not use solutions that containstrong or caustic soap.

. Do not heavily saturate theupholstery when cleaning.

. Do not use solvents or cleanerscontaining solvents.

Interior Glass

To clean, use a terry cloth fabricdampened with water. Wipe dropletsleft behind with a clean dry cloth.If necessary, use a commercialglass cleaner after cleaning withplain water.


Vehicle Care 291

Caution

To prevent scratching, never useabrasive cleaners on automotiveglass. Abrasive cleaners oraggressive cleaning may damagethe rear window defogger.

Cleaning the windshield with waterduring the first three to six monthsof ownership will reduce tendencyto fog.

Speaker Covers

Vacuum around a speaker covergently, so that the speaker will notbe damaged. Clean spots with waterand mild soap.

Coated Moldings

Coated moldings should be cleaned.

. When lightly soiled, wipe with asponge or soft, lint-free clothdampened with water.

. When heavily soiled, use warmsoapy water.

Fabric/Carpet/Suede

Start by vacuuming the surfaceusing a soft brush attachment. If arotating vacuum brush attachment isbeing used, only use it on the floorcarpet. Before cleaning, gentlyremove as much of the soil aspossible:

. Gently blot liquids with a papertowel. Continue blotting until nomore soil can be removed.

. For solid soils, remove as muchas possible prior to vacuuming.

To clean:

1. Saturate a clean, lint-freecolorfast cloth with water.Microfiber cloth isrecommended to prevent linttransfer to the fabric or carpet.

2. Remove excess moisture bygently wringing until water doesnot drip from the cleaning cloth.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Rotate the cleaning

cloth to a clean area frequentlyto prevent forcing the soil in tothe fabric.

4. Continue gently rubbing thesoiled area until there is nolonger any color transfer fromthe soil to the cleaning cloth.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution followed only by plainwater.

If the soil is not completelyremoved, it may be necessary touse a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. Test a smallhidden area for colorfastness beforeusing a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. If ringformation occurs, clean the entirefabric or carpet.

After cleaning use a paper towel toblot excess moisture.

Cleaning High Gloss Surfacesand Vehicle Information andRadio Displays

Use a microfiber cloth on high glosssurfaces or vehicle displays. First,use a soft bristle brush to remove


292 Vehicle Care

dirt that can scratch the surface.Then gently clean by rubbing with amicrofiber cloth. Never use windowcleaners or solvents. Periodicallyhand wash the microfiber clothseparately, using mild soap. Do notuse bleach or fabric softener. Rinsethoroughly and air dry beforenext use.

Caution

Do not attach a device with asuction cup to the display. Thismay cause damage and wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Instrument Panel, Leather,Vinyl, Other Plastic Surfaces,Low Gloss Paint Surfaces andNatural Open Pore WoodSurfaces

Use a soft microfiber clothdampened with water to removedust and loose dirt. For a morethorough cleaning, use a softmicrofiber cloth dampened with amild soap solution.

Caution

Soaking or saturating leather,especially perforated leather, aswell as other interior surfaces,may cause permanent damage.Wipe excess moisture from thesesurfaces after cleaning and allowthem to dry naturally. Never useheat, steam, or spot removers. Donot use cleaners that containsilicone or wax-based products.Cleaners containing thesesolvents can permanently changethe appearance and feel ofleather or soft trim, and are notrecommended.

Do not use cleaners that increasegloss, especially on the instrumentpanel. Reflected glare can decreasevisibility through the windshieldunder certain conditions.

Caution

Use of air fresheners may causepermanent damage to plasticsand painted surfaces. If an airfreshener comes in contact withany plastic or painted surface inthe vehicle, blot immediately andclean with a soft cloth dampenedwith a mild soap solution.Damage caused by air freshenerswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Care of Safety Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

{ Warning

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.


Vehicle Care 293

Floor Mats

{ Warning

If a floor mat is the wrong size oris not properly installed, it caninterfere with the pedals.Interference with the pedals cancause unintended accelerationand/or increased stoppingdistance which can cause a crashand injury. Make sure the floormat does not interfere with thepedals.

Use the following guidelines forproper floor mat usage.

. The original equipment floormats were designed for thevehicle. If the floor mats needreplacing, it is recommendedthat GM certified floor mats bepurchased. Non-GM floor matsmay not fit properly and mayinterfere with the pedals. Alwayscheck that the floor mats do notinterfere with the pedals.

. Use the floor mat with thecorrect side up. Do not turnit over.

. Do not place anything on top ofthe driver side floor mat.

. Use only a single floor mat onthe driver side.

. Do not place one floor mat ontop of another.


294 Service and Maintenance

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 294

Maintenance ScheduleMaintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 295

Special Application ServicesSpecial ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

Additional Maintenanceand CareAdditional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

Recommended FluidsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . . . 305

General InformationThis maintenance section applies tovehicles with a gasoline engine. Fordiesel engine vehicles, see"Maintenance Schedule" in theDuramax diesel supplement.

Your vehicle is an importantinvestment. This section describesthe required maintenance for thevehicle. Follow this schedule to helpprotect against major repairexpenses resulting from neglect orinadequate maintenance. It mayalso help to maintain the value ofthe vehicle if it is sold. It is theresponsibility of the owner to haveall required maintenance performed.

Your dealer has trained technicianswho can perform requiredmaintenance using genuinereplacement parts. They haveup-to-date tools and equipment forfast and accurate diagnostics. Manydealers have extended evening andSaturday hours, courtesytransportation, and onlinescheduling to assist with serviceneeds.

Your dealer recognizes theimportance of providingcompetitively priced maintenanceand repair services. With trainedtechnicians, the dealer is the placefor routine maintenance such as oilchanges and tire rotations andadditional maintenance items liketires, brakes, batteries, and wiperblades.

Caution

Damage caused by impropermaintenance can lead to costlyrepairs and may not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, recommended fluids,and lubricants are important tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition.

The Tire Rotation and RequiredServices are the responsibility of thevehicle owner. It is recommended tohave your dealer perform theseservices every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.Proper vehicle maintenance helps to


Service and Maintenance 295

keep the vehicle in good workingcondition, improves fuel economy,and reduces vehicle emissions.

Because of the way people usevehicles, maintenance needs vary.There may need to be morefrequent checks and services.

Normal Service

All maintenance services, includingthose listed under AdditionalRequired Services, are forvehicles that:

. Carry passengers and cargowithin recommended limits onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limits0 170.

. Are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.

. Use the recommended fuel. SeeFuel 0 197.

Severe Service

In addition to the normal serviceschedule, some vehicles requireservice more often. Severe serviceis for vehicles that are:

. Mainly driven in heavy city trafficin hot weather.

. Mainly driven in hilly ormountainous terrain.

. Frequently towing a trailer.

. Used for high-speed orcompetitive driving.

. Used for taxi, police, or deliveryservice.

{ Warning

Performing maintenance work canbe dangerous and can causeserious injury. Performmaintenance work only if therequired information, proper tools,and equipment are available.If they are not, see your dealer tohave a trained technician do thework. See Doing Your OwnService Work 0 214.

MaintenanceScheduleOwner Checks and Services

At Each Fuel Stop

. Check the engine oil level. SeeEngine Oil 0 217.

Once a Month

. Check the tire inflationpressures. See Tire Pressure0 258.

. Inspect the tires for wear. SeeTire Inspection 0 263.

. Check the windshield washerfluid level. See Washer Fluid0 231.



Engine Oil Change

When the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message displays, have theengine oil and filter changed withinthe next 1 000 km/600 mi. If drivenunder the best conditions, theengine oil life system may notindicate the need for vehicle servicefor up to a year. The engine oil andfilter must be changed at least oncea year and the oil life system mustbe reset. Your trained dealertechnician can perform this work.If the engine oil life system is resetaccidentally, service the vehiclewithin 5 000 km/3,000 mi since thelast service. Reset the oil lifesystem when the oil is changed.See Engine Oil Life System 0 219.

Tire Rotation and RequiredServices Every 12 000 km/7,500 mi

Rotate the tires, if recommended forthe vehicle, and perform thefollowing services. See TireRotation 0 263.

. Check engine oil level and oillife percentage. If needed,change engine oil and filter, andreset oil life system. See EngineOil 0 217 and Engine Oil LifeSystem 0 219.

. Check engine coolant level. SeeEngine Coolant 0 225.

. Check windshield washer fluidlevel. See Washer Fluid 0 231.

. Visually inspect windshield wiperblades for wear, cracking,or contamination. See ExteriorCare 0 285. Replace worn ordamaged wiper blades. SeeWiper Blade Replacement0 237.

. Check tire inflation pressures.See Tire Pressure 0 258.

. Inspect tire wear. See TireInspection 0 263.

. Visually check for fluid leaks.

. Inspect engine air cleaner filter.See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter0 223.

. Inspect brake system. SeeExterior Care 0 285.

. Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damaged, loose,or missing parts or signs ofwear. See Exterior Care 0 285.

. Check restraint systemcomponents. See Safety SystemCheck 0 52.

. Visually inspect fuel system fordamage or leaks.

. Visually inspect exhaust systemand nearby heat shields forloose or damaged parts.

. Lubricate body components. SeeExterior Care 0 285.

. Check starter switch. See StarterSwitch Check 0 236.

. Check automatic transmissionshift lock control function. SeeAutomatic Transmission ShiftLock Control Function Check0 236.

. Check ignition transmission lock.See Ignition Transmission LockCheck 0 236.



. Check parking brake andautomatic transmission parkmechanism. See Park Brake andP (Park) Mechanism Check0 237.

. Check accelerator pedal fordamage, high effort, or binding.Replace if needed.

. Visually inspect gas strut forsigns of wear, cracks, or otherdamage. Check the hold openability of the strut. See yourdealer if service is required.

. Lubricate the steering linkage(greasable joints). See Normaland Severe MaintenanceSchedules. For severecommercial use vehicles, seeSpecial Application Services0 299.



Maintenance ScheduleAdditional RequiredServices - Normal

12000km/7,500mi

24000km/15,000mi

36000km/22,500mi

48000km/30,000mi

60000km/37,500mi

72000km/45,000mi

84000km/52,500mi

96000km/60,000mi

108000km/67,500mi

120000km/75,000mi

132000km/82,500mi

144000km/90,000mi

156000km/97,500mi

168000km/105,000mi

180000km/112,500mi

192000km/120,000mi

204000km/127,500mi

216000km/135,000mi

228000km/142,500mi

240000km/150,000mi

Rotate tires and perform Required Services.Check engine oil level and oil life percentage.Change engine oil and filter, if needed.Lubricate the steering linkage.

@ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Inspect evaporative control system. (1) @ @ @

Replace engine air cleaner filter. (2) @ @ @

Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @

Drain and fill engine cooling system. (3) @

Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (4) @

Replace brake fluid. (5)

Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices - Normal

(1) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook-up,routing, and condition.

(2) Or every four years, whichevercomes first. If driving in dustyconditions, inspect the filter at eachoil change or more often as needed.

(3) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System0 224.

(4) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.

(5) Replace brake fluid every fiveyears. See Brake Fluid 0 232.



Maintenance ScheduleAdditional RequiredServices - Severe

12000km/7,500mi

24000km/15,000mi

36000km/22,500mi

48000km/30,000mi

60000km/37,500mi

72000km/45,000mi

84000km/52,500mi

96000km/60,000mi

108000km/67,500mi

120000km/75,000mi

132000km/82,500mi

144000km/90,000mi

156000km/97,500mi

168000km/105,000mi

180000km/112,500mi

192000km/120,000mi

204000km/127,500mi

216000km/135,000mi

228000km/142,500mi

240000km/150,000mi

Rotate tires and perform Required Services.Check engine oil level and oil life percentage.Change engine oil and filter, if needed.Lubricate the steering linkage.

@ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Inspect evaporative control system. (1) @ @ @

Replace engine air cleaner filter. (2) @ @ @

Change automatic transmission fluid and filter. @ @ @

Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @

Drain and fill engine cooling system. (3) @

Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (4) @

Replace brake fluid. (5)

Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices - Severe

(1) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook-up,routing, and condition.

(2) Or every four years, whichevercomes first. If driving in dustyconditions, inspect the filter at eachoil change or more often as needed.

(3) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System0 224.

(4) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.

(5) Replace brake fluid every fiveyears. See Brake Fluid 0 232.

Special ApplicationServices. Vehicles with Dual Wheels:

Check dual wheel nut torque at160, 1 600 and 10 000 km(100, 1,000 and 6,000 mi) ofdriving. Repeat this servicewhenever a tire/wheel isserviced or removed.



. Severe Commercial UseVehicles Only: Lubricate chassiscomponents every 5 000 km/3,000 mi.

. Have underbody flushing serviceperformed. See “UnderbodyMaintenance” in Exterior Care0 285.

AdditionalMaintenance and CareYour vehicle is an importantinvestment and caring for it properlymay help to avoid future costlyrepairs. To maintain vehicleperformance, additionalmaintenance services may berequired.

It is recommended that your dealerperform these services — theirtrained dealer technicians knowyour vehicle best. Your dealer canalso perform a thoroughassessment with a multi-pointinspection to recommend when yourvehicle may need attention.

The following list is intended toexplain the services and conditionsto look for that may indicateservices are required.

Battery

The 12-volt battery supplies powerto start the engine and operate anyadditional electrical accessories.

. To avoid break-down or failure tostart the vehicle, maintain abattery with full cranking power.

. Trained dealer technicians havethe diagnostic equipment to testthe battery and ensure that theconnections and cables arecorrosion-free.

Belts

. Belts may need replacing if theysqueak or show signs ofcracking or splitting.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the belts andrecommend adjustment orreplacement when necessary.

Brakes

Brakes stop the vehicle and arecrucial to safe driving.

. Signs of brake wear may includechirping, grinding, or squealingnoises, or difficulty stopping.



. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the brakes andrecommend quality partsengineered for the vehicle.

Fluids

Proper fluid levels and approvedfluids protect the vehicle’s systemsand components. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants 0 303 for GM approvedfluids.

. Engine oil and windshieldwasher fluid levels should bechecked at every fuel fill.

. Instrument cluster lights maycome on to indicate that fluidsmay be low and need to befilled.

Hoses

Hoses transport fluids and shouldbe regularly inspected to ensurethat there are no cracks or leaks.With a multi-point inspection, yourdealer can inspect the hoses andadvise if replacement is needed.

Lamps

Properly working headlamps,taillamps, and brake lamps areimportant to see and be seen onthe road.

. Signs that the headlamps needattention include dimming, failureto light, cracking, or damage.The brake lamps need to bechecked periodically to ensurethat they light when braking.

. With a multi-point inspection,your dealer can check the lampsand note any concerns.

Shocks and Struts

Shocks and struts help aid in controlfor a smoother ride.

. Signs of wear may includesteering wheel vibration, bounce/sway while braking, longerstopping distance, or uneventire wear.

. As part of the multi-pointinspection, trained dealertechnicians can visually inspectthe shocks and struts for signs

of leaking, blown seals,or damage, and can advisewhen service is needed.

Tires

Tires need to be properly inflated,rotated, and balanced. Maintainingthe tires can save money and fuel,and can reduce the risk of tirefailure.

. Signs that the tires need to bereplaced include three or morevisible treadwear indicators; cordor fabric showing through therubber; cracks or cuts in thetread or sidewall; or a bulge orsplit in the tire.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect and recommend the righttires. Your dealer can alsoprovide tire/wheel balancingservices to ensure smoothvehicle operation at all speeds.Your dealer sells and servicesname brand tires.

Vehicle Care

To help keep the vehicle looking likenew, vehicle care products areavailable from your dealer. For



information on how to clean andprotect the vehicle’s interior andexterior, see Interior Care 0 290 andExterior Care 0 285.

Wheel Alignment

Wheel alignment is critical forensuring that the tires deliveroptimal wear and performance.

. Signs that the alignment mayneed to be adjusted includepulling, improper vehiclehandling, or unusual tire wear.

. Your dealer has the requiredequipment to ensure properwheel alignment.

Windshield

For safety, appearance, and thebest viewing, keep the windshieldclean and clear.

. Signs of damage includescratches, cracks, and chips.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect the windshield andrecommend proper replacementif needed.

Wiper Blades

Wiper blades need to be cleanedand kept in good condition toprovide a clear view.

. Signs of wear include streaking,skipping across the windshield,and worn or split rubber.

. Trained dealer technicians cancheck the wiper blades andreplace them when needed.



Recommended Fluids

Recommended Fluids and LubricantsThis maintenance section applies to vehicles with a gasoline engine. If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see themaintenance schedule section in the Duramax diesel supplement.

Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil Use only engine oil meeting the dexos1™ specification of the proper SAEviscosity grade. Look for the dexos1 approved logo for GM approvedengine oil. See Engine Oil 0 217.

Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL® Coolant.See Engine Coolant 0 225.

Hydraulic Brake System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 19299818, inCanada 19299819).

Windshield Washer Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protectionrequirements.

Power Steering System GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. 89021185, in Canada 89021186).

Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Chassis Lubrication, Parking BrakeCable Guides

Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) orlubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Front Wheel Bearings Wheel bearing lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category GC orGC-LB (GM Part No. 1051344, in Canada 993037).



Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Rear Axle SAE 75W-85 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 19300457, inCanada 19300458).

Key Lock Cylinders, Hood Hinges Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 10953481).

Weatherstrip Squeaks Synthetic Grease with Teflon, Superlube (GM Part No. 12371287, inCanada 10953437).

Maintenance Replacement PartsIf the vehicle has the Duramax diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement.

Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 22909882 A3097C

Engine Oil Filter 19303975 PF48E

Spark Plugs 12621258 41-110

Wiper Blades – 56.0 cm (22 in) 15214346 —



Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Services Performed


306 Technical Data

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

Vehicle DataCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . . 309

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, onthe left side of the vehicle. It can beseen through the windshield fromoutside. The VIN also appears onthe Vehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and certificates of titleand registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN isthe engine code. This codeidentifies the vehicle's engine,specifications, and replacementparts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specifications0 307 for the vehicle's engine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelThis label, on the rear edge of thepassenger side front door, has thefollowing information:

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

. Model designation.

. Paint information.

. Production options and specialequipment.

Do not remove this label from thevehicle.


Technical Data 307

Vehicle Data

Capacities and SpecificationsIf the vehicle has a diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement for more information.

The following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 303 for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a For the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant label located under the

hood. See your dealer for more information.

Cooling System without Rear Heat

4.8L V8 11.8 L 12.4 qt

6.0L V8 13.1 L 13.8 qt

Cooling System with Rear Heat

4.8L V8 14.6 L 15.4 qt

6.0L V8 16.1 L 17.0 qt

Engine Oil with Filter 5.7 L 6.0 qt

Fuel Tank

Cutaway (Optional Tank)* 215.7 L 57.0 gal

Cutaway (Standard Tank) 124.9 L 33.0 gal


308 Technical Data

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Passenger and Cargo 117.3 L 31.0 gal

* 4 039 mm (159 in) wheelbase or 4 496 mm (177 in) wheelbase only

Wheel Nut Torque 190Y 140 lb ft

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

4.8L V8 F Automatic 0.95–1.10 mm (0.037–0.043 in)

6.0L V8 G Automatic 0.95–1.10 mm (0.037–0.043 in)

6.0L V8 CNG B Automatic 0.95–1.10 mm (0.037–0.043 in)


Technical Data 309

Engine Drive Belt Routing

V8 Engines

If equipped with a diesel engine,see the Duramax dieselsupplement.


310 Customer Information

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Customer AssistanceOffices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 312

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . 313GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

Scheduling ServiceAppointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 317Service Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

Radio FrequencyStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects tothe United StatesGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Reporting Safety Defects tothe CanadianGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 322OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toGMC. Normally, any concerns withthe sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle will beresolved by your dealer's sales orservice departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandingscan occur. If your concern has notbeen resolved to your satisfaction,the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE : Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level.If the matter has already beenreviewed with the sales, service,or parts manager, contact the ownerof your dealership or the generalmanager.

STEP TWO : If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannot be


Customer Information 311

resolved by your dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., call1-800-462-8782. In Canada, callGeneral Motors of CanadaCustomer Care Centre at1-800-263-3777 (English),or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to give yourinquiry prompt attention. Have thefollowing information available togive the Customer Assistancerepresentative:

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN). This is availablefrom the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left ofthe instrument panel and visiblethrough the windshield.

. Dealership name and location.

. Vehicle delivery date andpresent mileage.

When contacting GMC, rememberthat your concern will likely beresolved at a dealer's facility. That iswhy we suggest following Step Onefirst.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners :Both General Motors and yourdealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfiedwith your new vehicle. However,if you continue to remain unsatisfiedafter following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two, youcan file with the Better BusinessBureau (BBB) Auto Line® Programto enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout-of-court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program prior tofiling a court action, use of theprogram is free of charge and yourcase will generally be heard within40 days. If you do not agree with thedecision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with anyother venue for relief availableto you.

You may contact the BBB Auto LineProgram using the toll-freetelephone number or write them atthe following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus,Inc.3033 Wilson Blvd.Suite 600Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100http://www.bbb.org/council/programs-services/dispute-handling-and-resolution/bbb-auto-line

This program is available in all50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and otherfactors. General Motors reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.

STEP THREE — CanadianOwners : In the event that you donot feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following theprocedure outlined in Steps Oneand Two, General Motors of Canada



Limited wants you to be aware of itsparticipation in a no-chargeMediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of Canada Limitedhas committed to binding arbitrationof owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle serviceclaims. The program provides forthe review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, andmay include an informal hearingbefore the arbiter. The program isdesigned so that the entire disputesettlement process, from the timeyou file your complaint to the finaldecision, should be completed inabout 70 days. We believe ourimpartial program offers advantagesover courts in most jurisdictionsbecause it is informal, quick, andfree of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or callthe General Motors Customer CareCentre, 1-800-263-3777 (English),1-800-263-7854 (French),or write to:

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Care CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Your inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Customer AssistanceOfficesGMC encourages customers to callthe toll-free number for assistance.However, if a customer wishes towrite or e-mail GMC, the lettershould be addressed to:

United States and Puerto Rico

GMC Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

www.GMC.com

1-800-GMC-8782 (1-800-462-8782)1-888-889-2438 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-888-881-3302

From U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994

Canada

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre, Mail Code:CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7www.gmc.ca

1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone Devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-268-6800

Overseas

Please contact the local GeneralMotors Business Unit.

Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)UsersTo assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech-impairedand who use Text Telephones(TTYs), GMC has TTY equipment



available at its Customer AssistanceCenter. Any TTY user in the U.S.can communicate with GMC bydialing: 1-888-889-2438. TTY usersin Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Experience(U.S.) my.gmc.com

The GMC online owner experienceis a one-stop resource that allowsinteraction with GMC and keepsimportant vehicle-specificinformation in one place.

Membership Benefits

E (Vehicle Information) :Download owner manuals and viewvehicle-specific how-to videos.

G (Maintenance Information) :View maintenance schedules,alerts, and OnStar onboard vehiclediagnostic information. Scheduleservice appointments.

I (Service History) : View andprint dealer-recorded servicerecords and self-recorded servicerecords.

D (Preferred DealerInformation) : Select a preferreddealer and view dealer location,maps, phone numbers, and hours.

r (Warranty TrackingInformation) : Track your vehicle’swarranty information.

J (Recall Information) : Viewactive recalls by VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). SeeVehicle Identification Number (VIN)0 306.

H (Other Account Information) :View GM Card, SiriusXM Satelliteradio (if equipped), and OnStaraccount information (if equipped).

F (Live Chat Support) : Chat livewith online help representatives.

Visit my.gmc.com to register yourvehicle.

GMC Owner Centre (Canada)gmcowner.ca

Take a trip to the GMC OwnerCentre:

. Chat live with online helprepresentatives.

. Use the Vehicle Tools section.

. Access third party enthusiastsites and social media networks.

. Locate owner resources such aslease-end, financing, andwarranty information.

. Retrieve your favorite articles,quizzes, tips, and multimediagalleries organized into theFeatures and Auto CareSections.

. Download the owner manual foryour vehicle, quickly and easily.

. Find the GMC-recommendedmaintenance services for yourvehicle.

GM MobilityReimbursement Program



This program is available toqualified applicants for costreimbursement of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipmentrequired for the vehicle, such ashand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift for the vehicle.

For more information on the limitedoffer, visit www.gmmobility.com orcall the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935. TextTelephone (TTY) users, call1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also hasa Mobility Program. Visit www.gm.caor call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)for details. TTY users call1-800-263-3830.

Roadside AssistanceProgramFor U.S.-purchased vehicles, call1-888-881-3302; (Text Telephone(TTY): 1-888-889-2438).

For Canadian-purchased vehicles,call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for Assistance

When calling Roadside Assistance,have the following informationready:

. Your name, home address, andhome telephone number.

. Telephone number of yourlocation.

. Location of the vehicle

. Model, year, color, and licenseplate number of the vehicle.

. Odometer reading, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle.

. Description of the problem.

Coverage

Services are provided for theduration of the vehicle's powertrainwarranty.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner is notcovered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.General Motors North America andGMC reserve the right to make anychanges or discontinue theRoadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

General Motors North America andGMC reserve the right to limitservices or payment to an owner ordriver if they decide the claims aremade too often, or the same type ofclaim is made many times.

Services Provided. Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock-Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out. A remote unlock maybe available if you haveOnStar®. For security reasons,the driver must presentidentification before this serviceis given.



. Emergency Tow from a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest GMC dealer for warrantyservice, or if the vehicle was in acrash and cannot be driven.Assistance is not given when thevehicle is stuck in the sand,mud, or snow.

. Flat Tire Change: Service tochange a flat tire with the sparetire. The spare tire, if equipped,must be in good condition andproperly inflated. It is the owner'sresponsibility for the repair orreplacement of the tire if it is notcovered by the warranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: If your trip isinterrupted due to a warrantyevent, incidental expenses maybe reimbursed within thePowertrain warranty period.Items considered are reasonableand customary hotel, meals,rental car, or a vehicle beingdelivered back to the customer,up to 805 km (500mi).

Services Not Included inRoadside Assistance. Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws.

. Legal fines.

. Mounting, dismounting,or changing of snow tires,chains, or other traction devices.

Service is not provided if a vehicleis in an area that is not accessibleto the service vehicle or is not aregularly traveled or maintainedpublic road, which includes ice andwinter roads. Off-road use is notcovered.

Services Specific toCanadian-Purchased Vehicles. Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement

is up to 7 liters. Diesel fueldelivery may be restricted.Propane and other fuels are notprovided through this service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: Must be over150 kilometers from where your

trip was started to qualify.General Motors of CanadaLimited requirespre-authorization, originaldetailed receipts, and a copy ofthe repair orders. Onceauthorization has been received,the Roadside Assistance advisorwill help to make arrangementsand explain how to receivepayment.

. Alternative Service: Ifassistance cannot be providedright away, the RoadsideAssistance advisor may givepermission to get localemergency road service. You willreceive payment, up to $100,after sending the original receiptto Roadside Assistance.Mechanical failures may becovered, however any cost forparts and labor for repairs notcovered by the warranty are theowner responsibility.



Scheduling ServiceAppointmentsWhen the vehicle requires warrantyservice, contact your dealer andrequest an appointment. Byscheduling a service appointmentand advising the service consultantof your transportation needs, yourdealer can help minimize yourinconvenience.

If the vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it until itcan be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem issafety related. If it is, please callyour dealership, let them know this,and ask for instructions.

If your dealer requests you to bringthe vehicle for service, you areurged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow forsame-day repair.

Courtesy TransportationProgramTo enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with theBumper-to-Bumper (Base WarrantyCoverage period in Canada),extended powertrain, and/orhybrid-specific warranties in boththe U.S. and Canada.

The Courtesy Transportationprogram is no longer available forcutaway vehicles.

Several Courtesy Transportationoptions are available to assist inreducing inconvenience whenwarranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate bookletentitled “Limited Warranty andOwner Assistance Information”furnished with each new vehicleprovides detailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generally becompleted while you wait. However,if you are unable to do so, yourdealer may offer the followingtransportation options:

Shuttle Service

This includes one-way or round-tripshuttle service within reasonabletime and distance parameters ofyour dealer's area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If overnight warranty repairs areneeded, and public transportation isused, the expense must besupported by original receipts andwithin the maximum amount allowedby GM for shuttle service. If U.S.customers arrange their owntransportation, limitedreimbursement for reasonable fuelexpenses may be available. Claimamounts should reflect actual costsand be supported by originalreceipts. See your dealer forinformation.



Courtesy Rental Vehicle

For an overnight warranty repair, thedealer may provide an availablecourtesy rental vehicle or provide forreimbursement of a rental vehicle.Reimbursement is limited and mustbe supported by original receipts aswell as a signed and completedrental agreement and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicleprovider requirements.Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements,insurance coverage, credit card, etc.Additional fees such as fuel usagecharges, taxes, levies, usage fees,excessive mileage, or rental usagebeyond the completion of the repairare also your responsibility.

It may not be possible to provide alike vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Additional ProgramInformation

All program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available atevery dealer. Contact your dealerfor specific availability.

General Motors reserves the right tounilaterally modify, change,or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and toresolve all questions of claimeligibility pursuant to the terms andconditions described herein at itssole discretion.

Collision Damage RepairIf the vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged, have thedamage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the properequipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish the vehicle resalevalue, and safety performance canbe compromised in subsequentcollisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as theparts with which the vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GMCollision parts are the best choice toensure that the vehicle's designedappearance, durability, and safety

are preserved. The use of GenuineGM parts can help maintain the GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed fromvehicles that were total losses inprior crashes. In most cases, theparts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GMpart may be an acceptable choice tomaintain the vehicle's originallydesigned appearance and safetyperformance; however, the history ofthese parts is not known. Such partsare not covered by the GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered bythat warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are alsoavailable. These are made bycompanies other than GM and maynot have been tested for the vehicle.As a result, these parts may fitpoorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems, and may notperform properly in subsequentcollisions. Aftermarket parts are notcovered by the GM New Vehicle



Limited Warranty, and any vehiclefailure related to such parts is notcovered by that warranty.

Repair Facility

GM also recommends that youchoose a collision repair facility thatmeets your needs before you everneed collision repairs. Your dealermay have a collision repair centerwith GM-trained technicians andstate-of-the-art equipment, or beable to recommend a collision repaircenter that has GM-trainedtechnicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring the Vehicle

Protect your investment in the GMvehicle with comprehensive andcollision insurance coverage. Thereare significant differences in thequality of coverage afforded byvarious insurance policy terms.Many insurance policies providereduced protection to the GMvehicle by limiting compensation fordamage repairs through the use ofaftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will not

specify aftermarket collision parts.When purchasing insurance, werecommend that you ensure that thevehicle will be repaired with GMoriginal equipment collision parts.If such insurance coverage is notavailable from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If the vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that ensures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts orGenuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read the lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofthe lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of.Move the vehicle only if its positionputs you in danger, or you areinstructed to move it by a policeofficer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involvedin the crash.

For emergency towing seeRoadside Assistance Program0 314.

Gather the following information:

. Driver name, address, andtelephone number.

. Driver license number.

. Owner name, address, andtelephone number.

. Vehicle license plate number.

. Vehicle make, model, andmodel year.

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

. Insurance company and policynumber.

. General description of thedamage to the other vehicle.

Choose a reputable repair facilitythat uses quality replacement parts.See “Collision Parts” earlier in thissection.



If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See after an AirbagInflates? 0 59.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that the vehicle requiresdamage repairs, GM recommendsthat you take an active role in itsrepair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take thevehicle there, or have it towed there.Specify to the facility that anyrequired replacement collision partsbe original equipment parts, eithernew Genuine GM parts or recycledoriginal GM parts. Remember,recycled parts will not be covered bythe GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company mayinitially value the repair usingaftermarket parts. Discuss this withthe repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts. Remember,if the vehicle is leased, you may beobligated to have the vehicle

repaired with Genuine GM parts,even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party's insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on thatinsurance company's collision policyrepair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have controlof the repair and parts choices aslong as the cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Service PublicationsOrdering Information(US and Canada Only)

Service Manuals

Service Manuals have the diagnosisand repair information on theengines, transmission, axle,suspension, brakes, electrical,steering, body, etc.

Service Bulletins

Service Bulletins give additionaltechnical service informationneeded to knowledgeably serviceGeneral Motors cars and trucks.Each bulletin contains instructionsto assist in the diagnosis andservice of the vehicle.

Owner Information

Owner publications are writtenspecifically for owners and intendedto provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. TheOwner Manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for allmodels.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,Owner Manual, and WarrantyManual.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 –$40.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Without Pouch: Owner Manual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.



Current and Past Models

Technical Service Bulletins andManuals are available for currentand past model GM vehicles.

ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-551-4123 Monday – Friday8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), seeHelm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.

Or write to:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurringobligation. Allow ample time fordelivery.

All listed prices are quoted in U.S.funds. Make checks payable in U.S.funds.

Radio FrequencyStatementThis vehicle has systems thatoperate on a radio frequency thatcomplies with Part 15/Part 18 of theFederal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) rules and withIndustry Canada StandardsRSS-GEN/210/216/220/251/310,ICES‐001.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeharmful interference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds thata safety defect exists in a groupof vehicles, it may order a recalland remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you, yourdealer, or General Motors.



To contact NHTSA, you may callthe Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motor vehiclesafety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that the vehicle has a safetydefect, notify Transport Canadaimmediately, and notify GeneralMotors of Canada Limited. CallTransport Canada at1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch80 rue NoelGatineau, QC J8Z 0A1

Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (orTransport Canada) in a situation likethis, notify General Motors.

Call 1-800-GMC-8782(1-800-462-8782), or write:

GMC Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854(French), or write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre, Mail Code:CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyThe vehicle has a number ofcomputers that record informationabout the vehicle’s performance andhow it is driven. For example, thevehicle uses computer modules tomonitor and control engine andtransmission performance, tomonitor the conditions for airbagdeployment and deploy them in acrash, and, if equipped, to provideantilock braking to help the drivercontrol the vehicle. These modulesmay store data to help the dealertechnician service the vehicle.Some modules may also store dataabout how the vehicle is operated,such as rate of fuel consumption oraverage speed. These modules mayretain personal preferences, such asradio presets, seat positions, andtemperature settings.



Event Data RecordersThis vehicle has an event datarecorder (EDR). The main purposeof an EDR is to record, in certaincrash or near crash-like situations,such as an airbag deployment orhitting a road obstacle, data that willassist in understanding how avehicle's systems performed. TheEDR is designed to record datarelated to vehicle dynamics andsafety systems for a short period oftime, typically 30 seconds or less.The EDR in this vehicle may recordsuch data as:

. How various systems in thevehicle were operating.

. Whether or not the driver andpassenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened.

. How far, if at all, the driver waspressing the accelerator and/orbrake pedal.

. How fast the vehicle wastraveling.

These data can help provide abetter understanding of thecircumstances in which crashes andinjuries occur.

Important: EDR data are recordedby the vehicle only if a non-trivialcrash situation occurs; no data arerecorded by the EDR under normaldriving conditions and no personaldata (e.g., name, gender, age, andcrash location) are recorded.However, other parties, such as lawenforcement, could combine theEDR data with the type ofpersonally identifying data routinelyacquired during a crashinvestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.

GM will not access these data orshare it with others except: with theconsent of the vehicle owner or,

if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request of police orsimilar government office; as part ofGM's defense of litigation throughthe discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GMcollects or receives may also beused for GM research needs or maybe made available to others forresearch purposes, where a need isshown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStar®

If the vehicle is equipped withOnStar® and has an activesubscription, additional data may becollected through the OnStarsystem. This includes informationabout the vehicle’s operation;collisions involving the vehicle; theuse of the vehicle and its features;and, in certain situations, thelocation and approximate GPSspeed of the vehicle. Refer to theOnStar Terms and Conditions andPrivacy Statement on the OnStarwebsite.



See OnStar Additional Information0 328.

Navigation SystemIf the vehicle is equipped with anavigation system, use of thesystem may result in the storage ofdestinations, addresses, telephonenumbers, and other trip information.See the navigation manual forinformation on stored data and fordeletion instructions.


324 OnStar

OnStar

OnStar OverviewOnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

OnStar ServicesEmergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

OnStar Additional InformationOnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

OnStar Overview

= Voice Command Button

Q Blue OnStar Button

> Red Emergency Button

This vehicle may be equipped with acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to an OnStarAdvisor for Emergency, Security,Navigation, Connections, andDiagnostics Services. OnStarservices may require a paidsubscription and data plan. OnStarrequires the vehicle battery andelectrical system, cellular service,and GPS satellite signals to beavailable and operating. OnStar actsas a link to existing emergencyservice providers. OnStar maycollect information about you andyour vehicle, including locationinformation. See OnStar’s Terms &

Conditions and Privacy Statementfor more details including systemlimitations at www.onstar.com (U.S.)or www.onstar.ca (Canada).

The OnStar system status light isnext to the OnStar buttons. If thestatus light is:

. Solid Green: System is ready.

. Flashing Green: On a call.

. Red: Indicates a problem.

. Off: System is off. Press Qtwice to speak with an OnStarAdvisor.

PressQ or call 1-888-4ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) to speak to anAdvisor.

Press= to:

. Make a call, end a call,or answer an incoming call.

. Give OnStar Hands-Free Callingvoice commands.

. Give OnStar Turn-by-TurnNavigation voice commands.


OnStar 325

. Obtain the Wi-Fi® hotspot nameor SSID and password,if equipped.

PressQ to connect to anAdvisor to:

. Verify account information orupdate contact information.

. Get driving directions.

. Receive a Diagnostic check ofthe vehicle's key operatingsystems.

. Receive Roadside Assistance.

. Manage Wi-Fi Settings,if equipped.

Press> to get a priority connectionto an OnStar Advisor available 24/7 to:

. Get help for an emergency.

. Be a Good Samaritan orrespond to an AMBER Alert.

. Get assistance in severeweather or other crisis situationsand find evacuation routes.

OnStar Services

EmergencyEmergency Services require anactive, OnStar subscription plan(excludes Basic Plan). WithAutomatic Crash Response, built-insensors can automatically alert aspecially trained OnStar Advisorwho is immediately connected in tothe vehicle to help.

Press> for a priority connection toan OnStar Advisor who can contactemergency service providers, directthem to your exact location, andrelay important information.

With OnStar Crisis Assist, speciallytrained Advisors are available24 hours a day, 7 days a week, toprovide a central point of contact,assistance, and information during acrisis.

With Roadside Assistance, Advisorscan locate a nearby service providerto help with a flat tire, a batteryjump, or an empty gas tank.

SecurityIf equipped, OnStar provides theseservices:

. With Stolen Vehicle Assistance,OnStar Advisors can use GPS topinpoint the vehicle and helpauthorities quickly recover it.

. With Remote Ignition Block,if equipped, OnStar can blockthe engine from being restarted.

. With Stolen Vehicle Slowdown,if equipped, OnStar can workwith law enforcement togradually slow the vehicle down.

NavigationOnStar navigation requires aspecific OnStar subscription plan.

PressQ to receive Turn-by-Turndirections or have them sent to thevehicle’s navigation screen,if equipped.

Turn-by-Turn Navigation

1. PressQ to connect to anAdvisor.


326 OnStar

2. Request directions to bedownloaded to the vehicle.

3. Follow the voice-guidedcommands.

Using Voice CommandsDuring a Planned Route

Cancel Route

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

2. Say “Cancel route.” Systemresponds: “Do you want tocancel directions?”

3. Say “Yes.” System responds:“OK, request completed, thankyou, goodbye.”

Route Preview


2. Say “Route preview.” Systemresponds with the next threemaneuvers.

Repeat


2. Say “Repeat.” Systemresponds with the last directiongiven, then responds with“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

Get My Destination


2. Say “Get my destination.”System responds with theaddress and distance to thedestination, then responds with“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

Destination Download

Subscribers can have directionssent to the vehicle’s navigationscreen, if equipped.

PressQ, then ask the Advisor todownload directions to the vehicle’snavigation system, if equipped. Afterthe call ends, the navigation screenwill provide prompts to begin drivingdirections. Routes that are sent tothe navigation screen can only becanceled through the navigationsystem.

See www.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

ConnectionsThe following OnStar services helpwith staying connected.

For coverage maps, seewww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

OnStar Wi-Fi® Hotspot (IfEquipped)

The vehicle may have a built-inWi-Fi hotspot that provides accessto the Internet and web content at4G LTE speed. Up to seven mobiledevices can be connected. A dataplan is required. Use the in-vehiclecontrols only when it is safe todo so.

1. To retrieve Wi-Fi hotspotinformation, press=, wait forthe prompt, then say “Wi-Fisettings.” On some vehicles,touch Wi-Fi Settings on thescreen.

2. The Wi-Fi settings will displaythe Wi-Fi hotspot name (SSID),password, and on somevehicles, the connection type


OnStar 327

(no Internet connection, 3G,4G, 4G LTE), and signal quality(poor, good, excellent).

3. To change the SSID orpassword, pressQ or call1-888-4ONSTAR to connectwith an Advisor.

OnStar RemoteLink® Mobile App(If Equipped)

Download the OnStar RemoteLinkmobile app to select Apple® iOS,Android™, BlackBerry®,or Windows® mobile devices.OnStar Subscribers can access thefollowing services from a mobiledevice:

. Remotely start/stop the vehicle,if factory-equipped.

. Lock/unlock doors, if equippedwith automatic locks.

. Activate the horn and lamps.

. Check the vehicle’s fuel level, oillife, or tire pressure,if factory-equipped with the TirePressure Monitor System.

. Send directions to the vehicle.

. Locate the vehicle on a map(U.S. market only).

. Turn the vehicle's Wi-Fi hotspoton/off, manage settings, andmonitor data consumption,if equipped.

For OnStar RemoteLink informationand compatibility, seewww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

Remote Services

Contact an OnStar Advisor tounlock the doors or sound the hornand flash the lamps.

OnStar AtYourService

OnStar Advisors can provide specialoffers from restaurants and retailerson your route, help locate hotels,or book a room.

OnStar Hands-Free Calling

Make and receive calls with thebuilt-in wireless calling servicewhich requires available minutes.

Make a Call

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready.”

2. Say “Call.” System responds:“Call. Please say the name ornumber to call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing, including a “1” and thearea code. System responds:“OK, calling.”

Calling 911 Emergency


2. Say “Call.” System responds:“Call. Please say the name ornumber to call.”

3. Say “911” without pausing.System responds: “911.”

4. Say “Call.” System responds:“OK, dialing 911.”

Retrieve My Number



328 OnStar

2. Say “My number.” Systemresponds: “Your OnStarHands-Free Calling number is,”then says the number.

End a Call

Press=. System responds: “Callended.”

Verify Minutes and Expiration

Press= and say “Minutes” then“Verify” to check how many minutesremain and their expiration date.

DiagnosticsAdvanced Diagnostics provides astatus of the vehicle’s key systemswith a monthly e-mail, or bypressingQ. Diagnostic Alerts inreal-time by e-mail or text can alsobe received. The Proactive Alertsfeature (if available) can predict andalert of potential upcomingmaintenance issues with selectcomponents on the vehicle, beforethey become a problem.

OnStar can also monitor and reporttire pressure, if vehicle is equippedwith a Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem.

OnStar AdditionalInformationIn-Vehicle Audio Messages

Audio messages may play importantinformation at the following times:

. Prior to vehicle purchase. PressQ to set up an account.

. With the OnStar Basic Plan,every 60 days.

. After change in ownership andat 90 days.

Transferring Service

PressQ to request account transfereligibility information. The Advisorcan cancel or change accountinformation.

Selling/Transferring theVehicle

Call 1-888-4ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) immediately toterminate your OnStar services ifthe vehicle is disposed of, sold,transferred, or if the lease ends.


OnStar 329

Reactivation for SubsequentOwners

PressQ and follow the prompts tospeak to an Advisor as soon aspossible. The Advisor will updatevehicle records and explain OnStarservice options.

How OnStar Service Works

Automatic Crash Response,Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,Stolen Vehicle Assistance,Advanced Diagnostics, RemoteServices, Roadside Assistance,Turn-by-Turn Navigation, andHands-Free Calling are available onmost vehicles. Not all OnStarservices are available everywhereor on all vehicles. For moreinformation, a full description ofOnStar services, system limitations,and OnStar terms and conditions:

. Call 1-888-4ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827).

. See www.onstar.com (U.S.).

. See www.onstar.ca (Canada).

. Call TTY 1-877-248-2080.

. PressQ to speak with anAdvisor.

OnStar services cannot work unlessthe vehicle is in a place whereOnStar has an agreement with awireless service provider for servicein that area. The wireless serviceprovider must also have coverage,network capacity, reception, andtechnology compatible with OnStarservices. Service involving locationinformation about the vehicle cannotwork unless GPS signals areavailable, unobstructed, andcompatible with the OnStarhardware. OnStar services may notwork if the OnStar equipment is notproperly installed or it has not beenproperly maintained. If equipment orsoftware is added, connected,or modified, OnStar services maynot work. Other problems beyondthe control of OnStar — such ashills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather,electrical system design andarchitecture of the vehicle, damageto the vehicle in a crash, or wirelessphone network congestion orjamming — may prevent service.


Services for People withDisabilities

Advisors provide services to helpSubscribers with physical disabilitiesand medical conditions.

PressQ to help:

. Locate a gas station with anattendant to pump gas.

. Find a hotel, restaurant, etc.,that meets accessibility needs.

. Provide directions to the closesthospital or pharmacy in urgentsituations.

TTY Users

OnStar has the ability tocommunicate to deaf,hard-of-hearing, or speech-impairedcustomers while in the vehicle. Theavailable dealer-installed TTYsystem can provide in-vehicleaccess to all OnStar services,except Virtual Advisor and OnStarTurn-by-Turn Navigation.


330 OnStar

OnStar Personal IdentificationNumber (PIN)

A PIN is needed to access someOnStar services. The PIN will needto be changed the first time whenspeaking with an Advisor. Tochange the OnStar PIN, contact anOnStar Advisor by pressingQ orcalling 1-888-4ONSTAR.

Warranty

OnStar equipment may bewarranted as part of the vehiclewarranty.

Languages

The vehicle can be programmed torespond in multiple languages.PressQ and ask for an Advisor.Advisors are available in English,Spanish, and French. Availablelanguages may vary by country.

Potential Issues

OnStar cannot perform RemoteDoor Unlock or Stolen VehicleAssistance after the vehicle hasbeen off continuously for five dayswithout an ignition cycle. If the

vehicle has not been started forfive days, OnStar can contactRoadside Assistance or a locksmithto help gain access to the vehicle.

Global PositioningSystem (GPS). Obstruction of the GPS can

occur in a large city with tallbuildings; in parking garages;around airports; in tunnels andunderpasses; or in an area withvery dense trees. If GPS signalsare not available, the OnStarsystem should still operate tocall OnStar. However, OnStarcould have difficulty identifyingthe exact location.

. In emergency situations, OnStarcan use the last stored GPSlocation to send to emergencyresponders.

A temporary loss of GPS can causeloss of the ability to send aTurn-by-Turn Navigation route. TheAdvisor may give a verbal route ormay ask for a call back after thevehicle is driven into an open area.

Cellular and GPS Antennas

Cellular reception is required forOnStar to send remote signals tothe vehicle. Do not place items overor near the antenna to preventblocking cellular and GPS signalreception.

Unable to Connect to OnStarMessage

If there is limited cellular coverageor the cellular network has reachedmaximum capacity, this messagemay come on. PressQ to try thecall again or try again after driving afew miles into another cellular area.

Vehicle and Power Issues

OnStar services require a vehicleelectrical system, wireless service,and GPS satellite technologies to beavailable and operating for featuresto function properly. These systemsmay not operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.


OnStar 331

Add-on Electrical Equipment

The OnStar system is integratedinto the electrical architecture of thevehicle. Do not add any electricalequipment. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment 0 211. Added electricalequipment may interfere with theoperation of the OnStar system andcause it to not operate.

Vehicle Software Updates

OnStar or GM may remotely deliversoftware updates or changes to thevehicle without further notice orconsent. These updates or changesmay enhance or maintain safety,security, or the operation of thevehicle or the vehicle systems.Software updates or changes mayaffect or erase data or settings thatare stored in the vehicle, such asOnStar Hands-Free Calling nametags, saved navigation destinations,or pre-set radio stations. NeitherOnStar nor GM is responsible forany affected or erased data orsettings. These updates or changesmay also collect personalinformation. Such collection isdescribed in the OnStar privacy

statement or separately disclosed atthe time of installation. Theseupdates or changes may also causea system to automaticallycommunicate with GM servers tocollect information about vehiclesystem status, identify whetherupdates or changes are available,or deliver updates or changes. Anactive OnStar agreement constitutesconsent to these software updatesor changes and agreement thateither OnStar or GM may remotelydeliver them to the vehicle.

Privacy

The complete OnStar PrivacyStatement may be found atwww.onstar.com (U.S.),or www.onstar.ca (Canada). Werecommend that you review it. If youhave any questions, call1-888-4ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827)or pressQ to speak with anAdvisor. Users of wirelesscommunications are cautioned thatthe privacy of any information sentvia wireless cellular communicationscannot be assured. Third parties

may unlawfully intercept or accesstransmissions and privatecommunications without consent.

OnStar - SoftwareAcknowledgements

Certain OnStar components includelibcurl and unzip software and otherthird party software. Below are thenotices and licenses associated withlibcurl and unzip and for other thirdparty software please see http://www.lg.com/global/support/opensource/index and https://www.onstar.com/us/en/support/getdocuments.html

libcurl:

COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSIONNOTICE

Copyright (c) 1996 - 2010, DanielStenberg, <[email protected]>.

All rights reserved.

Permission to use, copy, modify,and distribute this software for anypurpose with or without fee ishereby granted, provided that the


332 OnStar

above copyright notice and thispermission notice appear in allcopies.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED“AS IS,” WITHOUT WARRANTY OFANY KIND, EXPRESS ORIMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOTLIMITED TO THE WARRANTIESOF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESSFOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSEAND NONINFRINGEMENT OFTHIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NOEVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS ORCOPYRIGHT HOLDERS BELIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,WHETHER IN AN ACTION OFCONTRACT, TORT OROTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,OUT OF OR IN CONNECTIONWITH THE SOFTWARE OR THEUSE OR OTHER DEALINGS INTHE SOFTWARE.

Except as contained in this notice,the name of a copyright holder shallnot be used in advertising orotherwise to promote the sale, useor other dealings in this Softwarewithout prior written authorization ofthe copyright holder.

unzip:

This is version 2005-Feb-10 of theInfo-ZIP copyright and license. Thedefinitive version of this documentshould be available at ftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/license.html indefinitely.

Copyright (c) 1990-2005 Info-ZIP. Allrights reserved.

For the purposes of this copyrightand license, “Info-ZIP” is defined asthe following set of individuals:

Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis,Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois,Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley, EdGordon, Ian Gorman, ChrisHerborth, Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig,Robert Heath, Jonathan Hudson,Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum,Johnny Lee, Onno van der Linden,Igor Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller,Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens,George Petrov, Greg Roelofs, KaiUwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury,Dave Smith, Steven M. Schweda,Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta,Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren,Rich Wales, Mike White.

This software is provided “as is,”without warranty of any kind,express or implied. In no event shallInfo-ZIP or its contributors be heldliable for any direct, indirect,incidental, special or consequentialdamages arising out of the use of orinability to use this software.

Permission is granted to anyone touse this software for any purpose,including commercial applications,and to alter it and redistribute itfreely, subject to the followingrestrictions:

1. Redistributions of source codemust retain the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer,and this list of conditions.

2. Redistributions in binary form(compiled executables) mustreproduce the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer,and this list of conditions indocumentation and/or othermaterials provided with thedistribution. The sole exceptionto this condition is redistributionof a standard UnZipSFX binary(including SFXWiz) as part of a


OnStar 333

self-extracting archive; that ispermitted without inclusion ofthis license, as long as thenormal SFX banner has notbeen removed from the binaryor disabled.

3. Altered versions–including, butnot limited to, ports to newoperating systems, existingports with new graphicalinterfaces, and dynamic,shared, or static libraryversions–must be plainlymarked as such and must notbe misrepresented as beingthe original source. Suchaltered versions also must notbe misrepresented as beingInfo-ZIP releases–including,but not limited to, labeling ofthe altered versions with thenames “Info-ZIP” (or anyvariation thereof, including, butnot limited to, differentcapitalizations), “PocketUnZip,” “WiZ” or “MacZip”without the explicit permissionof Info-ZIP. Such alteredversions are further prohibitedfrom misrepresentative use of

the Zip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mailaddresses or of theInfo-ZIP URL(s).

4. Info-ZIP retains the right to usethe names “Info-ZIP,” “Zip,”“UnZip,” “UnZipSFX,” “WiZ,”“Pocket UnZip,” “Pocket Zip,”and “MacZip” for its ownsource and binary releases.


334 Index

Index AAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Add-On Electrical Equipment . . . 211Additional InformationOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Additional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . . . 223Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Airbag SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59

When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . .55AirbagsAdding Equipment to theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63

Light On-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98On-Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98On-Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60

Airbags (cont'd)Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251All-Terrain Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136AntennaFixed Mast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Antilock Brake System (ABS) . . . 187Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92Assistance Program,Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

AudioTheft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 131

Audio PlayersCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

AutomaticDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . 220


Index 335

Automatic TransmissionManual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

AuxiliaryDevices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Axle, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

BBatteryLoad Management . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110

Battery - North America . . . .233, 280Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . . . 237BluetoothOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

BrakeSystem Warning Light . . . . . . . . 101

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .110

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 174Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Bulb Replacement (cont'd)Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) . . . . . . . . . 242

Front Turn Signal,Sidemarker, and ParkingLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . . . 242Taillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

CCalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88CaliforniaFuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . 198Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

CaliforniaProposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . .213, 233, 280

CameraRear Vision (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . 2Capacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Carbon Monoxide (cont'd)Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

CargoTie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83

Cargo Door Relocking . . . . . . . . . . . 29Caution, Danger, and Warning . . . . 2CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . 99CheckIgnition Transmission Lock . . . 236Malfunction IndicatorEngine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Child RestraintsInfants and Young Children . . . . .66Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78, 80Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68

Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 157


336 Index

Climate Control Systems (cont'd)Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Rear Heating System . . . . . . . . . 159

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . . 317CompartmentsStorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83

Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111

ConnectionsOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

ControlTraction and ElectronicStability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34CoolantEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225Engine Temperature Gauge . . . .96

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .111

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . 312Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312Text Telephone (TTY)Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

Customer InformationService PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . . . 319

Customer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . . . 317Danger, Warning, and Caution . . . . 2Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . . . 322Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29DevicesAuxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

DiagnosticsOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127DoorAjar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111Cargo Door Relocking . . . . . . . . . .29Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28

Door (cont'd)Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30Sliding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . . 309Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

DrivingCharacteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164For Better Fuel Economy . . . . . . .22Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 168If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 169Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . 166Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . 170Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Dual TireRotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

EE85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198Electrical Equipment,Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211


Index 337

Electrical SystemEngine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Floor Console Fuse Block . . . . 248Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . 244Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

EmergencyOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223Check and Service EngineSoon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Compartment Overview . . . . . . . 216Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225Coolant Temperature Gauge . . . .96Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224Cooling System Messages . . . .111Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . 309Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . .95Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 104Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112Running While Parked . . . . . . . . 182

Engine (cont'd)Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Enhanced Technology Glass . . . . 37Entry/Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . . . 322Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 52Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 123Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 124

FFanEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Fast Idle System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177Filter,Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 126Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

FlexFuelE85 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293FluidAutomatic Transmission . . . . . . 220Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Frequency StatementRadio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Front SeatsAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

Front Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Front Turn SignalBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . 198Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . 104Requirements, California . . . . . 198System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .113

Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . 280FusesEngine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Floor Console Fuse Block . . . . 248Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . 244


338 Index

GGaugesEngine Coolant Temperature . . .96Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . .95Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97Warning Lights andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92

General InformationService and Maintenance . . . . . 294Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Glass, Enhanced Technology . . . . 37GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

HHalogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 126Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 238Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Headlamps (cont'd)Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . 105High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . 124

Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35HeaterEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Heating and Air Conditioning . . . 157High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 168Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

IIdle SystemFast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93Interior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . 36Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

JJump Starting - NorthAmerica . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

KKey and Lock Messages . . . . . . . . 113Keyless EntryRemote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . .25

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . . . 252LampsDaytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . 124Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . . 100Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Taillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Lamps, Bulb Replacement . . . . . . 240Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47LATCH SystemReplacing Parts after aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77


Index 339

LATCH, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Lighter, Cigarette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92LightingEntry/Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . 127

LightsAirbag On-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Brake System Warning . . . . . . . 101Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 104Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . 124Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 104Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . .97Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105StabiliTrak® OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . . 103

Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

LocksAutomatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29Cargo Door Relocking . . . . . . . . . .29Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . . 104Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

MMaintenanceRecords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

Maintenance and CareAdditional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . 295Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . . 100Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36MessagesAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115

Messages (cont'd)Battery Voltage andCharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111Engine Cooling System . . . . . . . .111Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113Object Detection System . . . . . .113Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . . .114Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117

MirrorsConvex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35Trailer Tow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

Mirrors, Interior Rearview . . . . . . . . 36


340 Index

Monitor System, TirePressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

NNavigationOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325Vehicle Data Recordingand Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . 174Noise Control System . . . . . . . . . . 234

OObject Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94

Off-RoadRecovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

OilEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . 219Engine Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . .95Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . . . 64Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . . 313OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322OnStar System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

OnStar® AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

OnStar® Connections . . . . . . . . . . . 326OnStar® Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . 328OnStar® Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . 325OnStar® Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325OnStar® Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324OnStar® Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325OperationInfotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 134

OrderingService Publications . . . . . . . . . . 319

OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 228Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131, 133

PParkShifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

ParkingBrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . 237

Over Things That Burn . . . . . . . 181Parking Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements, California . . . . . . 213

PersonalizationVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

PowerDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Retained Accessory (RAP) . . . 179Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

Pregnancy, Using Safety Belts . . . 51PrivacyVehicle Data Recording . . . . . . . 321

ProgramCourtesy Transportation . . . . . . 316

Proposition65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . .213, 233, 280

RRadio Frequency Statement . . . . 320Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138RadiosAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128


Index 341

Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Rear Climate Control System . . . 159Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32Rear Heating System . . . . . . . . . . . 159Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . . 193Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

RecordsMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . . 284Reimbursement Program,GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242Replacement PartsAirbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . . . 64Replacing LATCH SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government . . . . . . . . 321General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

RestraintsWhere to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Ride Control SystemsMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114

RoadsDriving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . . 309Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

SSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97Replacing after a Crash . . . . . . . .53Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . .51

Safety Defects ReportingCanadian Government . . . . . . . . 321General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 52Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . . 316SeatsAdjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . .40Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . .40

Securing Child Restraints . . . . 78, 80SecurityLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

ServiceAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Climate Control System . . . . . . . 157Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . . 214Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 100Maintenance Records . . . . . . . . 305


342 Index

Service (cont'd)Maintenance, GeneralInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Parts Identification Label . . . . . 306Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

Scheduling Appointments . . . . . 316Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .115

ServicesSpecial Application . . . . . . . . . . . 299

Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck, AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Side Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30SidemarkerBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Signals, Turn andLane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Sliding Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Special Application Services . . . . 299Specifications andCapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

StabiliTrakOFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . . 27Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . . . 236Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86

Storage AreasFront . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83

Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . . . 83Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Swing-out Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37SwitchesAirbag On-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60

Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3SystemInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Noise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

TTaillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . 312Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . . . 33Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Tires (cont'd)All-Season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251All-Terrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267Dual Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264Full-Size Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . 271Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103Pressure Monitor Operation . . 260Pressure Monitor System . . . . . 259Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252Terminology and Definitions . . 255Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 269When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186


Index 343

Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . . 102TowingDriving Characteristics . . . . . . . . 201Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208General Information . . . . . . . . . . 201Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 284Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

TractionControl System (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

TrailerTow Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116

Transportation Program,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

UUniform Tire Quality Grading . . . 268Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

VVehicleCanadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165Identification Number (VIN) . . . 306Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . . .117Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Vehicle CareTire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

WWarningBrake System Light . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Warning (cont'd)Caution and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

WarningsHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231WheelsAlignment and Tire Balance . . 269Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . . 70Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Enhanced Technology Glass . . .37Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36Swing-out Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

WindshieldWiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87

WinterDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . 237

2k16 cs6 gmc savana 23149316a.ai 1 7/27/2015 2:40:20 pm

Documents